SSS - Volume 1 of 2 (Part 3 of 3)

Proposed Upgrading of Existing St.
Stephen's School
(018)
STRUCTURAL SPECIFICATIONS
Page
(018a) (018b) (018c) (018d) (018e) (018f) (018g) (018h)
GENERAL SPECIFICATION EARTHWORK DEMOLITION AND SITE CLEARANCE BORED PILE MICRO PILES CONCRETE EXTERNAL WORKS AND SERVICES STRUCTURAL STEELWORKS
6 Pages 9 Pages 5 Pages 49 Pages 12 Pages 32 Pages 30 Pages 18 Pages
Page 1 of 1
P:\Projects\Current Projects\SD2515 - MOE Package 4A1\C - Pre-Contract\C2 Tender Doc\01A. FINAL TENDER DOCS - SSS Updated\018_Structural Specs Contents (refer PDF for Specs).doc
GENERAL SPECIFICATION
ECAS-EJ CONSULTANTS PTE LTD
Contents
1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 GENERAL ..................................................................................................... 3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ..................................................................... 3 STANDARDS AND CODES OF PRACTICE .............................................. 3 TESTING AUTHORITY ............................................................................... 4 CO-ORDINATION OF DRAWINGS ........................................................... 4 SAFETY AND WORKING CONDITIONS ................................................. 4 SETTING OUT AND PILE ECCENTRICITIES SURVEY ........................ 4 MATERIALS ................................................................................................. 5 DEFECTIVE WORK .................................................................................... 5
Specification: General (Oct 2011) Page 2 of 6
1.0
GENERAL 1.1 The term "the Engineer" in the following Specifications means the representative of the Civil & Structural Consulting Engineers, ECAS-EJ Consultants Pte Ltd. This section sets out the general requirements for carrying out the Works any works required for the project and shall be read in conjunction with all relevant work sections and other contract documents. The term the Works in the following Specifications means the whole of the Works envisaged by the Contract including the works of the local Authority and Public Undertakings required under the Contract, unless otherwise stated. The terms comments, acceptance, no objection and approval are used within the following limitation : a. The used of the terms as specify in the Clause 1.4 by the Engineer shall NOT relieve the Contractor of any responsibility to achieve the specified quality and performance of the Works under the contract. b. Any used of the terms as specified in clause 1.4 in respect to samples of materials, workmanship or methods of construction submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Specifications, are not to be interpreted by the Contractor, as denoting any degree of satisfaction with the materials used in the Works or in the execution of the Works. The contractor is to note that when the term Engineer is referred to in the Specifications, such term shall be deemed to mean the Architect as defined in the Articles of Agreement or any other person designated in writing by the Architect to exercise the power of the Architect , if so deemed required by the Architect
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
2.0
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 2.1 The Contractor shall construct the Works in strict accordance with the Specifications and the construction drawings issued by the Engineer and shall comply with all written Engineers instructions and Engineers directions given from time to time by the Engineer. The Works shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of Singapore Standards, British Standards and other applicable Codes of Practice, the Building Regulations and Local Bye Laws and to the satisfaction of the Local Building Authorities empowered to control the Works.
2.2
3.0
STANDARDS AND CODES OF PRACTICE 3.1 Ensure all the Works comply with the relevant requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below and referenced in the body of the Specifications. Any reference in the Standards or Code of Practice (CP), shall imply the latest version. The requirements of the Specification takes precedence over the

requirements of Standards. or CP. The following list of Standards and CPs are applicable : a. b. c. d. e. Singapore Codes SS and SS CP SS ISO or ISO British Standards (BS) BS EN Other standards such as ASTM(US), AS(Australia) and DIN (German), as agreed with the Engineer
4.0
TESTING AUTHORITY When tests and checks are called for in the specifications, engage a suitably equipped organization or laboratory accredited under the Singapore Laboratory Accreditation Scheme (SINGLAS) and to Engineers acceptance, to carry out the tests and checks required.
5.0
CO-ORDINATION OF DRAWINGS 5.1 Check all Drawings and schedules to ensure that there are sufficient information to carry out the Works and that all the instructions, directions, drawings and schedules provide compatible information on the Works to be carried out. In the event of any discrepancy being found between the contract drawings and/or schedules and other contract documents, notify the Engineer immediately for resolution, the Engineers decision shall be final.
6.0
SAFETY AND WORKING CONDITIONS 6.1 The Contractor shall fully comply with all the safety requirements of the latest Factories Act (Building Operations and Works of Engineering Construction Regulations) and all other relevant local bye-laws, acts, regulations, etc. The working times, noise pollution, vibration issues, etcare to conform to the authorities' requirements and the Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining permission to work beyond these times if necessary to complete the works as set out in the agreed programme. The Contractor shall also comply with authorities' requirements regarding the Earth Control Measures, removal and discharge of any spoil, debris or other materials.
6.2
6.3
7.0
SETTING OUT AND PILE ECCENTRICITIES SURVEY 7.1 The Contractor shall engage a licensed Surveyor to carrying out his surveying works. The Contractor shall be responsible for accurately setting out the works to the specified positions, dimensions, levels, and Building Lines and also

checking the site survey for dimensional and level accuracy and reporting any discrepancies before construction and building work commences. Any errors in position, level, dimension or alignment of any part of the works at any time shall be rectified by the Contractor at his own expense. The Contractor shall coordinate with other contractor (eg: Main or Piling Contractor, direct client contractor, etc) and to provide the Engineer with all facilities, equipment and labour to enable him to check the setting out and levels of the works at all times. The checking of any setting out point, line or level by the Engineer shall not in any way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility. All setting out points, benchmarks, site rails, pegs and other survey points shall be clearly marked and protected from damage or disturbance during the execution of the works. 7.2 The setting out and pile eccentricities survey shall be carried out by a licensed surveyor and an as-built drawing shall be prepared. The Contractor shall submit a AutoCad format softcopy in CD-ROM and six copies hardcopy to the Engineer.
8.0
MATERIALS 8.1 8.2 Materials are to be new and all materials are to be supplied clean , undamaged and in good condition ready to be used for the Works. These Specifications shall equally apply to additional work where variations have been authorized by the Engineer under the terms and conditions of the Contract. All materials and workmanship are to comply with the latest relevant Singapore or British Standards and/or relevant specifications , Code of Practice where applicable
8.3
8.4
Where proprietary materials are specified, these are to be used and/or fixed, strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and/or printed instructions. All materials shall be new and approved by the Engineer before use in the work. All materials which do not comply with this Contract shall be removed from the site at the Contractor's own expense.
8.5
8.6 9.0
DEFECTIVE WORK 9.1 Any defective Works shall be removed and reconstructed or otherwise rectified to the approval of the Engineer. All technical proposal by the Contractor shall be endorsed by a Professional Engineer (PE). The Contractor shall be responsible for all additional cost and time incurred. All such remedial work, if accepted by the Engineer shall be signed off by the Contractor and his PE.
EARTHWORK SPECIFICATION
CONTENTS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 EARTHWORK GENERALLY.................................................................................... 3 EXCAVATION GENERALLY ................................................................................... 3 APPROVAL OF EXCAVATION ................................................................................ 4 REMOVAL OF ROCK................................................................................................ 4 FILLING AROUND FOUNDATIONS OR MAKING UP LEVELS ........................... 4 SURPLUS EXCAVATED MATERIALS .................................................................... 9 HARDCORE ............................................................................................................... 9 PROTECTION OF EXISTING SERVICES ................................................................ 9
Specification: Earthwork (Oct 2011)

Page 2 of 9
EARTHWORK GENERALLY
The Contractor shall be deemed to have satisfied himself as to the conditions affecting the execution of the Works by visiting and inspecting the site of the proposed Works. He shall be permitted to inspect trial holes, if already made, and any open excavations in connection with other works should such be in progress and also to see, upon his request, any available drawings which might be of assistance. The Contractor must clearly understand that all information is given expressly without guarantee and he shall obtain his own information regarding the notices of the excavations, conditions peculiar to the site and all other matters affecting the proposed Works and he shall make provision in his rates to cover for types of materials to be excavated. The Contractor shall ensure that all earthworks are carried in such a manner as to prevent erosion or slips and shall limit the working faces to safe slopes and height. The Contractor shall also ensure that all surfaces have sufficient gradients to allow the shedding of water without causing erosion. All surfaces affected by the Works shall be left with no area that can contain water. When deemed necessary, the Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary and approved surface or sub-surface drainage system to ensure minimum delay in work progress due to wet weather. Alternatively, adequate measures such as protecting and covering all surfaces with polythene sheets shall be provided and maintained all at the Contractor's own expense.
EXCAVATION GENERALLY
1.2.1 Excavation for reduction of levels, basements, stanchion bases, trenches for foundations, drain pipes, etc., shall be executed to the depths, dimensions or levels as indicated on the drawings. The bottoms of all excavations shall be free from mud and water, trimmed clean, protected from the effects of weather and thoroughly consolidated and compacted by approved methods to the satisfaction of the Engineer, before placing and constructional materials. All soft or defective portions shall be cut and filled with selective excavated materials well consolidated to maximum density in layers not exceeding 150mm thick. Where required by the nature of the materials to be excavated, the Contractor shall provide all necessary planking and strutting to uphold the face of the excavation and any necessary stagings. The Contractor will be responsible for the design, supply, fixing and removal of all planking and strutting required of sufficient strength to resist full lateral earth pressure and to ensure the safety of the worker and to prevent damage to any adjoining property. The Contractor shall submit design calculations, duly endorsed by a Professional Engineer, whenever required by the Engineer.
1.2.2
1.2.3

Page 3 of 9
APPROVAL OF EXCAVATION
1.3.1 The Contractor shall report to the Engineer when secure bottoms have been obtained to the excavations and are ready to receive the foundation concrete. All bottoms of excavations must be approved by the Engineer before any new works are allowed to be put in. Any concrete or other works put in prior to the inspection and approval of the excavations by the Engineer, shall, if so directed, be removed and new work substituted in accordance with the Specification all at the Contractor's own expense.
1.3.2
1.3.3
REMOVAL OF ROCK
1.4.1 Should rock (i.e. materials which can only be removed by means of either blasting or using compressed air plant or sledge hammers and wedges) be encountered in the course of the excavation, it shall be removed by approved means. Blasting shall not be allowed without written permission from the Architect who must be fully informed by the Contractor as to the measures taken to safeguard the surrounding properties. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for any damage or annoyance arising from his blasting activity.
1.4.2
FILLING AROUND FOUNDATIONS OR MAKING UP LEVELS

The filling shall be the best of the excavated material arising from the excavation, as decided by the Engineer, or imported dry hill earth obtained from the Contractor's own resources brought on to the site as the Engineer may direct and shall be deposited in layers not exceeding 300 mm thick, each layer well watered, mechanically rammed and thoroughly compacted to the maximum density before the next layer is placed. COMPACTION 1.5.1 All materials shall be compacted in layers as soon as practicable after deposition. The thickness of each layer shall be compatible with the compaction plant used and shall be approved by the Engineer. Earthmoving plant shall not be accepted as compaction plant under this clause.

Page 4 of 9

1.5.2 Each class of material to be compacted shall be tested, prior to compaction, by an approved laboratory in accordance with BS 1377 to determine its maximum dry density and optimum moisture content for compaction. The moisture content of the in situ material during compaction shall be maintained as close to the optimum moisture content as possible. If necessary, this shall be adjusted by wetting or drying on site to enable the required in situ field densities of the fill material to be obtained consistently.
1.5.3
1.5.4
Following the compaction process, in situ field density test shall be carried out in accordance with BS 1377:1975 Test No 15(A) (Sand Replacement Method) or Test No 15(F) (Water Displacement Method). Each layer shall be tested and approved by the Engineer prior to the placing of the next layer. Unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings, the following in situ field densities of compacted materials given as percentage of the maximum dry density derived from BS 1377:1975 Test No 12 (2.5 kg rammer) or No 13 (4.5 kg rammer), shall be obtained: (1) Within 500mm of formation level (subgrade or foundation) - 95% (maximum dry density using Test No 13) From 500mm to 1500mm below formation level - 95% (maximum dry density using Test No 12) More than 1500mm below formation level - 90% (maximum dry density using Test No 12)
1.5.5
(2)
(3)
1.5.6
The Contractor may choose to establish by situ trials the relationship among the in situ material for compaction, compaction plant used, thickness of each layer, and compacting effort in terms of number of passes. If so established and agreed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall follow the same compaction arrangement for each and every subsequent layer in compaction. However, the Engineer may at any time require sufficient numbers of in situ field density test to be carried out to determine whether the degree of compaction satisfies the requirements of Item SE/6H. The agreed compaction arrangement as mentioned in Item 2.5.3 shall be adjusted when the compaction is found inadequate. Table 2.1 may be used as a guide for the contractor in establishing compaction requirements. However, site trials shall be carried out to ensure that the density requirements are indeed achieved. Use of this guide shall not in any way relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of achieving the density requirements.
1.5.7
1.5.8

Page 5 of 9

1.5.9 The Contractor shall allow in his rates for all costs incurred in executing compaction by whichever method he has adopted to satisfy the requirements of the Specification and any subsequent alteration as may be directed by the Engineer under Item 1.5.4.
Definitions and Requirements Associated with Table 1.1 A. The depth of compacted layer is the height by which an embankment is raised by each successive compacted layer. For items marked * the roller shall be towed by track laying tractors. Self-propelled rollers are unsuitable. Where combinations of different types of categories of plant are used, the compaction requirements shall be: 1. the depth of layer shall be that for the type of plant requiring the least depth of layer; and 2. the number of passes shall be that for the type of plant requiring the greatest number of passes. D. However, where the Contractor uses a lighter type of plant to provide some preliminary compaction only to assist the use of heavier plant, this shall be disregarded in assessing the above requirements.
B.
C.
Settlement E. The Contractors attention is drawn to the compressible nature of the soil deposits underlying the Site. The Contractor shall be responsible for making good to the satisfaction of the Engineer all settlements in filling and in backfilling that may occur up to the end of the period of maintenance. TABLE 1.1 : COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS Cohesive Soil Well-graded granular and dry cohesive soils Max. depth of compa cted layer (mm) Min. No. of passes Uniformlygraded material
Type of Compaction Plant
Category
Max. depth of compac ted layer (mm)
Min. No. of passes
Max. depth of compa cted layer (mm)
Min. No. of passes

Page 6 of 9

Smooth wheeled roller Force per 100mm width 2.1-2.6 kN 2.61-5.2kN More than 5.2kN
125 125 150
8 6 4
125 125 150
10 8 8
125 10* 125 8* Unsuitable
Grid roller
Force per 100mm width 2.6-5.2kN 5.3-7.8kN More than 7.8kN Wheel load: 1-1.5 tonnes 1.5-2 tonnes 2-2.5 tonnes 2.5-4 tonnes 4-6 tonnes 6-8 tonnes 8-12 tonnes More than 12 tonnes
150 15 150
10 4
Unsuitable 125 12 150 12
150 10 Unsuitable Unsuitable
Pneumatic tyred roller
125 150 175 225 300 350 400 450
6 5 4 4 4 4 4 4
Unsuitable Unsuitable 125 12 125 10 125 10 150 8 150 8 175 6
150 10* Unsuitable Unsuitable Unsuitable Unsuitable Unsuitable Unsuitable Unsuitable
Settlement TABLE 2.1 : COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS Cohesive Soil Well-graded granular and dry cohesive soils Max. depth of compa cted layer (mm) Min. No. of passes Uniformlygraded material
Category
Max. Min. depth No. of of compa passes cted layer (mm)
Min. No. of passes
Vibratory plate compactor
Static pressure under base plant 8.6-10.3kN/m2 10.3-12.1kN/m2 12.1-13.8kN/m2 13.8-17.2kN/m2
Unsuitable Unsuitable Unsuitable 100 6
Unsuitable 75 10 75 6 125 6
75 100 150 150
6 6 6 4

Page 7 of 9

17.2-20.7kN/m2 more than 20.7kN/m2 150 200 6 6 150 200 5 5 200 250 4 4
Vibro tamper
Mass Kilogramme 2.1-2.6kN 2.61-5.2kN More than 75
100 125 200
3 3 3
100 125 150
3 3 3
150 200 225
3 3 3
Power rammer
Mass Kilogramme 100 More than 500
150 275
4 8
150 275
6 12
Unsuitable Unsuitable
Settlement TABLE 2.1 : COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS (contd) Cohesive Soil Well-graded granular and dry cohesive soils Max. depth of compa cted layer (mm) Min. No. of passes Uniformlygraded material
Category
Max. Min. depth No. of of compa passes cted layer (mm)
Min. No. of passes
Vibratory roller
Force per 100mm width 0.25-0.45kN 0.46-0.70kN 0.71-1.25kN 1.26-1.75kN 1.76-2.3kN 2.31-2.80kN 2.81-3.50kN 3.51-4.20kN 4.21-4.90kN
Unsuitable Unsuitable 100 12 125 8 150 4 175 4 200 4 225 4 250 4
75 75 125 150 150 175 200 225 250
16 12 12 8 4 4 4 4 4
150 150 150 200 225 250 275 300 300
16 12 6 10* 12* 10* 8* 8* 8*

Page 8 of 9
SURPLUS EXCAVATED MATERIALS

Surplus excavated material arising from the excavation and not required for filling etc., shall be removed, deposited, spread, levelled and mechanically rammed and compacted on site where directed by the Architect or removed off the site.
HARDCORE
Hardcore shall consist of clean, hard, natural sand, crushed rock or any other granitic granular material approved by the Engineer. The hardcore shall pass a 65 mm ring and well watered, mechanically rammed and compacted thoroughly and finished off on top to an even and true surface with approved fine chippings, stone dust or blinded on top with sand to receive concrete floors, slabs, etc. and well watered immediately before concrete is laid. The hardcore shall be laid to the full thickness as shown on the drawings after ramming and consolidation.
PROTECTION OF EXISTING SERVICES

The Contractor shall exercise due care during the excavation works to avoid damage to any existing cables, water mains or sewers encountered. The Contractor shall allow in his rates for excavation for all necessary additional labour involved and for all necessary temporary supports and casing required to ensure the protection of the cables, etc.

Page 9 of 9
DEMOLITION AND SITE CLEARANCE SPECIFICATION
Contents
1 DEMOLITION AND SITE CLEARANCE ................................................................. 3 1.1 PROTECTION OF PROPERTY ETC.............................................................. 3 DEMOLITION ............................................................................................................ 4 TREES, CREEPERS, HEDGES, ETC ........................................................................ 4 DUMPING OF DEBRIS ETC ..................................................................................... 5
2 3 4
Specification: Demolition & Site Clearance (Oct 2011)

Page 2 of 5
1
1.1
DEMOLITION AND SITE CLEARANCE

PROTECTION OF PROPERTY ETC The Contractor shall take all necessary steps to protect adjoining properties, fences, public roadways, footpaths, etc. and will be held responsible for making good any damage to the same or the replacement to the acceptable equivalent should the material be no longer obtainable in the market The Contractor shall provide and erect to the satisfaction of the Engineer all necessary protective screens, hoardings, shoring etc., that may be required, of a sufficiently substantial nature to prevent damage, nuisance or disturbance by debris or dust to adjoining properties, public roadways or persons or traffic passing nearby. Unless otherwise specified, the protective hoarding to the whole frontage, sides and back of the site shall be of a type approved by relevant Authority. The Contractor shall provide, erect, maintain and dismantle all necessary needles, shorings or other forms of support to the adjoining property to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer. The construction and efficiency of such supports shall be the entire responsibility of the Contractor. Should any subsidence or any damage result from the adequacy or inefficiency of the shoring or any other support provided, the damage shall be made good by the Contractor at his own expense. Notwithstanding the provision to ensure the stability of the adjacent structure, frequent inspection shall be carried out by the Contractor during the demolition to ensure that measures provided are sufficient. All existing sewer mains and manholes shall be properly protected and all branch sewers from the building to be demolished shall be properly sealed off by a registered plumber unless otherwise specified. Head (Sewerage), Ministry of the Environment shall be notified before commencing work. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions not to disturb existing electricity supply cables, drains, gas pipes, water supply pipes, ducts, telephone cables, radio and television relay lines, hydraulic pressure mains and other usable service pipes and fitting across the site. Where necessary, the above service lines and fittings shall be properly protected. The Contractor is required to execute excavation works within caution. He shall make good all damages occasioned thereto, caused by an attributable in any way to his workmen and shall indemnify the Owner against any damages or claims arising therefrom. Before work commences or during the progress of the demolition works, should the Contractor discover any cables, pipes or fittings, which are liable to be damaged during the progress of the works or may obstruct and impede the progress of the works, he shall arrange for the diversion of the cables or pipes or fitting. The Contractor will be

Page 3 of 5

reimbursed for the costs of the diversions. However, should the Contractor divert any service line or fitting without obtaining written permission from the Engineer he shall bear all cost arising from any cause whatsoever. The Contractor shall be responsible for restricting his workmen only to the site under the Contractor and shall prevent trespassing into adjoining properties and existing buildings in which work is not in progress. He shall undertake properly, substantially and effectively to reinstate and make good all damages arising therefore and shall indemnify the Owner against all claims for damages as no responsibilities or liability whatsoever shall be undertaken by the Owner in respect of any of the foregoing. The Contractor shall not obstruct any right of way during the progress of the works. In the event of grubbing up foundation or pile caps, the Contractor shall take all precautions to prevent soil disturbance to the surrounding foundations should any subsidence, or any damaged result from his negligence, the damage shall be made good by the Contractor at his own expense. Apart from the clauses mentioned above, the Contractor shall also comply with the protective precautions as detailed in SS CP11.
DEMOLITION
Demolition shall be carried out in such a manner as to cause as little inconvenience as possible to adjoining properties and the public; the Contractor will be held responsible for any claims, which may arise from the disregard of this clause. Before commencing demolition of any part of the structure, the Contractor shall write to the PUB, Roads Division (PWD), Telecoms, Ministry of the Environment and other relevant authorities notifying them of his intention. He shall arrange for the disconnection and the removal of all electrical, water and gas meters and other services, if necessary. The Contractor shall decide on the method of demolition to be adopted and inform the engineer of his proposed method before commencement of the work. The Contractor shall comply with the procedures and recommendations as detailed in SS CP11. The Contractor shall put down the whole or part of the existing building or structure to ground level or as directed by the Engineer. Unless otherwise specified all hardcore or stone fillings shall be removed. All obsolete concrete drains, foundations including pile caps (except piles), floors, pavings, etc shall be thoroughly excavated and the voids filled with approved fill materials, well rammed in layers of 300mm thick and levelled.
TREES, CREEPERS, HEDGES, ETC

The Contractor shall provide adequate protection to any trees, creepers, and hedges to be preserved.

Page 4 of 5
The stumps and roots of trees to be removed shall be grubbed up and removed from the site. All empty tree holes or cavities shall be filled with approved material to the existing ground level and compacted to the satisfaction of the Engineer. All bushes, shrubs, roots, lallang, etc. shall be removed by cutting and/or digging and the accumulations shall be removed from site as directed by the Engineer.
DUMPING OF DEBRIS ETC

The disposal of materials and rubbish by burning on site or burying in the ground will not be permitted under any circumstances. All rubbish on the site and in buildings under partial demolition shall be removed off site from time to time as it accumulates and as the Engineer may direct. Particular attention is directed to clearing out the open drains and leaving them entirely free from blockage.

Page 5 of 5
BORED PILE SPECIFICATION
Contents
1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10 1.11 1.12 1.13 1.14 1.15 1.16 1.17 1.18 1.19 1.20 1.21 1.22 1.23 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 2.10 2.11 2.12 2.13 2.14 2.15 2.16 2.17 SECTION 1 : BORED PILES: GENERAL ................................................. 4 GENERAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS .................................................. 4 STANDARD AND DEFINITIONS ................................................................. 4 PARTICULAR REQUIREMENTS .................................................................. 5 MATERIALS................................................................................................... 6 SAFETY .......................................................................................................... 7 SOIL ................................................................................................................ 7 SITE CONDITION .......................................................................................... 8 RISK ASSESSMENT REPORT ..................................................................... 8 PILE DESIGN VERIFICATION ..................................................................... 8 SUPERVISION OF THE WORKS .................................................................. 9 PRECONDITION SURVEY............................................................................ 9 INSTRUMENTATION AND MONITORING................................................. 10 UPHOLDING OF ADJOINING PROPERTIES ............................................... 10 TOLERANCES ............................................................................................... 10 PILING METHOD .......................................................................................... 11 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION ............................................................... 12 Requirements for Design Verification ............................................................... 12 PILING PROGRAMME .................................................................................. 12 RECORDS ....................................................................................................... 12 NUISANCE AND DAMAGE .......................................................................... 14 Obstruction ...................................................................................................... 14 DEFECTIVE WORKS ..................................................................................... 15 RELEVANT STANDARDS AND CODES OF PRACTICE ............................ 15 SECTION 2: PARTICULAR REQUIREMENTS FOR BORED PILES........... 19 BORED PILES ................................................................................................ 19 CONCRETE .................................................................................................... 19 WORKMANSHIP............................................................................................ 22 Use of Drilling Fluid ......................................................................................... 25 Cleanliness of Pile Bases ................................................................................... 26 Reinforcement .................................................................................................. 26 Pile Casting ...................................................................................................... 27 Tremie Equipment ............................................................................................ 28 Tremie Procedure ............................................................................................. 28 Delay in Concreting Operation.......................................................................... 29 Monitoring of Concrete Level During Pile Casting............................................ 29 Pile Head Casting Level Tolerances .................................................................. 29 Extraction of Casing ......................................................................................... 29 Overbreak ........................................................................................................ 30 Backfilling Empty Boring ................................................................................. 30 Grouting of Piles .............................................................................................. 30 Pile Uplift ......................................................................................................... 31
Specification: Bored piles (Oct 2011)

Page 2 of 49

2.18 2.19 2.20 2.21 2.22 2.23 2.24 2.25 2.26 2.27 2.28 2.29 2.30 2.31 2.32 2.33 2.34 2.35 2.36 2.37 3 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 3.10 3.11 3.12 3.13 3.14 3.15 3.16 3.17 Tolerances........................................................................................................ 31 Protection to Piles ............................................................................................ 32 Replacement of Piles ........................................................................................ 32 Cleaning Up ..................................................................................................... 32 Non-Performance of Working Piles .................................................................. 32 Cutting Off Pile Heads...................................................................................... 32 Noise and Disturbance ...................................................................................... 33 Final Survey and As-Built Drawing................................................................... 33 TRANSPORTING CONCRETE ...................................................................... 33 REINFORCEMENT ........................................................................................ 33 TEMPORARY CASING.................................................................................. 33 Pumping from boreholes ................................................................................... 33 Continuity of Construction ............................................................................... 34 CLEANING OUT ............................................................................................ 34 INSPECTION .................................................................................................. 34 PILE HEADS .................................................................................................. 34 BACKFILLING EMPTY BORING ................................................................. 34 FINAL SURVEY ............................................................................................. 34 PILE LENGTH FOR PURPOSE OF PAYMENT ............................................ 34 PILE LENGTHS .............................................................................................. 35 SECTION 3: BORED PILE TESTING .......................................................... 36 STATIC LOAD TEST ..................................................................................... 36 Contractors Submissions and Proposals ........................................................... 37 Safety Precautions Applicable To Pile Testing .................................................. 38 LOAD TEST FACTORS ................................................................................. 39 PROVISION FOR LOAD TESTS ................................................................... 39 PILES AXIALLY LOADED IN COMPRESSION........................................... 40 REACTION SYSTEMS................................................................................... 41 EQUIPMENT FOR LOADING AND LOAD MEASUREMENT .................... 42 METHOD OF MEASURING THE MOVEMENT OF THE PILE ................... 42 TEST PROCEDURE ....................................................................................... 44 Supervision ...................................................................................................... 47 Pile test record ................................................................................................. 47 Records confidentiality ..................................................................................... 47 FAILURE OF TEST PILES ............................................................................. 47 REMEDIAL MEASURES IF TEST PILES FAILED....................................... 49 REMOVAL ON COMPLETION ..................................................................... 49 Material TESTS, Pile Driving Analyzer (PDA) and Pile Integrity test (PIT), ETC....................................................................................................... 49

Page 3 of 49
1
1.1
SECTION 1 : BORED PILES: GENERAL

GENERAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS 1.1.1 The Works under this section comprises the construction of small and large diameter cast-in-place bored piles for the foundation system of the proposed building(s) and structures. 1.1.2 The Contractor shall make allowance in his tender for compliance with all the specifications and other requirements necessary for proper execution and completion of the works to the Engineer's satisfaction. The work shall be carried out on the basis of ground as found. 1.1.3 The Contractor shall note that the specifications regularly specified the requirements for the Contractor to submit their proposed method statements, shop drawings, calculations, etc for Engineers review and comments /approvals. The Contractor is explicitly advised that Engineers comments/approvals, does not absolve the Contractor of his sole responsibilities to ensure that the Contract Works are completed safely for the intended use, that the methods, materials and workmanship employed are safe and suitable for the Contract Works, that the Contractor shall complete Contract Works within the contracted time and in full compliance of the all specifications stipulated. All technical submissions made shall be prepared and certified by the Contractors Professional Engineer. 1.1.4 The Contractor shall be solely responsible to ensure that the loading capacity for each piles with appropriate factor of safety and compliance with other performance specifications contained in the contract are achieved. 1.1.5 The Contractor shall timely submit his Professional Engineer endorsed as-built pile penetration depth drawings in a timely manner once the last working pile is completed. Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall return to site to trim all piles to the final piles cut-off levels specified, following excavation to pile cap level by the Main Contractor Subsequently, without any delay, the Piling Contractor shall have his Licensed Surveyor carried out the piles eccentricities survey. The Piling Contractor shall timely submit their endorsed Licensed Surveyors pile eccentricities drawings endorsed by their Licensed Surveyor and Professional Engineer and if any, his endorsed Professional Engineers piles/pilecap/beam strengthening design and details to the Engineer for approval. This work shall be carried out progressively to suit the Main Contractors program and in co-ordination with the Main Contractor. The Piling Contractor shall work closely with the Main Contractor to ensure smooth completion of his Works, to avoid any delay to the Main Contractors Works.
1.2
STANDARD AND DEFINITIONS

Page 4 of 49

1.2.1 All materials and workmanship of the Works shall be carried out in accordance with the relevant British and Singapore Standards, the specifications stipulated in the Contract, drawings supplied to the Contractor and any other instructions/directions issued by the Engineer/Architect or their representatives during the duration of the Contract.
1.2.2 Codes of Practice All work shall be carried out generally in accordance with the principles of relevant codes of practice, including those listed in Clause 24. 1.2.3 Definitions The term Engineer referred in the all the specifications shall be deemed to mean EcasEJ Consultants Pte Ltd , empowers by the Architect to assist in all technical matters , as defined in the Contractors documents or any other person designated in writing by the Architect from time to time, to exercise the power of the Architect under the contract. In the specifications the terms 'approved', 'approval' and 'required' mean 'approved by the Engineer', 'approval by the Engineer' and 'required by the Engineer' respectively. 1.3 1.3.1 PARTICULAR REQUIREMENTS Contractor to work with other Contractors drawings The Contractor where so directed by the Engineer, shall be required to work with other contractors' drawings whenever drawings for works not included in the Contract are related to particular details of the Works. 1.3.2 Site Access Where the contract works or access to the site requires diversion of existing traffic, slabbing over existing drains, etc. the Contractor shall prepare, coordinate and seek approval of his access/diversion plans from the relevant authorities. All costs and time associated with implementing the access/traffic diversion including the preparation of plans and seeking authorities approval shall be deemed to be included within the contract, price and time. 1.3.3 Temporary hoardings/gates The Contractor shall provide all temporary hoardings required by him in connection with the execution of the Contract. All temporary hoardings/gates, etc. shall be designed by a Professional Engineer, in accordance to the required loads, eg . lateral balustrades load, as specified in the Fourth schedule of Building Control Regulations, wind loads, accidental load, etc . and shall be supervised by a Professional Engineer. The Contractor shall submit his P.Es design and drawings to the Engineer for review and comments.

Page 5 of 49

1.3.4 Advertisements The Contractor shall allow no advertisement to be placed on any hoarding, scaffolding or fencing erected in connection with the Contract without the permission of the Engineer. 1.3.5 Life-saving Appliances The Contractor shall provide and maintain on the site sufficient, proper and efficient lifesaving appliances to the approval of the Engineer. The appliances must be conspicuous and available for use at all times. 1.3.6 Progress Report The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer on the first day of each week, or at such longer periods as the Engineer may from time to time direct, a progress report showing the current rate of progress and progress during the previous period on all important items of each section of the Works. 1.3.7 Latrine and Washing Accommodation The Contractor shall provide and maintain to the satisfaction of the Engineer and of the appropriate statutory authority all adequate, efficient and sanitary latrine and washing accommodation required for the use of his staff and work people employed on the Site, with proper attendance, drainage and water supply. He shall, when it is no longer required, remove such latrine and washing accommodation and generally restore the Site to a clean and sanitary condition. 1.3.8 Electrical, Water, telephone, sewerage and other Facilities The Contractor shall make his own arrangements with the appropriate authorities for the provision of electrical, water, sewerage, telephone and other facilities to and on the Site. 1.3.9 Flammable Stores All petroleum, explosives and flammable materials shall be stored in fireproof building and such precautions taken with regard to siting and fire risks as the Engineer may direct. The Contractor shall make all arrangements with the licensing authority for the necessary licence. 1.4 1.4.1 MATERIALS Sources of Supply The sources of supply of materials shall not be changed without prior approval. 1.4.2 Rejected Materials, Debris and spoil earth

Page 6 of 49

Rejected materials, Debris and spoil earth are to be removed promptly from the Site to an approved Authorities dumping site. 1.5 1.5.1 SAFETY Standards The Contractor is required to ensure safety precautions throughout the piling operations shall comply with the Health and Safety at Work Act 1974 or any subsequent reenactment thereof, and with relevant Standards and Codes of Practice specified in Clause 12. The Contractor shall provide safety precautions to comply with all current legislation and regulations, notably, but not limited to: a. b. c. d. e. f. Building Control Regulations Code of Practice for Traffic Control at Work Zone Factories (Building Operations and Works of Engineering Construction) Regulations Factories Act SS CP 79 Safety management system for construction worksites For works within LTA Railway Protection Zone, ensure the works comply fully with Code of Practice for Railway Protection.
Additionally, comply also with the following; a. b. BRE Digest 251 (1995) Assessment of damage in low rise building BS 8008: Guide to safety precautions and procedures for the construction and descent of machine-bored shaft for piling and other purposes
The Contractor shall be responsible for the stability of all slopes and excavations including those for piles and shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of personnel in the area of piling operations. Where temporary Earth Retaining structures system (ERSS) are required, the Contractor at his own expenses shall engaged a Professional Engineer for the purpose and to submit the PE endorsed design calculations and drawings for the Engineer review. His P.E shall supervise the Works.. Where rocks and hard material are encountered during boring which require manual excavation with pneumatic tools, the Contractor shall ensure that adequate linings are placed above the working level and that sufficient ventilation is provided for the safety of his workers. The Contractor must ensure that no damages are caused to adjoining properties or other construction works adjoining the Contracts Work site and would be solely responsible for all consequences arises from the damages. 1.6 SOIL

Page 7 of 49

1.6.1 Soil Investigation Reports Factual information and reports on Soil Investigation for the Works shall be made available to Contractor and is included in this contract for reference only. The Contractor shall satisfy himself regarding subsoil conditions and the underground water table. The Contractor may at his own cost and with the written permission of the Engineer, conduct additional soil tests ,if the Contractor so desires. Neither the Engineer, Consultants nor the Client accept responsibility for any opinions or conclusions given in the soil reports , its accuracy or implications, if actual soil conditions are found to be different during progress of Works 1.6.2 Ground Conditions The Works shall be based on the condition of ground as found and no extras cost and time shall be allowed for dealing with more difficult soil conditions than envisaged by the Contractor at the time of tendering 1.7 1.7.1 SITE CONDITION The Contractor is required to visit and shall be deemed to have inspected the site and satisfied himself with regard to access, site conditions, existing buildings and structures. The Contractor shall deem to have allowed in his Tender for the implications of the as found site conditions. The Contractor shall engaged his own Licensed Services Detection Specialist to determine, probe and/or investigate the position of all existing services within the site and shall take all precautions to protect and prevent damage to them. All damage caused by the Contractor and his sub-contractors to the active services shall be reinstated by the Contractor at his own cost and time. The Architect and Consultants shall provide to the Contractor, any information available to him for the guidance of the Contractor only. RISK ASSESSMENT REPORT The Contractor shall carried out a Risk Assessment Report on his Works and its effects on ground movement to the neighbouring properties due to the Works. The purpose of the report is to establish suitable safety measures, values for Alert and Work Suspension levels for monitoring and safe working environment. The Report shall be submitted to the Engineer within 2 weeks in advance, prior to any commencement of site Works and shall be endorsed by a PE. 1.9 1.9.1 PILE DESIGN VERIFICATION Notwithstanding the provisional lengths allowed for in the bills of quantities, the Contractor shall submit detailed PEs design geotechnical calculations for his proposed length of each type of pile, and shall be responsible to ensure that the piles shall carry the specified ultimate loads based on the length proposed by the Contractor.
1.7.2
1.8

Page 8 of 49

1.9.2 The Contractor shall submit with his tender the names and Curriculum Vitaes of his Professional Engineer (Civil):PE and qualified geotechnical engineer whom shall propose and confirm the formation level of all piles and identify/agree the soil layers as the boring for each pile progresses for the Engineers acceptance, during the Tender. The geotechnical engineer must have at least 5 years experiences in similar nature of works and hold a Master Degree in Geotechnical Engineering. The qualified geotechnical engineer shall be full time on site
1.9.3
The Contractors PE, assisted by the Geotechnical Engineer shall carry out: a. Verification of material excavated at each of the intended pile founding level as consistent with the design requirements. b. Design verification checks based on actual ground conditions to determine the required length of each pile and ensure that the specified working load and settlement criteria of the piles are achieved. The design verification shall be submitted to the Engineer for acceptance immediately and before each bored pile is concreted. The design requirements are as set out in Clause 2.1 c. Proposals to amend the design including compensating piles as necessary in the event that for any reasons the installed piles do not perform as intended. d. Proposals to amend the pilecap design of the proposed buildings, in the event that the piles are installed out of the permitted tolerance. e. Proposals as a response plan in the event that measures taken to control ground movement and vibration do not perform satisfactorily. Design proposals in (a) to (d) are to be endorsed by a PE (Civil) and submitted to the Engineer for comments and approval The Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer with detailed design calculations that his proposed design is satisfactory and will have to make whatever modifications as required by the Engineer . Engineer's approval does not relieve him of his sole responsibility as stipulated under Clause 1.3 of this specification
1.10
SUPERVISION OF THE WORKS The qualified geotechnical engineer shall be full time on site, assisting the Contractors Project Manager , his PE and site engineer in supervising the Works and providing support on the geotechnical matters.
1.11
PRECONDITION SURVEY Prior to commencement of the site works, the Contractor shall carried out a precondition Survey to adjacent buildings and any exiting structures, in accordance with the requirements of Building & Construction Authoritys requirement and specified in the Permit to commence works. The Pre-condition Survey report shall be carried out by a Loss Adjustor. The Contractor shall submit the name of their proposed Loss Adjustor to the Architect/Engineer for their approval. Before Works commence on site, the Contractor shall promptly submit the Loss Adjustor s Pre-condition report to the

Page 9 of 49

Architect/Engineer , Resident Engineer and adjacent property owners for their records. The Contractor shall also keep a copy of the survey report on site ready for inspection. 1.12 INSTRUMENTATION AND MONITORING The Contractor shall provide adequate numbers of instrumentation to monitor the ground movement, vibration and condition of adjacent properties. The minimum numbers of the required instrumentation monitoring plan is indicated in the contract drawings for the If necessary or as required by the authorities, the Contractor shall propose and provide additional instrumentation and monitoring for records. The Contractor is required to take cognisance of and co-ordinate with other contractors, if there is any, on site who may be carrying out instrumentation and monitoring works to avoid duplication of installation and readings. 1.13 UPHOLDING OF ADJOINING PROPERTIES The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the upholding of the adjoining buildings and roads, footpaths etc., where applicable, together with the mains and services from the time of taking possession of the site through the duration of the works. The Contractor shall adequately maintain roads and footpaths within and adjacent to the site and keep clear of mud and debris. 1.14 1.14.1 TOLERANCES Setting Out a. Setting out shall be carried out from the main grid lines of the proposed structure, based on the issued Architectural construction drawings. The setting out shall be carried out by the contractors engaged Licensed Surveyor, prior to installation of the pile. The pile position shall be marked with suitable identifiable pins or markers. The Contractor shall employ an approved licensed surveyor to set out the grids based on the setting out plan provided by the Architect. Piles shall be set out from grid lines or from the building line where necessary. Setting out must be agreed between the Contractor and the Architect in writing, prior to the commencement of work. Where piles touch the building line the Contractor must ensure that these are installed within such restricted lines. Any special tolerances required must be agreed with the Engineer/Architect before work commences.
b.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy of locating and positioning each pile. Any error in setting out shall be made good at the Contractor's expense and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Subsequent redesign of the structure due to errors in set out will be undertaken by the Engineer at the contractor's expense

Page 10 of 49

1.14.2 Boring c. d. e. 1.14.3 Full nominal cross-section must be maintained throughout its length. The centre of the pile at cut-off level shall be the theoretical centre. Depth of piles shall be confirmed with the Engineer as work proceeds.
Cut-Off The permissible tolerance in the true cut-off level will be plus or minus 25 mm, upon final trimming
1.14.4
Position For a pile cut off at below or above ground level the maximum permitted deviation of the pile centre from the centre point shown on the setting out drawing shall be 75mm in any direction.
1.14.5
Verticality The maximum permitted deviation of the finished pile from the vertical is 1 in 75.
1.14.6
Rake The piling rig shall be set and maintained to attain the required rake. The maximum permitted deviation of the finished pile from the specified rake is 1 in 25.
1.14.7
Forcible Corrections Forcible corrections to piles shall not be permitted. 1.14.8 Pile Rectification Works due to out of tolerances a. The Contractor will be responsible for all additional works (pile caps, tie beams, installation of compensating pile etc.) including Cost of Redesign, resulting from tolerances outside those specified herein. b. All corrective redesign of the structure shall be carried out by Ecas EJ Consultants Pte Ltd, at the Contractor's expense and time.
1.15
PILING METHOD All piles shall be concreted using 'Tremie' pipe irrespective of the presence or absence of water in the borehole. The Contractor shall supply for approval all relevant details of the method of piling and the plant he proposed to use. Any alternative method to that specified shall be in accordance with the Specification. Temporary casings shall be provided for the full depth of top soil, soft clays and loose sand unless boreholes are stabilised with approved fluid material . The temporay casings Specification: Bored piles (Oct 2011)
Page 11 of 49

shall be withdrawn. Lost temporary casings shall not be paid for and the Contractor shall bear the consequences. a. The Contractor shall submit details of his proposed method, during the time of tender, for the inspection by the Engineer of the formation of every bore hole prior to concreting. The method must be approved by the Engineer. b. Every piles bore hole must be inspected and approved by the Engineer, prior to concreting. Engineer's approval does not absolve the Contractor of his sole responsibility to achieve the required load capacity for the piles are achieved.
1.16
PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION If piling is required to meet a performance specification, the Contractor shall supply full details of the type of pile offered, the standards of control he intends to use, how the calculation and checking of the load bearing capacity and settlement of the piles will be carried out, and the tests he proposed to undertake on the Site.
1.17
REQUIREMENTS FOR DESIGN VERIFICATION The required working load and sizes of the piles are indicated in the drawings, together with an indication of the required pile penetration depth. Based on actual ground conditions encountered as revealed by boring logs or ground Investigation. the Contractor shall carried out design check to confirm the required pile length as to achieve the specified working loads within the specified limits. Account for effects of negative skin friction where applicable. Verify the design based on SS CP 4, unless otherwise agreed.
1.18
PILING PROGRAMME The Contractor shall with his tender, submit a detailed programme showing the sequence and manner in which piling and other works are to be executed wthin the Contract duration. The actual construction would be carried out in a sequence and to a programme agreed with Architect/ the Engineer. Where a sequence is specified in the contract, this shall be adhered to. The Contractor shall inform Architect/the Engineer each day of the programme of piling for the following day and shall give adequate notice of his intention to work outside normal hours and at weekends.
1.19
RECORDS The Contractor shall keep records as indicated by an asterisk in Table 1 of the installation of each pile and shall submit two signed copies of these records to the Engineer not later than noon of the next working day after the pile was installed. The signed records will form a record of the work. Any unexpected driving or boring conditions reported shall be briefly noted in the records.

Page 12 of 49

Table 1 Data Driven precast steel and timber piles * * * * * * * * * * * Bored cast in place piles Driven cast in place piles
(a) Contract (b) Pile reference number (location) (c) Pile type (d) Nominal cross-sectional dimensions or diameter (e) Nominal diameter of underream (f) Length of preformed pile (g) Standing groundwater level (h) Date and time of driving, redriving or boring (i) Date of concreting (j) Ground level at commencement of installation of pile (k) Working level (l) Depth from working level to pile toe (m) Toe level (n) Depth from working level to pile head level (o) Length of temporary casing (p) Length of permanent casing (q) Type, weight, drop and mechanical condition of hammer and equivalent information for other equipment (r) Number and type of packing used and type and condition of dolly used during driving the pile (s) Set of pile or pile tube in mm per 10 blows or number of blows per 25mm of penetration (t) If required, the sets taken at intervals during the last 3m of driving (u) If required, temporary compression of ground and pile from time of a marked Specification: Bored piles (Oct 2011)
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * -
* * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * *
* * *
Page 13 of 49

increase in driving resistance until pile reaches its final level (v) Soil samples taken and in situ tests carried out (w) Length and details of reinforcement (x) Concrete mix (y) Volume of concrete supplied to pile where this can be measured in practice (z) All information regarding obstructions delay and other interruptions to the sequent of work 1.20 1.20.1 NUISANCE AND DAMAGE Noise and Disturbance The Contractor shall carry out the work in such a manner and at such times as to minimize noise and disturbance. 1.20.2 Damage to Adjacent as-built piles or Structures If during the execution of the Works, damage is, or is likely to be, caused to mains, services or adjacent structures, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer his proposals of avoidance of such damage or rectification works at their own expenses, if damage had occurred. 1.20.3 Damage to Piles The Contractor shall ensure that damage does not occur to completed piles. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer his proposed sequence and timing for driving or boring of piles having regard to the avoidance of damage to adjacent piles. If the piles are sited at temporary slope, the Contractor shall submit prevention method to avoid the piles been subjected to lateral pressures. The Contractor shall fully rectified or compensate any piles at their own cost and times if the piles are damaged. 1.20.4 Temporary Support The Contractor shall ensure that piles are temporarily braced or stayed immediately after driving to prevent loosening of the piles in the ground and to ensure that no damage resulting from oscillation, vibration or movement of any free-standing pile length can occur. 1.21 OBSTRUCTION The rates in the Bill of Quantities shall include for excavation in any material to remove obstructions not exceeding 3 metres below excavated ground level which may be sufficient to prevent driving or which interfere with the proper alignment of the piles, Specification: Bored piles (Oct 2011)
Page 14 of 49
* * * * *
* * * *

timbering, backfilling, the restoration of the ground around the piles and any other works which may be required to complete the operation to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Obstructions below this level which occur during the course of the work (e.g. broken shoes or piles etc.) shall likewise be removed by the Contractor at his own expense. The removal of natural obstructions below this level will be paid for by the Employer at rates in the Bills of Quantities only if the Engineer is satisfied that the Contractor has made every effort to proceed with piling in order to clear the obstruction. No standing time for rigs will be allowed in consequence of obstruction of any kind. 1.22 DEFECTIVE WORKS Defective work means all Works that do not fully comply with the contract specifications or the drawings or bad workmanship, materials, etc. The Contractor shall make good or carry out such additional works at his own expenses, as may be deemed necessary to make good all defective work to the Engineer's satisfaction. 1.23 1.24.1 RELEVANT STANDARDS AND CODES OF PRACTICE Standards Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, ensure all of the Works comply with the relevant requirements of the Local Authorities Bye Laws and Standards and Codes listed below or referenced in the body of the Specifications. All Standards and Codes quoted are the current version, unless specific year references are noted. Singapore Building Control Acts and Regulations 1.24.2 Singapore Standards and Codes of Practice of concrete cubes SS CP 4 Foundations SS CP 65: Part 1 Structural use of concrete. Design and Construction SS CP 79 Safety management system for construction worksites Public Utilities Board on Earth Control Measures
1.24.3 Other Standards API Specification 13A 5th Edition
Drilling Fluid
API-RP-13B-1 2nd Standard procedure for field-testing water-based drilling fluid Edition 1.24.4 British Standards and Codes of Practice BS EN 1008 Mixing water for concrete, specification for sampling, testing and assessing the suitability of water BS 5228 Noise and vibration control on construction and open sites Part 1(1997) Code of practice for basic information and procedures for noise and vibration control Specification: Bored piles (Oct 2011)
Page 15 of 49

Part 4 (1992) Code of practice for noise and vibration control applicable to piling operation BS 5930 Code of practice for site investigations BS 7123 Metal arc welding of steel for concrete reinforcement BS 8004 Code of practice for foundations BS 8008 Guide to safety precautions and procedures for the construction and descent of machine-bored shaft piling and other purposes. BS EN 1538 Execution of special geotechnical work Diaphragm Walls BS8110 The Structural Use of Concrete Aggregates, cement and concrete BS12 Portland cement (ordinary and rapid hardening) BS812 Methods for sampling and testing of mineral aggregates, sand and fillers BS882,BS1201 Aggregates from natural sources for concrete (including granolithic) BS1047 Air-cooled blast furnace slag coarse aggregates for concrete BS1305 Batch type concrete mixers BS1881(part 4) Methods of testing concrete for strength BS1926 Ready-mixed concrete BS314 Tests for water for making concrete BS3963 Methods for testing the mixing performance of concrete mixers BS4027 Sulphate-resisting Portland cement BS4251 Truck type concrete mixers 1.24 RELEVANT STANDARDS AND CODES OF PRACTICE 1. 24.4 British Standards and Codes of Practice Iron and Steel British Standard Codes of Practice BS4360 Specification for weldable structural steel BS4449 Hot rolled steel bars for reinforcement of concrete BS4461 Cold worked steel bars for reinforcement of concrete BS4466 Bending dimensions and scheduling of bars for the reinforcement of concrete CP 2008 Protection of iron and steel structures from corrosion Welding BS499 Welding terms and symbols BS638 Arc welding plant, equipment and accessories BS639 Covered electrodes for the manual metal-arc welding of mild steel and medium-tensile steel BS693 General requirements for oxy-acetylene welding of mild steel BS709 Methods of testing fusion welded joints and weld metal in steel BS938 General requirements for the metal-arc welding of structural steel tubes to BS 1775 BS1719Classification, coding and marking of covered electrodes for metal-arc welding Specification: Bored piles (Oct 2011)
Page 16 of 49

BS1856General requirements for the metal-arc welding of mild steel BS2642General requirements for the arc welding of carbon manganese steels BS2645Tests for use in the approval of welders BS2937General requirements for seam welding in mild steel BS4165Electrode wires and fluxes for the submerged are welding of carbon steel and medium-tensile steel BS5135Specification for the process of arc welding of carbon & carbon manganese steels BS5493Code of Practice for protective coating of iron and steel structures against corrosion BS6265Specification for resistance seam welding of uncoated & coated low carbon steel 1.24 RELEVANT STANDARDS AND CODES OF PRACTICE
1.24.5 British Standards and Codes of Practice Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering BS1377 Methods of testing soils for civil engineering purposes Building Research Establishment digest 174 Concrete in sulphate-bearing soils and ground water Geological Society's Engineer Group Working Party Report The logging or rock cores for engineering purposes Oil Companies Materials Association, London DFCP4 Drilling fluid materials - bentonite 1.24.6 Safety BS229 BS2011 Flameproof enclosure of electrical apparatus Safety precautions in the construction of large diameter boreholes for piling and other purposes
1.24.7
Technical References Refer to the following technical reference for guidance in carrying out the works: a. BRE Digest 251 (1995) Assessment of damage in low-rise building. b. Construction Industry Research and Information Association, England (CIRIA) Report 104 (1984) Design of retaining wall embedded in stiff clay
1.24.8
Pile Surveys The Contractor shall employed a Licensed Surveyor who is to be responsible for surveying pile locations ,Eccentricities, building setting out , the asbuilt pile survey to the Architect/Engineers in format of A1 size Hardcopy and in Autocad format ,as directed within 7days .

Page 17 of 49

1. 25. Definitions a. b. Pile Dimensions Piles dimension specified in pile layout drawing(s) / piling schedule are the minimum acceptable dimensions Rock Material classified as grade I to III In table 10 Scale of weathering grades of rock mass in BS 5930: 1981.
1.26
Earth Control Measures. The Contractor shall engaged a Qualified Erosion Control Professional (QECP), to design the required site Earth Control Meaaures and submit to PUB for approval, before commencement of any site clearances and excavation works. The Contractor and his QECP shall ensure that the PUB requirements on ECM are made and comply at all times.

Page 18 of 49
2
2.1
SECTION 2: PARTICULAR REQUIREMENTS FOR BORED PILES

BORED PILES
2.1.1 GENERAL All materials and work shall be in accordance with sections 1 of this specification, the Particular Specification and this section, except where there may be conflict of requirements, in which case those in the Particular Specification and in this section shall take precedence. 2.1.2 PILE SIZES FOR TENDERING PURPOSES The dimensions and arrangement of the piles to be priced are set out in the Engineers Drawing. 2.1.3 PILE DIAMETER The pile diameter shall be taken to mean the inside diameter of the temporary casing where used or the outside diameter of the excavating tool. Where a pile is only cased for part of its length the lesser of the two values shall be taken. 2.1.4 MATERIALS Cement shall be delivered to the site in bulk cement containers of in sealed bags clearly marked with the manufacturers name and shall be carefully stored in a waterproof shed with a raised floor or in a site of approval design Aggregates shall be stored on concrete paved areas with dividing walls between each type of aggregate. The water for mixing concrete shall be from the Public Mains supply and shall at all times be kept clean and free from deleterious matter. No additives shall be used in the concrete unless permission is given in writing by the Engineer. All materials which have been damaged, contaminated or have deteriorated or do not comply with the requirements of this Specification shall be rejected and they shall be removed form the site immediately at the expense of the Contractor. 2.2 CONCRETE 2.2.1 General a) Concrete for piles shall be in accordance with the Concrete Section and those specified in this specification. b) Concrete shall be an approved mix, having characteristic strength at 28 days of 35N/m2, unless shown otherwise stated in the drawings, with minimum slump of 100 mm. All materials for making concrete shall be of best quality and shall comply with Specification: Bored piles (Oct 2011)
Page 19 of 49

current issues of appropriate Singapore and British Standards. The water/cement ratio shall at all times be the minimum required to produce concrete of a workability appropriate to the method of placing and compaction and to avoid softening of clay due to excess water in the concrete, and in no event greater than 0.55. c ) Aggregate shall be 20 mm ( maximum in size ) and be graded to BS.882. Samples of coarse and fine aggregate shall be sent to an approved Accredited Laboratory for comprehensive testing in accordance with the relevant British Standards. The results shall be sent to the Engineer for his approval, prior to the commencement of work. d) The Contractor shall submit for the Engineer's approval his proposals on concrete mixes and suppliers of material(s) including results of preliminary tests on concrete, prior to commencing work on site. 2.2.2 READY MIXED CONCRETE a) Ready mixed concrete shall be used. b) The Contractor shall furnish the name of the intended concrete supplier for approval. The Engineer reserves the right to inspect the supplier's facilities and to require samples of cement, fine and coarse aggregates and prepared admixtures for testing. The cost of such tests shall be borne by the Contractor. c) The Contractor shall take full responsibility (notwithstanding the Engineer's approval) to ensure that all ready-mixed concrete conforms to Singapore and Bristih Standard ( eg : BS 1926) and the relevant contract specifications. Concrete which does not comply shall be rejected and shall be immediately removed from the site. d) In event there is a need to determine the quality of the suppllied concrete to the site in compliance with these specifications, the Engineer may call for tests to establish the cement content and the water/cement ratio of the readymixed concrete delivered to the site. The Contractor shall allow for such tests at their own costs and times. 2.2.3 CONCRETE MIX The concrete grade and the minimum strength of works cubes based on concrete made with Portland Cement shall be as given below: Concrete Grade Minimum Cube Crushing Strength in N/mm2 28 days 7 days after after mixing mixing 23 30 Remarks
30
Minimum cement content to be 405

Page 20 of 49

kg/m3 of concrete Maximum size of coarse aggregate to be 20 mm Maximum water / cement ratio to be 0.45 Minimum cement content to be 430 kg/m3 of concrete Maximum size of coarse aggregate to be 20 mm Maximum water / cement ratio to be 0.45 The quantities of cement and aggregates in the mix shall be measured separately by weight in an approved weightbatching plant. The concrete mix shall be consistent with the piling system and the method of compaction employed. The water / cement ratio by weight shall be agreed with the Engineer before work commence. The Contractor shall complete the following items of information on the delivery docket after the discharge of each batch of concrete: (i)Arrival and departure times of the truck (ii)Time of completion of discharge (iii)Details of extra water or any other materials added on site (iv)Position in the Works where concrete is placed One copy of the docket shall be given to the Engineer's representative on delivery which shall show the time when water was added to the mix, to ensure the concrete can be placed in position without exceeding the 2 hour time limit following addition of water to the mix. The Engineer reserves the right to instruct the Contractor to change the supplier due to unsatisfactory performance or to rescind his approval for further use of ready-mixed concrete during the progress of the works, if any of the requirement has, in his opinion, not been satisfactorily complied with. Specification: Bored piles (Oct 2011)
Page 21 of 49
35
26
35
e. f.
No water shall be added to the concrete on the site to increase its workability. While it is not being discharged, the concrete in a transit truck/truck mixer/agitator shall be kept continuously agitated.
2.2.4 CONCRETING a. Reinforcement shall be fixed and concreting commenced immediately after the Engineer approves the condition of the bore. Each pile shall be concreted the same day it is bored. Bores shall not be left open overnight. Concrete shall be placed in one continuous operation from bottom to top and the top 3.0m below cut-off level shall be vibrated as the concrete is placed. For the purpose of this contract, all piles shall be concreted using a "tremie" pipe whether the borehole contains water or not. An additional 500mm minimum of concrete above the true cut off is to be used to allow for final cutting back by the contractor, to sound concrete on completion of piling. The trimming of piles to the final cut-off levels shall be carried out in accordance with Clause 1.15. Any additional overcast concrete about the true cut off and trimming shall be borne by the Contractor. 2.3 WORKMANSHIP
2.3.1 General Workmanship Requirements Ensure the equipment set up and installation procedures are in conformance with SS CP 4 an relevant British Standards. 2.3.2 Depth of Penetration Install each pile to a penetration as indicated in the drawings or as adjusted as a result of the design verification check. 2.3.3 Socketing of End Bearing Piles For all piles indicated as end bearing in the drawings or schedules, form a socket of depth at least 1m or 1 times diameter, whichever is larger, into the material that meets the founding conditions, unless indicated in the drawings or modified as a result of the verification check in clause 1.4.1, as approved by the Engineer. 2.3.4 Pile Toe Adopt a construction method, which ensures that the soil below the pile is not softened. Ensure that no drilling fluid or slurry remains at the base of the pile.

Page 22 of 49

2.3.5 Continuity of Construction a. Time for Excavation and Concreting Each pile is to be excavated and concreted within twenty-four hours from the start of excavation below any temporary casing. Where this time restraint cannot reasonably be met, set out an alternative in the method statement together with an estimate of the likely effect on the performance and capacity of the pile. b. Construction without temporary casing A pile constructed in a stable cohesive soil without the use of temporary casing or other form of support is to be bored and concreted without prolonged delay and in any case soon enough to ensure that the performance of the pile is not impaired. 2.3.6 Trial Bores The Contractor shall allow in his Contract to conduct trial bores to confirm the ground conditions and the feasibility of the proposed method of installation, if required. Agree with the Engineer on the location, depth and size of the trial bores. 2.3.7 Boring Excavation a. General Submit a detailed method statement clarifying the procedure for installing the bored piles including the method of overcoming any obstructions encountered and drilling through hard rock for Engineers acceptance. The method of excavation is to ensure no soil collapse in the bored holes. Do not commence working pile excavation before method of excavation is accepted. Carry out boring excavation generally using boring or reversed circulation drilling equipment operating at the existing ground level. Provide temporary steel casing and drilling fluid if necessary to support the excavation. Ensure the extreme dimensions (teeth to teeth) of the boring bucket or auger is not smaller than the specified pile diameter. b. .Do not dewater within the excavated bored holes. c. The boring shall be with an approved auger and shall be made in one continuous operation. Each pile shall be concreted the same day it is bored. Bores shall not be left open overnight. d. The sides of the bores must be kept intact and water free by use of linings, supplemented by external grouting where appropriate. e .Casings shall be left in where ingress of water cannot be sealed by grouting or where shaft sides are unstable. No loose material shall be allowed to fall in the bottom of the bores.

Page 23 of 49

f .Rates for boring shall be based on whatever ground conditions are found. No extra cost or time shall be allowed for boring through more difficult soil conditions than those envisaged by the Contractor. Each bore hole shall be inspected and approved by the Consulting Engineer or his representative, before any concrete is placed. The Contractor shall provide all facilities including full depth temporary casings, safety harness and breathing apparatus for the Engineer's inspection. g. Reinforcement cages shall be supported firmly and centrally within the shaft so that no movement will occur during concreting operation. 2.3.8 EMPTY BORE
a. True cut-off level would be generally 1.0 m to 5.0 m below ground. Therefore, where empty boring occurs, the Contractor shall take all precautions not to contaminate the concrete at the head or elsewhere in the pile. b. The Contractor shall be responsible and pay for the removal and re-casting of all concrete which is contaminated at or below the true cut-off level. c. Each bore hole shall be inspected and approved by the Consulting Engineer or his representative, before any concrete is placed. The Contractor shall provide all facilities including full depth temporary lining, safety harness and breathing apparatus for the Engineer's inspection. d. If ground water is found in any bore hole or if the sides of the shaft tend to collapse then steel casing and/or an approved fluid solution of sufficient strength to maintain the sides shall be utilised, as appropriate. The Contractor will have to adopt all measures as directed by the Engineer. b. Reinforcement cages shall be supported firmly and centrally within the shaft so that no movement will occur during concreting operation. 2.3.9 Boring Proximity PILES IN SAME GROUP No two piles in the same group will be allowed to be constructed on the same day Do not bore so close to piles that have been recently cast which contain workable or partially set concrete that a flow of concrete or instability could be induced or damage sustained by any previously formed piles. Boring is to be kept clear from a minimum distance of 5 times pile diameter from a newly cast pile within 24 hours after casting. 2.3.10 Ground Conditions Report to the Engineer immediately any apparent variance in the ground conditions from those reported or might have been inferred from reports. 2.3.11 Rock Socketting and Obstructions

Page 24 of 49

When socketting through rock had been called for or in the event of encountering obstructions below ground level during boring, use reverse circulation drilling method, chiselling or propose other means for Engineers acceptance to bore through the obstruction or rock. Should the reverse circulation drilling method fail to clear the obstruction or rock, propose and employ other methods including predrilling with coring to assist in the clearing of the obstructions. 2.3.12 Temporary Casing Unless otherwise agreed, provide a temporary casing of appropriate size and length to support the excavation. Use low vibration equipment to install and extract casing for bores in built-up areas. 2.3.13 Pumping from Pile Excavation Do not pump from a pile excavation unless a casing has been placed into a stable stratum, which prevents the flow of water from other strata in significant quantities into the boring, or unless it can be shown that pumping will not have detrimental effect on the surrounding soil or property. 2.3.14 Determining Penetration Depth Verify soil extracted as consistent with design assumptions in accordance with clause 1.4.1above. Terminate boring at the level indicated in the drawings, subject to modifications as a result of verification check in clause 1.4.1. and to Engineers approval. Keep soil samples drilled at strata change and at 3m intervals for records. 2.4 USE OF DRILLING FLUID
2.4.1 Proposal for Use Propose to the Engineer s acceptance on the need to use drilling fluid. If acceptable, propose suitable type and method of drilling fluid to be used. 2.4.2 Storage Store solid additives in separate waterproof stores or containers, which will prevent the materials from becoming contaminated. 2.4.3 Use Use in accordance with the manufacturers instructions unless there is a demonstrable reason to do otherwise. 2.4.4 Mixing Mix drilling fluid thoroughly with clean fresh water to make a suspension, which will maintain the stability of the pile excavation for the period necessary to place concrete and complete construction. Where saline or chemically contaminated groundwater occurs, take special precautions to modify the drilling fluid suspension or prehydrate the drilling fluid in fresh water so as to render it suitable in all respects for the construction of piles. Specification: Bored piles (Oct 2011)
Page 25 of 49
2.4.5 Stability of Pile Excavation Using Drilling Fluid Where the use of drilling fluid is accepted for maintaining the stability of a boring, maintain the level of the fluid in the excavation so that the fluid pressure always exceeds the pressures exerted by the soils and groundwater. Use an adequate temporary casing in conjunction with the method to ensure stability of the strata near ground level until concrete has been placed. Maintain the fluid level at a level not less than 2m above the level of the groundwater unless otherwise agreed. In the event of a rapid loss of drilling fluid from the pile excavation, backfill the excavation without delay and inform the SO immediately. Obtain directions from the SO before excavation at that location is resumed. 2.4.6 Spillage and Disposal Take all reasonable steps to prevent the spillage of drilling fluid suspension on the site in areas outside the immediate vicinity of boring. Remove discarded drilling fluid from the site without delay. Disposal of drilling fluid is to comply with the regulations of the appropriate authority. 2.5 CLEANLINESS OF PILE BASES On completion of boring and immediately prior to casting, remove all loose, disturbed or remoulded soil or rock from the base of the pile while avoiding disturbance to the ground below the base. Maintain the stability of the bore at all times, using appropriate levels of support fluid as required. REINFORCEMENT 2.6.1 General Refer to section C3-20, clause 4.0. 2.6.2 Fixing Keep the number of joints in the longitudinal bars to a minimum. Arrange the joints such that the full strength of each bar is effective. Ensure the reinforcement cages are sufficiently rigid to enable them to be handled, placed and concreted without damage. Welding is to be in accordance with BS 7123. 2.6.3 Placing Lower the steel reinforcement accurately into position with sufficient spacer blocks to ensure the correct cover is maintained at all times. Spacer blocks are to be of suitable durability. Allow a vertical tolerance of +150/-50mm on the level of the reinforcement projecting above the cut-off level. 2.6.4 Cover to Reinforcement Ensure cover provided comply with SS CP 65 and SS CP 4, unless otherwise indicated in the drawings.
2.6

Page 26 of 49

2.7 PILE CASTING Read these clauses in conjunction with section C3-10, clause 4.1 to 4.3.
2.7.1 General Adopt a method of placing, and a suitable workability of the concrete, so as to form a continuous monolithic concrete shaft of the full cross-section. Place the concrete without such interruption as would allow the workability of the previously placed batch to have deteriorated significantly. The method of placing is to be accepted by the Engineer. If necessary, incorporate an accepted set retarding additive into the mix in order to ensure extended workability of the concrete after placement. Take all precautions in the design of the mix and placing of the concrete to avoid arching of the concrete in a casing. Prevent contamination of the concrete by spoil, liquid or other foreign matter. 2.7.2 Workability of Concrete Use slump testing for mixes with workability type A as in Table 2.7.2 below. Use flow testing as alternative workability test for higher workability mixes if practical, submit proposals for SOs acceptance. Slump measured at the time of discharge into the pile shaft or at the time of discharge into the concrete pump hopper is to be in accordance with the standards shown in the table below, unless otherwise agreed. Do not use a concrete pump to place tremie concrete directly into the pile shaft.
Table 2.7.2 Class of Workability Target flow mm Slump Min Typical condition of use
Max (mm) (mm) 125 placed into water-free or Permanently lined shaft; Reinforcement spaced at not Less than 100mm centres
Not Apllicable
75
500+/-50
100
175* Where reinforcement is spaced at Less than 600mm, or pile bore is water free and less than 600 mm diameter 225* Where concrete is to be placed by tremie under drilling fluid
50+/-50
175
2.7.3 Compaction

Page 27 of 49

Do not use internal vibrators to compact concrete in the pile shafts. 2.7.4 Placing Concrete in Dry Shafts If the pile shaft is completely dry and stable, allow concrete to be discharged directly into the borehole. Before placing of concrete, clean out all loose materials. Take necessary measures to avoid loosening of the sidewalls of the shaft, segregation, and bleeding; and to ensure that the concrete at the bottom of the borehole is not deficient in grout. Use a hopper and a length of rigid delivery tube of not less than 3m to ensure the concrete falls centrally down the shaft. The lower end of delivery tube must be no more than 10m above the bottom of the reinforcement cage. At no time must the concrete be allowed to free-fall more than 10m. 2.7.5 Placing Concrete Under Water or Under Drilling Fluid Place concrete under water or drilling fluid using a tremie concrete pipe. Do not engage alternative methods of underwater placement such as the use of a drop bottom bucket or hose from a concrete pump unless otherwise accepted. Do not discharge concrete freely into the water or drilling fluid. Before placing the concrete, ensure, by a method acceptable to the SO, that there is no accumulation of silt or other material at the base of the boring, and ensure that heavily contaminated drilling fluid suspension, which could impair the free flow of concrete from the pipe of the tremie has not accumulated in the bottom of the hole. Take a sample of the drilling fluid suspension from the top and the base of the boring using an accepted sampling device. If the specific gravity of the suspension exceeds 1.25 or does not comply in any respect with the stated limits for the particular material, do not proceed with the placing of concrete. In this event, modify or replace the drilling fluid as agreed to meet the Specification. 2.8 TREMIE EQUIPMENT Check that the hopper and pipe of the tremie is clean and watertight throughout. Extend the pipe to the base of the boring and place a sliding plug or barrier in the pipe to prevent direct contact between the first charge of concrete in the pipe of the tremie and the water or drilling fluid. If the plug or barrier is sacrificial, do not retain it in the mass of the concrete. TREMIE PROCEDURE Keep the tremie pipe outlet at least 2 m below the surface of the concrete at all stages in the pour to prevent the re-entry of slurry into the pipe and do not withdraw until concreting is complete. Develop a system of level checks for the concrete and pipe outlet to ensure that this requirement is met. At all times, maintain a sufficient quantity of concrete within the pipe to ensure that the pressure from it exceeds that from the water or drilling fluid. The internal diameter of the pipe of the tremie is not to be less than 250 mm. The number of tremie tubes per pile is to be acceptable to the SO. Where more than one tremie pipe is employed during concrete pouring to any one pile, arrange the charging of concrete in the tubes so that it is evenly distributed between the tubes and no differential head exists at the concrete/slurry interface over the length of the Specification: Bored piles (Oct 2011)
Page 28 of 49
2.9

pile. Confirm this level by soundings taken during the concrete pour. 2.10 DELAY IN CONCRETING OPERATION Should a delay or breakdown occur during the concreting operation, which in the opinion of the Engineer could cause a cold joint, entrapment of laitance in the tremie concrete, or otherwise lead to defective concrete, abandon the concrete placing. Ensure that an adequate supply of concrete to the tremie is available at all times so that placement is continuous. MONITORING OF CONCRETE LEVEL DURING PILE CASTING For each truckload of concrete discharged, counter-check the rise in concrete level against the expected increase. A graph showing the theoretical and placed concrete volumes is to be plotted against depth during concreting and submitted to SO for confirmation. If the rise in concrete level is found to be higher than it is physically possible with the amount of concrete discharged, demonstrate the integrity of the pile to the satisfaction of the Engineer. PILE HEAD CASTING LEVEL TOLERANCES 2.11.1 Piles cast in dry bores with temporary casing Cast pile heads to a level above the specified cut-off so that a sound concrete connection can be made after trimming. The casting level is to be 0.75m to 1.0m above the cut-off level. In the event of the ground water level being higher than the required pile head casting level shown on the Drawings, submit proposals for acceptance prior to placing concrete. Do not leave the pile head below the ground water level unless acceptable precautions are taken. 2.11..2 Piles Cast in Dry Bores with Permanent Lining Tubes or Casings Where permanent lining tubes or casings are used to where the cut-off is in stable ground below the base of any casing used, cast pile heads to a level above the specified cut-off so that a sound concrete connection can be made after trimming. The casting level is to be 0.75 to 1.0m above the cut-off level. Where Cut-off levels are specified below the standing groundwater level, do not reduce the borehole fluid level below the standing groundwater level until the concrete has set. EXTRACTION OF CASING
2.11
2.12
2.13
2.13.1 General Remove the casing in such a manner that no defect or damage will be sustained by the newly cast piles. 2.12.2 Workability of Concrete Extract temporary casings before the initial setting time of the concrete expires and when the concrete remains sufficiently workable to ensure that it is not lifted. Should a semi-dry mix have been accepted for formed piles, submit the means of ensuring that the semi-dry concrete does not lift during extraction of the casing. During extraction maintain the motion of the casing in the axial direction of the pile. Specification: Bored piles (Oct 2011)
Page 29 of 49

2.12.3 Concrete Level When the casing is being extracted, maintain a sufficient quantity of concrete within it to ensure that pressure from external water, drilling fluid or soil is exceeded and that the pile is neither reduced in section nor contaminated. Do not place concrete in the boring once the bottom of the casing has been lifted above the top of the concrete; place it continuously as the casing is extracted until the desired head of concrete is obtained. Take adequate precautions in all cases where excess heads of water or drilling fluid could be caused as the casing is withdrawn because of the displacement of water or fluid by the concrete as it flows into its final position against the walls of the shaft. Where two or more discontinuous lengths of casing (double casing) are used in the construction, the proposed method of working is to be acceptable to the SO. 2.14 OVERBREAK Ensure that the method of construction does not cause an overbreak of larger than 100% of the nominal pile concrete volume. Where the overbreak is larger than 100%, the pile is deemed to be defective. Propose suitable remedial measures including load tests justifying the capacity of the piles for Engineers acceptance. BACKFILLING EMPTY BORING After each pile has been cast, backfill any empty bore remaining carefully as soon as possible with acceptable materials. Ensure the method of discharging is accepted by the Engineer and in a manner that will not affect the integrity of the completed pile. GROUTING OF PILES 2.16.1 Specific Requirement for Pile Grouting Refer to the PSD for the need for pile grouting. Where the base or sides of the pile are to be pressure grouted, construct the piles with grout tubes and all other necessary equipment for grouting. 2.16.2 Grout a. Batching Maintain weighing and water dispensing mechanisms to the levels of accuracy stipulated in BS 1305. Measure the moisture contents of aggregates immediately before mixing. b. Mixing Mix all ingredients thoroughly to produce a homogeneous mix. After mixing, pass mix through a 5mm aperture sieve and use within 30 minutes. c. Transporting Transport so as to avoid segregation of the mix. 2.16.3 Method of Grouting The method adopted is to be such that all requirements of the specification in regard to load-settlement behaviour and pile uplift during grouting are met. 2.16.4 Grout Tubes Test the tubes to ensure that leakage at the joints does not occur under pressure. Specification: Bored piles (Oct 2011)
Page 30 of 49
2.15
2.16

Protect the tops of the tubes during and after grouting. Clean the tubes by flushing with water after grouting is complete. Re-grout if the specified uplift or target pressures are not achieved. Monitor the grout pressure during all operations. 2.17 PILE UPLIFT Monitor the uplift of piles during grouting using an appropriate monitoring device and reference frame. During base grouting the pile uplift is to be within the range 0.2 to 2.0mm. TOLERANCES
2.18
2.18.1 Setting Out a. Establish all lines, levels and be responsible for the correct positions of all piles. b. Carry out setting out from the main grid lines of the proposed structure. Immediately before installation of the pile, mark the pile position with suitable identifiable pins or markers. c. Casing position Check the casing position during and after placing the casing. 2.18.2 Position The maximum permitted deviation at cut off level of the pile centre from the centre point shown on the setting out drawing is to be 75 mm in any direction. A survey of the eccentricity of each pile and the pile group is to be carried out by a Licensed Surveyor, with the results submitted to the Engineer within 14 days or as directed after the pile has been trimmed to its cut-off level. 2.18.3 Verticality For vertical piles, the maximum permitted deviation of the finished pile from the vertical is 1 in 75. 2.18.4 Rake For raked piles, the piling rig is to be set and maintained to attain the required rake. The maximum permitted deviation of the finished pile from the specified rake is 1 in 25. 2.18.5 Pile Diameter a. The cross-sectional dimension of the pile is not to be less than specified. Check the auger width as required and record for each pile to ensure the specified diameter is achieved. Allow a tolerance of 5% on the auger width. b. Enlarged Pile Bases Enlarged bases formed mechanically is to be not less than the specified dimensions and concentric with the pile shaft within a tolerance of 10% of the shaft diameter. The angle between the sloping (upper) surface of the base and the axis of the pile is not to exceed 35 and at the specified diameter of the base at the perimeter the thickness of the base is not to be less than 150mm.

Page 31 of 49

2.19 PROTECTION TO PILES Ensure that, during the course of the work, no damage or displacement, which could impair performance or durability, occurs to the completed piles. Do not bore nor drive pile casing nearer than five times its diameter (measured centre to centre) from an unfilled pile excavation or from an uncased concrete pile where the concrete has been in place less than 24 hours. 2.19.1 Undesirable Imposed Forces Do not subject installed piles to any forces (direct or indirect) prior to their incorporation into the superstructure unless accepted by the SO. Cracks, tilting or bending of piles are sufficient evidence that undesirable forces had been imposed on the piles. 2.20 REPLACEMENT OF PILES 2.20.1 Rejection of Piles Any piles cracked, deformed, twisted or suspected to be damaged in anyway or not installed within the specified tolerance is to be rejected at the discretion of the SO. 2.20.2 Remedial Proposals In the event of pile rejected, propose remedial measures including replacing the rejected piles or supplement by substitute piles for Engineer s acceptance. Propose the details of modification of design to the pile caps, any required compensating piles, and other measures as necessary. The Contractor shall bear all costs and times for the rectification proposals. All the proposals are to be endorsed by a PE. 2.21 CLEANING UP Remove from the site periodically during the works and on completion all unnecessary plant, rubbish and debris resulting from the activities. NON-PERFORMANCE OF WORKING PILES Notify the SO if the performance of any pile is expected to be less than that of a similar pile whose test behaviour has been accepted. CUTTING OFF PILE HEADS On completion of installation of piles, cut off the piles to the required level as shown on the Drawings and to a tolerance of 20 mm unless otherwise agreed. Where a pile has been formed below the required cut-off level, builds up the deficient portion and ensures the reinforcement is to project for a minimum length as stipulated below. Submit the method of cutting the pile heads for Engineers acceptance. Take care to avoid shattering or otherwise damaging the rest of the pile. Cut away any cracked or defective concrete and make good with new concrete properly bonded to the old. Table 2.22 Minimum Bond Length
2.22
2.23

Page 32 of 49
Grade of Pile Cap Concrete High Tensile Steel (fy = 460 N/mm2) Mild Steel (fy = 250 N/mm2) D = nominal diameter of bar.
30 48D
40 or more 48D
45D
45D
2.24
NOISE AND DISTURBANCE Carry out the work in such a manner as to minimise noise, vibration and other disturbance. Comply with all current regulations and environmental controls. FINAL SURVEY AND AS-BUILT DRAWING On completion of the trimming to cut-off-levels of the piles, engage a registered land surveyor to survey and prepare a survey plan and as-built drawing showing the position, cut off level, founding levels and eccentricity of the piles. Allow for the survey plans to be taken in batches and to carry out the survey work on several visits. Submit within timing and format as directed by the Engineer. TRANSPORTING CONCRETE Concrete shall be transported form the mixer to the position of the pile in such a manner that segregation of the mix cannot occur.
2.25
2.26
2.27
REINFORCEMENT Reinforcement shall be provided for the pile as detailed on the drawings. The minimum cover shall be 75mm. The Contractor shall submit details of his proposed method of maintaining the correct cover for approval by the Engineer prior to starting work.
2.28
TEMPORARY CASING Temporary casing shall be used to prevent the inflow of soil and water, to maintain the pile excavation to its full dimension and to ensure that the pile shaft shall be formed to its full cross-sectional area. In water bearing ground, full-length casing shall be used to the rock founding level. The casing must be removed in such a manner that no defect of damage will be sustained by the newly cast pile. Where the concrete in contact with the casing has passed the setting time, the casing shall be abandoned in the pile. The use of vibrating casing extractors will be permitted subject to Clause 1.1.11(i) & 1.1.11(ii).
2.29
PUMPING FROM BOREHOLES

Page 33 of 49

Pumping from a borehole shall not be permitted unless a casing has been placed into a stable stratum, which prevents the flow of water from other strata in significant quantities into the boring, or unless it can be shown that pumping will not have a detrimental effect on the surrounding soil or property. 2.30 CONTINUITY OF CONSTRUCTION A pile constructed in a stable cohesive soil without the use of temporary casing or other form of support shall be installed without prolonged delay and in any case soon enough to ensure that the soil characteristics are not significantly impaired. 2.31 CLEANING OUT Upon completion of the boring the excavation shall be cleaned of all excavated soil to expose a base of undisturbed rock. This shall be carried out using a cleaning bucket, to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 2.32 INSPECTION Each pile excavation shall be carefully inspected on completion and design verification done by the Contractors and Engineers representatives before concreting is carried out. 2.33 PILE HEADS The pile heads shall be concreted to at least 500mm above the trimmed levels shown on the Engineers drawings. The pile head will be cut off to the final levels by the Contractor. The cost of cutting off or making good due to pile heads having been cast outside this tolerance or from defective concrete below the trimmed levels shall be borne by the Contractor. A minimum length of 48 times the diameter of the longitudinal reinforcement of each bored piles shall be left projecting above the cut-of-level of the pile. 2.34 BACKFILLING EMPTY BORING Where the cut-of- level of any pile is more than 500 mm below ground level, the surplus excavation shall be backfilled not more than 24 hours after the concreting is completed. 2.35 FINAL SURVEY On completion of the piling works the Contractor will be required to submit a survey plan prepared by a Licensed Land Surveyor showing the position and top level of the piles. 2.36 PILE LENGTH FOR PURPOSE OF PAYMENT

Page 34 of 49

The length of each pile for purpose of payment shall be measured form tcut-of- level to the bottom of the pile. 2.37 PILE LENGTHS The length of piles as specified on the drawings is based on information obtainable from the site investigation. The actual length of piles installed shall vary more or less from the specified length. Any inconvenience or wastage resulting from this variation shall be allowed for in the Contractors tender.

Page 35 of 49
3
3.1
SECTION 3: BORED PILE TESTING

STATIC LOAD TEST
3.1.1 STATIC TESTING OF VERTICAL AND RAKING PILES BY AXIALLY APPLIED LOADS a) General This section deals with the testing of a pile by the application of an axial load or force. The section includes vertical and raking piles tested in compression, that is subjected to load or forces in a direction such as would cause the piles to penetrate further into the ground, and vertical or piles tested in tension, that is subject to forces in a direction such as would cause the piles to be extracted from the ground. The Contractor shall allow for all expenses for building up the piles and pile caps or other means, where the pile has a deep cut-off and the testing is proposed from existing ground level. The Contractor should also allow for any special excavation of a temporary earth retaining structures system , as appropriate around the test pile so that friction from the top soil above the true cut-off level can be excluded and to allow the pile cap construction.
b)
c)
3.1.2 Definitions a) Allowable load
The load which may be safely applied to a pile after taking into account its ultimate bearing capacity, negative friction, pile spacing, overall bearing capacity of the ground below the piles and allowable settlement. b) Bearing capacity See "Ultimate Bearing Capacity". c) Constant rate of penetration test
A test in which a pile is made to penetrate the soil from its position as installed at a constant speed while the force applied at the top of the pile to maintain the rate of penetration is continuously measured. It will be noted that the force/penetration relationship obtained in this test does not represent an equilibrium condition between load and settlement.

Page 36 of 49
d)
Constant rate of uplift test A test in which the pile is extracted from its position as installed in the soil at a constant speed while the force applied at the top of the pile to maintain the rate of uplift is continuously measured. It will be noted that the force/uplift relationship obtained in this test does not represent an equilibrium condition between the extractive force and the uplift.
e)
Kentledge The dead weight used in a loading test.
f)
Maintained load A loading test in which each increment of load is held constant either for a defined period of time or until the rate of movement (settlement or uplift) falls to a specified value.
g)
Test pile Any pile to which the resistance of the soil becomes fully mobilised.
h)
Ultimate bearing capacity The load at which the resistance of the soil becomes fully mobilised.
i)
Working load The load which the pile is designed to carry (see also Allowable load).
j)
Working pile or works pile One of the piles forming the foundation of the structure.
3.2
CONTRACTORS SUBMISSIONS AND PROPOSALS The Contractor shall engage a PE (civil) to plan, design and supervise any temporary supports and reaction foundation system necessary to enable the carrying out of the load tests. The Contractor shall submit the design to the Engineer for acceptance. All design calculations and drawings are to be endorsed by the PE. The Contractor shall propose as a response plan in the event that measures taken to control ground movement and vibration do not perform satisfactorily. 3.2.1Review and Endorsement of Test Results

Page 37 of 49

The Contractor shall engage a PE (civil) with relevant experience to review the results and interpretation of all load tests conducted and endorse on all reports submitted. 3.2.2 Building Damage Assessment Carry out a Building Damage Assessment on the effects of ground movement to the neighbouring properties due to the works, for the purpose of establishing suitable values for Alert and Work Suspension levels for monitoring. Submit to SO with endorsement from a PE. 3.2.3Coordination with Other Works Co-ordinate with other contractors who may carry out other works at the same time at the site. Take into account of site access, space occupation, safety and safeguarding of adjoining properties and each others works. 3.3 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS APPLICABLE TO PILE TESTING When preparing for and conducting a pile test the Contractor shall carry out the requirements of the various Acts, Orders, Regulations and other statutory instruments that are applicable to the work for the provision and maintenance of safe working conditions, and shall in addition make such other provision as may be necessary to safeguard against any hazards that are involved in the testing or preparations for testing. Where kentledge is used, the Contractor shall construct the foundations for the kentledge and any crib-work, beams or other supporting structure in such a manner that there shall not be differential settlement, bending or deflection of an amount that constitutes a safety hazard or impairs the efficiency of the operation. The kentledge shall be adequately bonded, tied or otherwise held together to prevent it falling apart, or becoming unstable through defection of the supports. The weight of kentledge shall be greater than the maximum test load and if the weight is estimated from the density and volume of the constituent materials, an adequate factor of safety against error shall be allowed. The maximum test load or test pressure expressed as a reading on the gauge in use shall be displayed and all operators shall be made aware of this limit. Where tension piles of ground anchors are used, the Contractor shall ensure that the load is correctly transmitted to all the tie rods or bolts. The extension of rods by welding shall not be permitted unless it is known that the steel will not be reduced in strength by welding. In the case of the rods in tension, the bond stresses shall not exceed normal permissible bond stresses for the type of steel and grade of concrete used. In all cases, the Contractor shall ensure that when the hydraulic jack and load measuring device are mounted on the pile head, the whole system will be stable up to the maximum load to be applied. The hydraulic jack, pump, hoses, pipes, couplings and other apparatus to be operated under hydraulic pressure shall be capable of withstanding a test pressure of 1.5 times the maximum working pressure without leakage.

Page 38 of 49

3.4 LOAD TEST FACTORS 3.4.1 The load factor for standard load tests on working piles shall be two (minimum),without exceeding the limits of settlement defined elsewhere in this specification 3.4.2 The load factor for the instrumented ultimate load test conducted on a pile installed for this purpose shall be 3.0. 3.4.3 The load factor for working load test conducted on a pile installed for this purpose, shall be 2.0 3.4.4 No working piles shall be installed until the ultimate load tests on the test piles (installed for this purpose) have been conducted and approved by the Engineer. The ultimate load test piles shall be abandoned , as tests are completed. 3.5 PROVISION FOR LOAD TESTS 3.5.1 At the outset and before the commencement of installation of working piles, the number of ultimate load tests as shown in the Contracts drawings or 0.5% of the total working piles or one number, whichever is greater, shall be carried out to confirm the frictional and end-bearing parameters for the design of working piles in this contract. The test piles diameter and locations are shown in the Contract drawings or to be decided by the Engineer. The test piles shall be fully instrumented to determine the frictional and endbearing parameters. 3.5.2 During the contract, the number of working load tests as shown in the Contracts drawings or 1% of total working piles or at least 2 working piles or 1 for every 50m length of proposed building, whichever is greater shall be carried out at locations to be decided by the Engineer. 3.5.3 In addition to the above, the numbers of PDA (Pile Dynamic Analysis) tests as shown in the Contracts drawings or 2% of total working piles installed or 2 numbers, whichever is greater shall be carried out. 3.5.4 5% of the Total working piles intstalled shall also be given to conduct the PIT (Pile Integrity Test) tests. 3.5.5 In addition to the instrumentation of ultimate test piles, sufficient ground instrumentation shall also be carried out to determine the extent of possible ground movements that are likely to occur during the boring and installation of working piles. The minimum ground instrumentation suggested by the Engineer for this purpose is shown in the contract drawings. The cost of ultimate test piles shall include the cost of pile instrumentation as well as ground instrumentation. 3.5.6 The Contractor shall submit the details of pile instrumentation , with minimum numbers and type of instrumentations , as shown in the Tender/Contract drawings for testing of the ultimate test piles. The method and the extent of instrumentation shall be subject to

Page 39 of 49

the Engineers approval. Any additional instrumentation required by the Engineer shall be installed at no extra cost or time to the Contract. 3.6 PILES AXIALLY LOADED IN COMPRESSION 3.6.1 Pile head The pile head or cap shall be formed to give a plane surface which is normal to the axis of the pile, sufficiently large to accommodate the load applying apparatus and settlement measuring equipment and shall be adequately reinforced or protected to prevent damage to the concentrated application of load from the loading equipment. The joint between a pile and pile cap shall be constructed in such a manner as to provide equal strength with the pile section. The pile cap shall be concentric with the test pile. A sufficient clear space shall be made under any part of the cap projecting beyond the section of the pile so that at the maximum anticipated settlement, load is not transmitted to the ground except through the pile. 3.6.2 Cut-off level Where the pile cap is formed above the cut-off level of the working piles in soils which would influence the load bearing capacity of the pile, a sleeve shall be left in place during testing to eliminate friction which would not arise in working piles. Alternatively, if the friction above the designed cut-off level can be calculated with reasonable accuracy, then with the approval of the Engineer a sleeve need not be used, but the calculated friction must be taken into account in assessing the load being applied to the pile. 3.6.3 PREPARATION OF A WORKING PILE WHICH IS TO BE TESTED Where a test is required on a working pile, the Contractor shall build up or cut down or otherwise prepare the pile for testing as required by the Engineer and shall form the head of the pile or cap in accordance with Clause 2 (i) above. 3.6.4 CONCRETE TESTING Nine test cubes shall be made from the concrete used in the preliminary test pile and from the concrete used for building upon working piles in "Preparation of a working pile which is to be tested". If a concrete cap is cast separately from a preliminary or a working pile a further eight cubes shall be made from this concrete. The cubes shall be made and tested in accordance with BS 1881. The pile test shall not commence until the strength of the cubes taken from the pile exceeds twice the average direct stress in any pile section under the maximum

Page 40 of 49

required test load and the strength of the cubes taken from the cap under the same load. Variation of procedure will be permitted if expressly agreed by the Engineer. REACTION SYSTEMS 3.7.1 Types of reaction systems The testing shall be carried out using tension piles or especially constructed anchorages arranged so that their axis are in the plane of the axis of the test pile or in the case of vertical piles only, kentledge. Alternative methods may only be used with the approval of the Engineer prior to the delivery of any testing equipment to the site or the installation of any components for the purpose of pile testing. 3.7.2 Details of loading arrangement The loading arrangement used shall be designed to transfer safely to the test pile the maximum load required in testing. 3.7.3 Kentledge Where kentledge is to be used, this shall be supported on cribwork disposed around the pile head. The bearing pressure under supporting crib shall be such as to ensure stability of the kentledge stack. Care should be taken to ensure that the centre of gravity of the kentledge is on the axis of the pile. The nearest edge of the crib supporting the kentledge stack should not be closer than 1.3m to the surface of the test pile. This specification does not cover the use of kentledge carried directly on the pile head, and this method of loading shall not be used except at the express direction of the Engineer. 3.7.4 Care of test or works piles The method employed in installation of any tension piles or anchorage equipment shall be such as to prevent damage to any test pile or work piles 3.7.5 Spacing of tension piles The spacing of vertical tension piles from a test pile where their use is approved shall not be less than three times the diameter of the test piles or the tension piles or 2m, whichever is the larger measured centre to centre. Where a pile to be tested has an enlarged base, this same criterion shall apply with regard to the pile shafts, with the additional requirement that the surface of no tension pile shall be closer than one half of the enlarged base diameter to the base of the test pile. The above requirements do not preclude the use of inclined tension piles subject to the approval of the Engineer. 3.7.6 Working piles as tension piles
3.7

Page 41 of 49

Working piles shall not be used as tension piles without the written approval of the Engineer. Where working piles are used as tension piles measurement of their movement shall be made to an accuracy of 0.5mm or better. Where ground anchors are employed, no part of the anchor transferring the load to the ground should be closer to the test pile than 3 test pile shaft diameters. Where the pile tested has an enlarged base this criteria should apply with regard to pile shaft and in addition no section of the anchor transferring load to the ground should be closer to the pile base than the base diameter 3.8 EQUIPMENT FOR LOADING AND LOAD MEASUREMENT 3.8.1 Equipment for applying load The equipment used for applying load shall consist of a hydraulic ram or jack having a capacity at least equal to the required maximum load, and a hand or power driven pump with a pressure gauge included in the hydraulic system. The ram shall be placed on the pile head or cap so as to transfer an axial load to the pile section. The complete system shall be capable of transferring the maximum load required for the purpose of the test. The load from the reaction system shall be transferred axially to the hydraulic ram or jack. 3.8.2 Measurement of load
The load shall be measured by a calibrated load gauge and also by means of a calibrated pressure gauge included in the hydraulic system of the jack. The load as shown on the load measuring device shall be recorded. The calibrated pressure gauge is required to check for gross error and shall also be recorded. The load measuring device shall be calibrated every twelve months or whenever adjustments are made to the device, or at intervals appropriate to the type of equipment. The pressure gauge and hydraulic jack shall be calibrated together. Certificates of calibration shall be produced for the Engineer's inspection. The Engineer's agreement shall be obtained in writing before any modification of this procedure shall be used. The jack and load gauge should be carefully aligned so that the load applied is co-axial with the pile. 3.8.3 Adjustability of equipment The equipment shall be capable of adjustment throughout the test to obtain a smooth increase of load or to maintain each load constant at the required stages of a maintained loading test. 3.9 METHOD OF MEASURING THE MOVEMENT OF THE PILE 3.9.1 Methods of measuring movement of the pile head

Page 42 of 49

In a maintained load test, movement of the pile head shall be measured by one of the methods (a), (c) or (d) below in the case of vertical piles or by one of the methods (b), (c) or (d) in the case of raking piles as required by the Engineer. a) Levelling method
By optical or other levelling method by reference to an external datum. Where a level and staff are used, the level and scale of the staff shall be chosen to enable readings to be made to an accuracy of 0.5mm. A scale attached to the pile or pile cap may be used instead of a levelling staff. A datum shall be established on a permanent object or other well founded structure or deep datum point. The datum shall be situated so that only one setting up of the level is needed. The datum shall be duplicated. Neither datum shall be affected by the test loading or by other operations on the site. Where another method of levelling is proposed this shall be approved by the Engineer in writing. b) Independent reference frame
By means of an independent reference frame shall be founded in each a manner and at such a distance from the test pile, kentledge support crib, tension piles, or anchorages that movement of the ground in the vicinity of the equipment do not cause movement of the reference frame during the test of an amount which will affect the required accuracy of the test. Check observations of any movements of the reference frame shall be made or a check shall be made of the movement of the pile head relative to an external datum during the progress of the test. In no case shall the supports be less than 3 test pile diameters or 2 metres whichever is the greater, from the centre of the test pile. The measurement of movement shall be made by two dial gauges rigidly mounted on the reference frame that bear on surfaces normal to the pile axis fixed to the pile cap or head. Alternatively, the gauges may be fixed to the pile and bear on surfaces on the reference frame. The dial gauges shall be placed in diametrically opposed positions and equidistant from the pile axis. The dial gauges shall be chosen to enable readings to be made to an accuracy of 0.1mm. The reference frame shall be protected from sun and wind. Electrical displacement transducers can be used in place of dial gauges. c) Reference wire
By means of a reference wire which shall be held under constant tension between two foundations form as in (b). The wire shall be positioned against a scale fixed to the pile and the movement of the scale relative to the wire shall be determined. Check observations of any movements of the supports of the wire shall be made of the movement of the pile head as in method (a). Readings shall be taken to an accuracy of 0.5mm. The wire shall be protected from sun and wind. d) Other methods

Page 43 of 49

Electro-optic position sensing. A laser beam focussed by a lens attached to the pile may be used to produce an image on a photoelectric detector. Movement of the pile produces an electrical signal proportioned to the movement. The foundation for the laser and detector units should be as described in (b) and (c) above but greater accuracy can be achieved if they are placed 10 test pile diameters from the test pile.
PROTECTION OF TESTING EQUIPMENT AND SUPERVISION 3.9.1 Protection from the weather Throughout the test period, all load or settlement measuring equipment shall be protected from the weather. 3.9.2 Protection of disturbance Construction equipment and persons who are not involved in the testing process shall be kept at a sufficient distance from the test to avoid disturbance of the measurement apparatus. 3.9.3 Notice of test The Engineer shall be given not less than 24 hours notice of intention to commence the test. 3.9.4 Records During the progress of the test, the testing equipment and all records of the test shall be available as required for inspection by the Engineer's representative. 3.10 TEST PROCEDURE Load Test: Static Load Test Procedures 3.10.1 Ultimate Load Test by Maintained Load Unless otherwise specified the maximum load which is to be applied in an ultimate load test is three times the specified working load. This test is only applicable to preliminary piles. The loading and unloading is to be carried out in stages as shown in the table below.

Page 44 of 49

Table 3.10.1 Ultimate Load Test Cycles Load, Percentage of Working Load 0 25 50 75 100 70 35 0 0 50 100 125 150 175 200 150 100 50 0 0 50 100 150 200 225 250 275 300 200 100 0 Minimum Time of Holding (Minutes) 60 60 60 24hrs 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 24hrs 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 24 hrs 60 60 60 Load Cycle Number 1
Following each application of load, hold the load for not less than the period shown or until the rate of settlement is less than 0.1 mm/hr and slowing down. Calculate the rate of settlement from the slope of the curve obtained by plotting values of settlement Specification: Bored piles (Oct 2011)
Page 45 of 49

versus time and drawing a smooth curve through the points. Proceed unloading for each stage after the expiry of the period shown in the table. For any period when the load is constant, record time and settlement immediately on reaching the load and at approximately 15 min intervals for the 1st hr, at 30 min intervals between the 1st and 4th hr and at 1 hr intervals between the 4th and 12th hr after the application of the increment of the load. Continue testing until the maximum test load has been reached or when the settlement exceeds 10% of the pile diameter. 3.10.2 Working Load Test by Maintained Load Unless otherwise specified the maximum load to be applied in a working load test on a working pile is two times the specified working load. Carry out the loading and unloading in stages as shown in the table below. Table 3.10.2 Working Load Test Cycles Load Percentage of Working Load Minimum Time of Holding (minutes) 0 25 60 50 60 75 60 100 24hrs 70 60 35 60 0 60 0 50 60 100 60 125 60 150 60 175 60 200 24 hrs 150 60 100 60 50 60 0 60
Load Cycle Number 1
Following each application of an increment of load, hold the load for not less than the period shown or until the rate of settlement is less than 0.1 mm/hr and slowing down. Calculate the rate of settlement from the slope of the curve obtained by plotting values of settlement versus time and drawing a smooth curve through the points. Proceed unloading for each stage after the expiry of the period shown in the table. For any period when the load is constant, record time and settlement immediately on Specification: Bored piles (Oct 2011)
Page 46 of 49

reaching the load and at approximately 15 min intervals for the 1st hr, at 30 min intervals between the 1st and 4th hr and at 1 hr intervals between the 4th and 12th hr after the application of the increment of the load If any of the loading tests fail to meet the standard specified, further additional tests shall be conducted by the Contractor at his own cost. For each loading test on a working pile that fails, The Contractor shall conduct two (2) additional loading tests in the immediate vicinity of the failed working pile his own cost. On the basis of these tests, the Engineer shall decide the remedial work on the defective pile OR either remove, abandon or downgrade the defective pile as a working pile and two or more additional piles shall be placed, as required to provide a symmetrical cluster of piles which shall be joined together by means of an approved pile cap. 3.11 SUPERVISION The Contractor shall provide an experienced and qualified supervisor to be present full time during the duration of the pile tests to ensure that the loading sequences and method of taking settlement readings are strictly followed and that the true load is maintained at all times. Pile tests shall be carried out only in the presence of the Engineer or his representative. 3.12 PILE TEST RECORD Within forty-eight (48) hours of completion of any pile test, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer's representative four (4) copies of complete records of time, loads, settlement and any other relevant information together with graphs of load against time and settlement against time. The time within which the Engineer is required to issue instructions for the remaining works piles shall not commence until the requirements of this clause have been satisfied. 3.13 RECORDS CONFIDENTIALITY All pile test records shall be considered confidential and shall not be disclosed by the Contractor to any third party without the express permission in writing of the Employer. 3.14 FAILURE OF TEST PILES The Engineer's interpretation and conclusion arrived at on the test results shall be final. When the pile tests have been carried out as prescribed above, the piles so tested shall be deemed to have failed if: 3.14.1 Failure criteria of Working Test Piles a) the residual settlement after removal of the test load exceeds 40% of the settlement under test load or 6 mm whichever is less, even if the settlement under test load is satisfactory.

Page 47 of 49

b) the total settlement under the test load exceeds 0.05 mm for every tonne of load applied, subject to a maximum of 13mm under the designed load , whichever is lesser. the total settlement under the test load exceeds 0.05 mm for every tonne of load applied, subject to a maximum of 25 mm whichever is lesser, under twice the designed load, or inability to complete a load test due to failure of the pile cap through whatever cause.
c)
d)
3.14.2 Failure criteria of Ultimate Load Test Ultimate failure of a test pile shall be deemed to be at that loading under which the trial test pile continues to settle or sink without addition to, or increase of, the test load applied to the pile. The nominal working load shall be deemed to be one-third of that load which causes ultimate failure. 3.14.3 An ultimate load test pile shall also be deemed to have failed under loading test if: 1. Any portion of the pile has failed, crumbled or distorted from its original position, etc. 2. The pile shaft itself has failed. 3. The head of the pile settles 10% or more of the pile diameter, or 50mm whichever is less. 4. The fail criteria specified under Clause 31.1 & 31.2 for the first two cycles (see Clause 28.4) are exceeded. 3.14.4 TEST LOAD Abandonment If any of the test piles test load has to be abandoned due to:Faulty jack or equipment Kentledge instability Improper setting of datum Unstable bench mark or scales Pre-jacking or pre-loading
then the Contractor will have to carry out two further tests including the installation of additional two (2) test piles, entirely at his own expense as directed by the Engineer. Specification: Bored piles (Oct 2011)
Page 48 of 49
3.15
REMEDIAL MEASURES IF TEST PILES FAILED
3.15.1 For every pile that fails the pile tests under Clause 3.14.1 and/or Clause 3.14.2 and/or Clause 3.14.3 (i.e: ultimate or working load tests), the Contractor shall have to carry out two ( 2) further tests including the installation of additional two (2) test piles, entirely at his own expense, to the satisfaction of the Engineer . 3.15.2 In the event of the working test pile failure, the Contractor shall be required to install minimum two or more additional compensating piles as the Engineer deem fit, as to provide a symmetrical cluster of affected piles/or pilegroups, which shall be joined together by means of an approved new pile cap and to entirely at the Contractor's expense. The Engineer design costs and the associated structural costs of remedial works shall also be at the Contractor's expense. No extension of time shall be given for this purpose. 3.14.4 In the event , 1% of the total number of working piles fail , then it shall be deemed that the entire piling contract has failed. All direct and consequential damages and/or losses suffered due to failure of this part of the contract will have to be borne by the Contractor
3.16
REMOVAL ON COMPLETION On completion of all pile testing all temporary works and equipment shall be removed by the Contractor as directed by the Engineer
3.17
MATERIAL TESTS, PILE DRIVING ANALYZER (PDA) AND PILE INTEGRITY TEST (PIT), ETC Approved Laboratories All PDA tests are to be carried out by companies accredited by the Singapore Accreditation Council (SAC), under the Singapore Accreditation Council Singapore Laboratory Accreditation Scheme (SAC-SINGLAS).
3.17.1

Page 49 of 49
MICRO PILES SPECIFICATION
Specification: Micro piles (Oct 2011)

Page 1 of 12
General 1.1. The work comprises the construction of Micropiles. Micropiles adopted in this project are of replacement type. Casing shall be installed by rotation or using casing vibrator. The drilling shall be aided with air and water to flush the drilled hole prior to reinforcement installation and tremie grouting. 1.2. The work shall be carried out in accordance with this specification and drawings supplied to the Contractor and any other instructions issued by the Engineer/Architect or his representative from time to time. 1.3. The Contractor shall make allowance in his tender for compliance with all the specifications and other requirements necessary for proper execution and completion of the works to the Engineer's satisfaction. 1.4. Hydraulic Drilling Rig and Accessories The Contractor shall use only electrically powered hydraulic drilling rigs to minimise noise generated during drilling operation. The slurry circulation tanks shall be used to remove all spoil cement slurry and water from the pile pits. Generator sets for the supply of electricity shall have adequate housing and exhaust silencer to minimise noise and shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer prior to use on site.
Installation of Micro Piles The installation of micro piles shall include inter-alia the following requirements : 2.1 The quality of materials such as 40 HT Grade 460 steel bar, cement grout, grout additive, splice material, etc must be approved by the Engineer. Equipment tools, and other accessories must be in good working condition. All site safety precautions must be observed and safety measures provided and maintained throughout the installation work. Grout shall be mixed from ordinary Portland cement complying to current British or Singapore Standards and clean water supplied from the public mains. Whenever necessary, "Intrusion Aid" grout additive shall be added to the manufacturer's recommendation to improve workability and reduce shrinkage. The grouting shall be executed within such time as may be directed or approved by the Engineer. The strength of grout shall not be less than Grade 35. The installation date of every micro pile and the test results for any one piling site shall be captured and recorded and a comprehensive report, to be verified and certified by Contractor's Professional Engineer involved in the micro pile installation, shall be submitted to the Engineer within two weeks after the completion of the work at each piling site. Any other conditions that may be imposed by the Engineer to ensure the safety and soundness of each micro pile.
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
Nominal Working Load of Micro Pile For micro piles, the pile diameters to be adopted shall be from 150mm to 300mm in

Page 2 of 12

increment of 25mm. The nominal working loads of the various sizes of micro piles shall be as shown in the Drawings. 4 Boring of Micro Piles 4.1 For soft and collapsible soils, the borehole shall be temporarily cased or stabilised with bentonite slurry. Upon reaching rock or firm soil strata drilling may be continued without casing. Drilling in rock shall be executed with a down-the-hole hammer. Boring in soil can be done by wet or dry rotary drilling depending on the soil type and site environment. The Contractor shall submit with his tender the name and CV of a qualified geotechnical engineer who will be full time on site and who shall supervise all piles. He shall at least a degree in Geotechnical Engineering or MSc(Geotechnical) if he holds a degree in Civil Engineering and at least 5 years similar experiences.
4.2
SITE CONDITIONS 5.1 The Contractor shall be deemed to have inspected the site and satisfied himself with regard to access, site conditions, existing buildings and structures. The Contractor shall satisfy himself regarding subsoil conditions and the underground water table. The soil report included in this contract is for the reference of the Contractor only. Neither the Consultants nor the Client accept responsibility for its accuracy or implications, if actual soil conditions are found to be different during progress of works. Upon completion of the drilling, the borehole shall be cleaned by flushing out any loose chipping/soil particles from the inside of the casing. The tender shall be based on the condition ground as found and no extras shall be allowed for dealing with more difficult soil conditions than envisaged by the Contractor at the time of tendering. The Contractor may at his own cost and with the written approval of the Engineer, conduct additional soil tests if he so desires.
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
PROGRAMME 6.1 The Contractor shall with his tender, submit a detailed programme showing the sequence and manner in which piling and other works are to be executed. The actual construction would be carried out in a sequence and to a programme agreed with the Engineer. Where a sequence is specified in the contract, this shall be adhered to.

Page 3 of 12
SAFETY OF THE WORKS 7.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for the stability of all slopes and excavations including those for piles and shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of personnel in the area of piling operations. Where rocks and hard material are encountered during boring which require manual excavation with pneumatic tools, the Contractor shall ensure that adequate linings are placed above the working level and that sufficient ventilation is provided for the well-being of workmen. The Contractor must ensure that no damage is caused to adjoining properties or construction works adjoining the proposed building and would be solely responsible for such consequences.
7.2
DEFECTIVE WORK 8.1 Defective work shall be all work which, in the opinion of the Engineer, does not fully comply with this specification or the drawings. The Contractor shall make good or carry out such additional works at his own expense as may be necessary to make good all defective work to the Engineer's satisfaction.
CONCRETE The grade of concrete used for grouting is Grade 35 with minimum 7 days cube strength of 24.5 N/mm2.
10
TESTING CONCRETE 10.1 Six(6) test cubes shall be taken from every pile or as directed by the Engineer or his representative. Cubes will be tested by an independent approved laboratory. Three(3) cubes will be tested at the age of 7 days, and the remaining three(3) at 28 days. Cubes shall have the same marks as pile members and shall be suffixed A, B, C and D in each set. Thus cubes 1/C, 2/B, 2/C, etc shall be 1/C, 1/D, 2/C, 2/D, etc shall be tested at 28 days. The cubes shall be made and tested in accordance with BS. 1881. The results of the tests shall be sent to the Engineer and also kept on the site for reference. a. The average strengths of the three cubes tested at 7 days shall be used as indication only. If the average strength is less than 0.75 of the characteristic strength, the Engineer may instruct that the mix design be modified to increase the mean strength of subsequent concrete until satisfactory evidence is obtained of its adequacy.
10.2
10.3

Page 4 of 12

b. If the average 7-day strength is less than 0.67 of the characteristic strength, no more concrete shall be placed on the suspect concrete until the 28-day strength is found to comply or unless the Engineer specifically approves. Any additional expense and/or delay shall be borne solely by the Contractor. Alternatively the Engineer may instruct removal of the suspect concrete and compensating piles plus pilecaps. 10.4 Tests shall be carried out in a laboratory accredited under the Singapore Laboratory Accreditation Scheme (SINGLAS) and approved by the Engineer. The appropriate strength requirement shall be considered to be satisfied if for each pair of cubes tested at the specified age, none of the strengths is below the required strength at the age tested; and the difference between their strength is not more than 20% of the average. If the tests fail to meet these requirements, the Contractor may be required to increase the target mean strengths of subsequent batches to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
10.5
11
REINFORCEMENT 11.1 The reinforcement shall be high-strength steel to BS. 4449, free from rust, scale, paint and grease, bent and placed in accordance with the Engineer's drawings. The reinforcement shall be adequately fixed to avoid displacement and to maintain the minimum specified cover during grouting. Reinforcement shall be placed with 75 mm cover and project a minimum of 45 diameter of the reinforcement size above the load transfer plate, unless specified otherwise on the drawings.
11.2
12
TECHNICAL INFORMATION TO BE SUPPLIED 12.1 12.2 Contractor shall submit with his tender details of the method of boring and construction of piles. Method of fabrication and details of reinforcement cages and load transfer plates for each size of pile. The reinforcement shall not be less than that elsewhere specified in this specification
13
PILE CAPACITY The size of micro pile adopted is shall be in accordance to the tender drawings or subsequent revision.
14
LOAD TESTS Prior to installation of working piles, one ultimate test pile to verify the soil parameters shall be carried out. Two working load tests to check the quality of working piles will be carried out during the micro piling works. Working load tests shall be based on a factor of safety of 2.

Page 5 of 12

15 CONSTRUCTION SETTING OUT 15.1 The Contractor shall employ an approved licensed surveyor to set out the grids based on the setting out plan provided by the Architect. Piles shall be set out from grid lines or from the building line where necessary. Setting out must be agreed between the Contractor and the Architect in writing, prior to the commencement of work The Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy of locating and positioning each pile. Any error in setting out shall be made good at the Contractor's expense and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Subsequent redesign of the structure due to errors in set out will be undertaken by the engineer at the contractor's expense.
15.2
16
TOLERANCES 16.1 Boring (a) (b) (c) Full nominal cross-section must be maintained throughout its length. The shaft shall not deviate from vertical by more than 1 in 100. The maximum variation of piles from the position on plan at the cut-off level shall not exceed 50 mm. The centre of the pile at cut-off level shall be the theoretical centre. Depth of piles shall be confirmed with the Engineer as work proceeds.
(d) 16.2
Cut-Off The permissible tolerance in the true cut-off level will be plus or minus 15 mm, upon final trimming.
16.3
The Contractor will be responsible for all additional works (pile caps, tie beams, installation of compensating piles, etc.) including the P.Es design, resulting from tolerances outside those specified herein. The consultant review and comments of the contractors pile design shall be compiled by the contractor at his own expense and time.
17
EXCAVATED MATERIAL 17.1 All excavated material from bore holes shall be removed off the site to the approval of the Consulting Engineer.
18
PILES IN SAME GROUP 18.1 No two piles in the same group will be allowed to be constructed on the same day.

Page 6 of 12
19
PILING TO BE SUPERVISED BY COMPETENT PERSONNEL 19.1 Piling must be carried out by supervisory staff experienced in the installation of such piles so as to assess the soundness of soil conditions at the foundation level to ensure that working loads can be achieved. The requirement of qualified supervision under clause 4.2(b), in additional to this clause. The Contractor shall submit written evidence and details of personnel who would supervise, to satisfy the Engineer that his supervisory staff has relevant experience.
19.2
20
TESTING OF WORKING PILES 20.1 20.2 20.3 The Contractor shall make provision for a minimum of piles to be tested to working load requirements as per BCA total nos of testing requirement. In the course of piling operations, the Engineer will select a number of piles which shall be load tested as described in the Specification. The working test piles shall be subjected to a test load of 2 times the working load (i.e. total load to be carried by each pile excluding its self weight). If the Engineer has any doubts about the carrying capacity of any pile, the period of loading shall be extended at his discretion at the Contractors cost. The test load shall be applied by means of a jack of capacity not less than two and half times the working load and capable of measurement to within one tonne of accuracy, against a kentledge which shall be to the approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy of the testing equipment and will provide calibration certificate for all jacking equipment. The Engineer will supervise the performance of the test. The Contractor shall provide skilled staff to assist in taking and recording readings of settlement and jack pressure gauges. All readings of settlement shall be taken from a minimum of two dial gauges to an accuracy of 0.05 mm. Additional readings shall be taken from a minimum of two scales and two benchmarks to an accuracy of 0.5 mm. The Contractor shall keep full records of load tests as directed by the Engineer. Two (2) sets of such records must be submitted, including load settlement curves. Load shall be applied in accordance with the Bored pile specification for working load test. Acceptance Criteria a) A working test pile shall be deemed to have failed if its maximum settlement under the test load exceeds 0.15mm per Ton of nominal working load.
20.4
20.5
20.6
20.7

Page 7 of 12
b) A working test pile shall also be deemed to have failed if the residual settlement exceeds 40% of the settlement under test load or 6mm whichever is less, even if the settlement under test load is satisfactory. 20.8 Part tests or tests in excess of the specified test load and tests on piles of other capacities other than specified will be paid for in proportion to the loads applied, except where such tests are necessary because of the abandonment of the pile test or the failure of the pile. Installation of piles shall be suspended during a load test unless the prior approval of the Engineer is obtained.
20.9
21
ULTIMATE LOAD TESTS ON TRIAL PILES 21.1 The Contractor shall be required to install, prior to the commencement of piling work, one trial pile of the largest size in this contract. This pile shall not be a working pile and is for the purpose of conducting an ultimate load test. The positions of such trial piles will be decided by the Engineer. The purpose of the ultimate load test is to determine the factor of safety for the nominal working load specified and/or penetration depths to which all subsequent working piles shall be driven. The trial pile is to be of the same material and dimensions as the working pile, and installed with the same type of equipment and by the same method, as the working piles which are to be installed later. If at the completion of the ultimate load test it is deemed necessary, the Engineer may vary the installation method or design of the working piles. The Contractor shall not claim for any extra payment as a result of this change. The trial pile shall be capable of sustaining a test load of not less than three (3) times the nominal working load before ultimate failure. The trial pile shall be loaded in cumulative equal increments similar to the Bored pile Specification for ultimate load test.
21.2
21.3
21.4
21.5
22
FAILURE OF ULTIMATE LOAD TEST 22.1 The total settlement and/or residual settlement of the ultimate load test for piles shall not exceed (i) the acceptance criteria specified for working test piles and/or (ii) 20mm at 3 times the nominal working load, otherwise the test is deemed to have failed.

Page 8 of 12

22.2 Ultimate failure of a trial pile shall be deemed to be at that loading under which the trial test pile continues to settle or sink without addition to, or increase of, the test load applied on the pile. The nominal working load shall be deemed to be one-third of that load which causes ultimate failure. The ultimate load test pile shall also be deemed to have failed under loading test when any one of the following observations is recorded: a) Any portion of the test pile is found to have cracked, crumbled, distorted from its original shape or alignment or deflected from its original position, etc. The pile under test load continues to settle or sink without any increase in the load applied. The loading test is abandoned due to instability of the kentledge, or altering or tampering of the reference benchmarks or datum, or scales or dial gauges, or surveyors levels by the Contractor. Any portion of the pilecap shows any signs of failure such as cracks, or distortion or deflection, etc.
22.3
b)
c)
d)
22.4
The trial piles shall therefore be installed to depths which will give ultimate bearing resistance of at least third (3) times the nominal working load of the pile. The onus for installing piles to achieve the ultimate bearing capacity shall rest with the Contractor. Should the additional trial pile again fail to achieve the required bearing capacity, two new trial piles shall be installed and the ultimate load tests repeated until the specified acceptance criteria is achieved. The time and cost of installing all additional trial piles and carrying out further ultimate load tests as a result of failure of the first trial pile shall be borne entirely by the Contractor.
22.5
23
ABANDONMENT OF PILE TESTS 23.1 Should any test have to be discontinued due to: a) b) c) d) e) Faulty jack or gauge; Instability of kentledge; Improper setting of datum; Instable benchmarks or scales; or Pre-jacking or pre-loading before commencement of the tests;
The test shall be abandoned and the Contractor shall entirely at his own expense carry out two(2) further tests to the Engineers instructions. The cost of the abandoned test shall be borne by the Contractor.

Page 9 of 12

24 INSTALLATION OF WORKING PILES 24.1 25 The installation of all working piles shall not commence until the approval of the Engineer in writing has been obtained.
SEQUENCE OF INSTALLATION OF WORKING PILES 25.1 The Engineer has the absolute right to instruct the Contractor to install working piles in any sequence the Engineer deems necessary for the satisfactory completion of the Works. Any claim by the Contractor for extra payment or compensation as a consequence of such a change in the sequence of working piles installation shall not be considered.
26
REMEDIAL MEASURES 26.1 For every pile that fails the test under Clause 20 and/or Clause 22, the Contractor shall have to carry out two(2) further tests including the installation of additional test piles, entirely at his own expense, to the satisfaction of the Engineer and as directed. In the event of the working test pile failure, the Engineer may require installation of additional and/or compensating piles as he deems fit and entirely at the Contractors expense. Engineering design costs and the associated structural costs of remedial works shall also be at the contractors expense. In the event that four or more piles fail then it shall be deemed that the entire piling contract has failed. All direct and consequential damages and/or losses suffered due to failure of this part of the contract will have to be borne by the Contractor.
26.2
26.3
27
AS-BUILT DRAWINGS 27.1 After installation of the piles the Contractor shall employ a licensed surveyor to prepare a layout plan showing offsets of all installed piles from the theoretical locations, and shall submit such drawings in duplicate to the Engineer. Inclinations of all the piles shall also be surveyed and submitted as soon as possible, within 14 days from the last pile installed. The Contractor shall also submit 2 certified copies plus electronic file in AutoCAD format of the drawing showing the as-installed length and cut-off level of each pile as soon as possible, within 14 days from the last pile installed. This drawing shall be certified by Contractors own Professional Engineer.
27.2
28
REMOVAL ON COMPLETION 28.1 On completion of all pile testing, all temporary works and equipment shall be removed and temporary piles extracted or, if approved by the Engineer, cut off at such level as the Engineer may direct.

Page 10 of 12

29 SAFETY OF ADJACENT STRUCTURES 29.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to adjacent buildings, vaults, highways, tunnels and uncharted underground services affected by his operations.
30
Main Steel Component of Micro Piles Axial steel component of the micro pile shall be in accordance with the drawings. The main steel bars shall be joined by splicing. Splicing shall be of mechanical splicing. Top anchorage of the micropile shall consist of extension of the axial steel component of the pile through a steel bearing plate. The circumference of the steel bars through the steel plate shall be securely welded. The contractor shall propose his method of reinforcement splicing or coupling to the Engineer for approval. Upon approval of the method, the contractor shall proceed to fabricate samples of splicing or coupling and send them to an approved laboratory for testing on its tensile strength. The splicing or coupling shall be strong enough such that its tensile strength is higher than the reinforcement. Three samples shall be tested and the results of the tests are to be accepted before installation of working piles. The costs of fabrication of the test samples and testing are to be borne by the contractor.
31
Grout Mix The proportion of grout and the minimum strength of work cubes shall comply with the following requirement: Range of Water/ Cement Ratio Resistance to Crushing (Cube Strength) 7 days 0.40 to 0.45
2
28 days
2
24.5 N/mm
35 N/mm
The quantities of cement in the mix shall be measured by weight. Grout shall be mixed on site and shall be pumped into its final position not later than half an hour after mixing. Grout shall be free from segregation, slumping and bleeding. 32 Grouting Grouting shall be placed using tremie method where grout mix is pumped into the bored hole by grouting pump under low pressure and delivered using PVC hose or galvanised iron pipe in one continuous operation until "good grout" appears at the top of borehole. 33 Grout Test Where micro piles are included in the Works, 6 test cubes shall be taken from the grout mix

Page 11 of 12

of every micropiles for testing purpose for each day when there is grouting works, unless further tests are required due to failure in complying with the specified strength. The 3 test cubes shall be tested at 7 days and the remaining 3 cubes shall be tested at 28 days, at the Accredited Lab. If any cube which fails to attain the minimum specified strength at 28 days age, the Engineer reserves the right to reject the pile and the Contractor shall install compensating piles when ordered by the Engineer all at the contractors cost and expense. 34 Fabrication of Steel Bar Spiral reinforcement (T10) is fixed around the bars to prevent bursting of grout under load. Lantern centralizers are fixed to the bars at 3m interval to ensure sufficient grout cover to the steel bars. Steel spacers are placed at 3m interval to ensure the bars are vertically placed. Pile Dynamic Analyser (PDA) 35 Pile Integrity Test (PIT) for Micro Pile Where micro piles are included in the Works, the Contractor shall engage an independent specialist testing firm to conduct PDA and PIT on the piles. The Sonic Echo method shall be adopted. The total number of tests to be conducted shall be 2% and 5% of the total number of piles in each building block, for PDA and PIT, respectively. The testing equipment shall be capable of carrying out exponential amplification of the signal with time, if necessary, so that weak reflections from locations at or near the pile toe can be clearly displayed. The Contractor shall provide proper access for the specialists testing firm to carrying out the test. The pile shall not be tested until at least 4 days after installation and substantial by grout cube test report. During preparation, loose concrete, mud or debris, etc shall be removed from the pile head. The pile head shall be trimmed to expose sound concrete and to have flat top surface. The pile shall be tested by means of light blows from the small impact hammer. The Contractor shall ensure that the test is conducted by qualified personnel i.e. an engineer and a technician. Upon completion of the PDA & PIT, the Contractor shall furnish a preliminary report indicating the estimated pile penetration on the same day of the Pile Integrity Test to the Engineer. Two sets of the final report, to be signed by a qualified testing specialist, shall be submitted within 5 days to the Engineer. The final report, in printed form, shall include the following: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) Contract name and number Block number Pile reference number Pile diameter Date of pile installation and date of testing Graphical representation of the estimated pile shaft profile Qualitative analysis of the pile integrity which covers concrete quality, location and severity of the defect such as discontinuity or change in cross section of the pile, etc.

Page 12 of 12
CONCRETE SPECIFICATION
Contents
1 REINFORCED CONCRETE WORK .......................................................................... 5 1.1 GENERAL ......................................................................................................... 5 CEMENT .................................................................................................................... 5 AGGREGATES GENERALLY .................................................................................. 6 FINE AGGREGATE ................................................................................................... 6 COARSE AGGREGATE ............................................................................................ 6 AGGREGATE GRADING .......................................................................................... 6 SAMPLING AND TESTING OF AGGREGATES...................................................... 7 STORAGE OF AGGREGATES .................................................................................. 7 WATER ...................................................................................................................... 8 REINFORCEMENT .................................................................................................... 8 STORAGE OF REINFORCEMENT ........................................................................... 12 CONTRACTOR'S BATCHING PLANT ..................................................................... 12 READY MIXED CONCRETE .................................................................................... 12 GRADES OF CONCRETE ......................................................................................... 13 CEMENT CONTENT ................................................................................................. 14 ADMIXTURES ........................................................................................................... 15 REQUIREMENTS FOR DESIGNED MIX ................................................................. 15
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Page 2 of 32 Bored Pile Specification (11 May 2011)

18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 QUALITY CONTROL SAMPLING AND TESTING ................................................. 17 TRANSPORTING ....................................................................................................... 21 PLACING OF CONCRETE ........................................................................................ 22 PLACING CONCRETE IN WATER .......................................................................... 22 CONCRETING IN ADVERSE WEATHER................................................................ 23 CONCRETING AT NIGHT OR IN THE DARK ........................................................ 23 NO PARTIALLY SET MATERIAL TO BE USED .................................................... 23 CONCRETING IN HIGH AMBIENT TEMPERATURE ............................................ 23 COMPACTING OF CONCRETE ............................................................................... 24 CURING AND PROTECTION ................................................................................... 24 CONCRETE COVER.................................................................................................. 25 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS ........................................................................................ 25 DESIGNED JOINTS ................................................................................................... 26 BLINDING CONCRETE ............................................................................................ 26 MASS CONCRETE BACKING TO MASONRY OR BRICKWORK ......................... 27 FORMWORK.............................................................................................................. 27 33.1 General ............................................................................................................... 27 33.2 Cleaning and Treatment of Forms ........................................................................ 27 33.3 Removal of Formwork ........................................................................................ 27 FORMS FOR EXPOSED CONCRETE SURFACES................................................... 28 FORMS FOR NON-EXPOSED CONCRETE SURFACES ......................................... 28
34 35

36 37 38 39 40 41 42 SURFACE DEFECTS ................................................................................................. 28 TRIM OPENING I REINFORCED CONCRETE ........................................................ 29 FIXING AND CAVITIES IN CONCRETE ................................................................. 29 CONCRETE FINISHERS ........................................................................................... 29 SURFACE TOLERANCES ......................................................................................... 31 STRUCTURE TESTS ................................................................................................. 31 PREPARATION OF GROUND BELOW PERMANENT CONSTRUCTION............. 32
1 1.1
REINFORCED CONCRETE WORK GENERAL

(a) The reinforced concrete is to comply with the requirements of the Singapore Standard Code of Practice CP65 and British Standard Code of Practice BS 8110 "The Structural Use of Concrete". So far as is practicable or unless otherwise specified, materials shall comply with the appropriate latest Singapore Standards or British Standards where Singapore or British Standards are in conflict with this Specification, then this Specification shall take precedence. Materials used in the Works shall be of the qualities and kinds specified herein and equal to approved samples. Delivery shall be made sufficiently in advance to enable samples to be taken and tested if required. No materials shall be used until and unless approved and materials not approved shall be immediately removed from the Works at the Contractor's own expense. Materials shall be transported, handled and stored on the site or elsewhere in such a manner as to prevent damage, deterioration or contamination all to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The Engineer reserves the right to inspect any materials to be used on the Works at any time and at any place of storage. If required, the Contractor shall supply to the Engineer the appropriate certificate of compliance with the Standards. Notwithstanding the above, tests shall be carried out as and when directed by the Engineer in accordance with the relevant Singapore Standards and/or British Standards.
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
CEMENT
The cement used shall be of approved manufacture. Portland cement shall comply with the requirements of BS 12 or SS 26 and . Portland-Blast-Furnance Cement shall comply with the requirements of BS 146. Sulphate-resisting cement shall comply with BS 4027. Manufacturer's certificates of test will generally be accepted as proof of soundness, but the Engineer may require additional tests to be carried out on any cement which appears to have deteriorated through age, damage to containers, improper storage or for any other reason. The Engineer may, without tests being made, order that any bag of cement, a portion of the contents of which has hardened, or which appears to be defective in any other way, be removed from the site forthwith. No cement shall be used in the works until it has been passed as satisfactory by the Engineer. The Contractor may if the Engineer approves, elect to use types of cement other than ordinary Portland, but no extra will be paid on account of using a cement priced higher than the price for the type specified, unless work using such cement is ordered in writing by the Engineer.
Page 5 of 32
Bored Pile Specification (11 May 2011)
The cement shall be transported to the site in covered vehicles adequately protected against water. Bagged cement shall be stored in a weatherproof cement store and shall be taken for use in the works in the order of its delivery into the store. Bulk cement is to be stored in properly constructed silos. Arrangements for transport, general delivery, planning, storage and certification shall be fully informed to the Engineer before orders are placed.
AGGREGATES GENERALLY
The fine and coarse aggregates shall be naturally occurring sands, gravel or stone, crushed or uncrushed, and shall comply with the requirements of Singapore Standards (ss) 31:1971 OR BS 882 "Crushed Aggregate from Natural Sources". They shall be obtained from a source approved by the Engineer and shall be hard, strong, durable, clean and free from adherent coatings and shall not contain any harmful material in sufficient quantity to adversely affect the strength, durability or impermeability of the concrete or to attack the steel reinforcement. They shall not contain water-soluble sulphur trioxide (SO3) in excess of 0.1%.
FINE AGGREGATE
The fine aggregate shall not contain silt or other fine material exceeding 3% by weight when tested according to the standard method given in BS 812. As a guide, the fieldsettling test may be used to determine the silt content and should normally not show more than 10% silt by volume. The fine aggregate shall not contain organic material in sufficient quantity to render a mean pH value at 110oC of 12.2 or lower when tested according to the method in BS 812 Clause 32 "Organic Impurities". The Contractor shall screen all fine aggregates if required by the Engineer.
COARSE AGGREGATE
The coarse aggregate shall be granite or other hard stone from a source approved by the Engineer. The aggregate shall not contain clay exceeding 1% by weight. A representative dry sample shall not show an increase in weight exceeding 8% after immersion in water when tested as laid down in BS 812 Clauses 19 to 21. It shall be well shaped and its flakiness index shall not exceed 35. The nominal size of coarse aggregate shall be as stipulated below.
AGGREGATE GRADING
The grading of aggregate shall comply with BS 882 Clause 5 and shall be within the limits as shown in Table 1.6. The grading between the limits specified above shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer and when tested as provided for in this Section, shall approximate closely to the grading of the samples approved by him. If it should be found necessary, the fine aggregate shall be
Page 6 of 32

washed and screened to comply with the foregoing standards and the requirements of the Engineer.
SAMPLING AND TESTING OF AGGREGATES

Tests shall be carried out on samples of the latter taken at intervals as laid down in Clause 1.1.14 below or as required by the Engineer. The method of sampling and the amount of aggregate to be provided for the tests shall be in accordance with BS 812, Section One, "Sampling of Aggregates". The test shall be those laid down in BS 812, Section Two to Six, inclusive. The tests will be carried out by the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer, or his representative. Should a sample fail to comply with any of the tests, the Engineer may, at his discretion, either reject the batch from which the sample was taken, order it be washed and/or screened, or permit it to be used with variations in the proportions of the concrete mixes specified. Any batch of aggregate rejected by the Engineer shall be removed from the Works site forthwith. Samples of the fine and coarse aggregates approved by the Engineer shall be kept on site, and shall give a fair indication of the general quality of the aggregates for comparison with the aggregates delivered during the course of work.
STORAGE OF AGGREGATES
All aggregates for concrete shall be stored in bays with drainage slopes or in bins in such a manner as to prevent segregation of sizes and to avoid the inclusion of dirt. Table 1.8 BS 410:1976 Test sieve Fine Aggregate Percentage by Weight Passing BS Sieve Grading Zone 1 In 3/8 3/10 No. 7 14 No. 25 52 100 Mm 9.52 4.76 Mm 2.40 1.20 Microns 600 300 150 15-34 5-20 0-10 35-59 8-30 0-10 60-79 12-40 0-10 80-100 15-50 0-15 60-95 30-70 75-100 55-90 85-100 74-100 95-100 90-100 100 90-100 100 90-100 100 90-100 100 90-100 Grading Zone 2 Grading Zone 3 Grading Zone 4

And other foreign materials in the concrete. The storage bays shall be protected from rainfall in order to prevent excessive changes in moisture content taking place. Each size of aggregate shall be stored separately unless otherwise approved. The bottom 300mm of each stockpile shall not be used in concrete but shall be left in position throughout the contract to act as a drainage layer.
WATER
The water shall be clean and free from harmful matter and shall be from a source approved by the Engineer, such as the city's potable water supply system. The Contractor shall make adequate arrangements to deliver and store sufficient water at the works site for use in mixing and curing the concrete. Water shall comply with the requirements of the latest edition of BS 3148.
10
REINFORCEMENT
(a) Quality (i) Hot rolled Mild Steel and High Tensile Steel reinforcement must be obtained from manufacturers who have been approved in writing by the Engineer and shall comply with Singapore Standard (SS) 2 or BS 4449 with regard to strength and elasticity. Cold worked steel bars shall comply to BS 4461. Steel fabric reinforcement shall comply with SS32 or BS 4483. All reinforcement shall be hammered free from scale, scraped and wire-brushed free from all loose rust and after such treatment shall be within the margins over and under which are allowed by the abovementioned British Standard. It shall not be coated with any grease oil, paint or preservative. High tensile steel fabric when used shall comply with BS 4483. Strength of steel for concrete reinforcement shall be as given in Table 1.10.
(ii)
(iii)
(b)
Where the letter T is used in the structural detailing, it shall mean that such reinforcement shall be high tensile bars having a minimum characteristic strength of 460 N/mm2. The letter R, where used, shall indicate that such reinforcement shall be mild steel bars with a minimum characteristic strength of 250 N/mm2
(c)
Table 1.10
Strength of Reinforcement

Designation Nominal Sizes Specified Characteristic Strength, f N/mm2 All sizes 250
Mm Hot rolled mild Steel (SS 2, BS 4449:1978) Hot rolled high tensile (SS 2, BS 4449:1978) 460 Grade Cold worked high tensile (BS4461:1978) 460 Grade Hard drawn steel wire (BS 4482:1969)
All sizes
460
All sizes
460
Upto and including 12
485
(d)
Sampling and Control The Contractor shall furnish, for reinforcement supplied by him, manufacturer's certificates and these shall be submitted for acceptance by the Engineer, before any material is brought onto the site. In addition, the Contractor shall, on request, furnish the Engineer with a test sheet for any batch of bars, giving the results of each of the mechanical tests required under British Standards. In the event of any reinforcement being found to be not in accordance with the British Standards in the course of being worked, it may be rejected by the Engineer notwithstanding any previous acceptance on the strength of the test certificates and the Engineer may call for additional tests to be made at the Contractor's expense on samples taken from the batch of bars from which the faulty reinforcement came. If the samples do not satisfy the Standards requirements, then the Engineer may reject the whole batch and require its removal from the work site. The frequency of sampling and testing shall be according to the following Table 1.10 (d). Six test specimens are to be prepared from each sample. The length required for each specimen shall be 300mm. The deviation in weights and effective cross-sectional areas shall not exceed those given in BS 4449 and routine sampling shall be carried out for each nominal size used at the rate of 1 sample per 1,000 bars or part thereof.
Table 1.10(d)
Frequency of sampling and testing of reinforcement

Page 9 of 32
Diameter of bar (mm) Under 10 10 to 12 16-20 Over 22
One sample for tensile and bend tests from each 5000 bars (25 tonnes or part) 3000 bars (3 tonnes or part) 1500 bars (45 tonnes or part) 1000 bars (45 tonnes or part)
(e)
Cleaning The reinforcement shall be cleaned free from loose mill scale and loose rust before being placed in the forms and shall be free from these and from oil, grease or other harmful matter at the time when the concrete is placed
(f)
Bending The reinforcement shall be bent cold in an approved bar bending machine. The bending dimensions and tolerances and the dimensions of end anchorage, hooks, binders, stirrups, links and the links shall be in accordance with BS 4466. The minimum diameter of the former for bending shall be 4 times the bar diameter for mild steel and 6 times the bar diameter for high tensile steel.
(g)
Placing The reinforcement shall be placed in the forms and held firm against displacement, by approved types of small precast concrete fixing blocks and wire ties, in the exact position shown in the approved Construction Drawings, or, if not shown, to the Engineer's approval. Fixing blocks may be left embedded in the concrete in cases where the Engineer approves. Bars intended to be in contact when passing each other shall be securely held together at intersection points with typing wire. Binders and stirrups shall tightly embrace the longitudinal reinforcement to which they shall be securely wired or spot welded. The wire ties shall be No. 20 S.W.G. soft annealed iron wire; the ends shall be turned in from the face of the framework and shall not be left projecting beyond the reinforcing bars. The reinforcement shall be inspected and passed by the Engineer or his representative before concrete is placed in the forms. The required amount of cover over the reinforcement shall be obtained when the reinforcement is placed and shall be held to this during concreting. The following tolerances in Tables 1.10(g) are generally applicable for reinforcement steel in place:
Page 10 of 32
Table 1.10(g)
Tolerances for reinforcement steel in place Item Size Cover 10.1.1.1 Allowable Tolerance Nil +5mm, -2mm +5mm +50mm +15mm Nil;
Height, effective Position of hook Spacing Number bars
Reinforcement wrongly placed shall be re-fixed or replaced to the satisfaction of the Engineer. (h) Laps shall be as shown in the Drawings. Where not indicated, laps shall be as listed in Table 1.10(h). Lap length of reinforcement bars Lap length in number of bar diameter Grade of Concrete Mile steel reinforcement Bars with UHooks 30 or better 25 35 Bars without UHooks 50 High tensil steel reinforcement Bars with UHooks 37 Bars without UHooks 52
Table 1.10(h)
39
55
40
57
Fabric reinforcement sheets are to overlap by 300mm. (i) Welding Welding of mild reinforcement by electric arc may be permitted by the Engineer under suitable conditions and with suitable safeguards. Welding shall be carried out in accordance with BS 5135 "Metal Arc Welding of Carbon and Carbon Manganese Steels". Butt welds shall be of double V type and two butt weld bend tests shall be carried out on a specimen prepared to represent each form of butt welded joint used in the welding. The method of making butt weld test shall be that laid down in BS 709. The specimen shall

pass the tests to the satisfaction of the Engineer before approval is accorded to use the joint, which the specimen represents. Tack welds between reinforcing bars, used merely to fix them in position, shall not be subject to tests.
11
STORAGE OF REINFORCEMENT
The reinforcement shall be stacked tidily in a manner that permits its inspection.
12
CONTRACTOR'S BATCHING PLANT

The Contractor's batching and mixing plant shall be subject to approval by the Engineer and he should therefore submit his proposal for it to the Engineer prior to its erection and use.
13
READY MIXED CONCRETE

Ready mixed concrete shall be used for this project. The Contractor shall furnish the name of his ready mixed concrete Supplier to the Engineer for approval. He shall make such arrangements as may be required for the Engineer to inspect his Supplier's works and provide all facilities for samples of cement, fine and coarse aggregates and admixtures to be selected for testing by an approved SISIR accredited laboratory. Notwithstanding any such inspection having been made and/or approval given by the Engineer, the Contractor shall take full responsibility for ensuring that all ready mixed concrete supplied shall conform to SS 119 : 1975 or BS 5328 : 1981 and this entire specification. Concrete that does not comply with this entire Specification shall be rejected and removed from Site by the Contract at his own expense. The Contractor shall furnish to and obtain the approval of the Engineer at least one day in advance of the date set for each casting of concrete, the number of transit trucks/truck agitators to be used to supply the concrete and the frequency at which the loads of concrete are to be delivered to the Site. For each truck load of concrete delivered, the following information shall appear on the delivery docket: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) Name of ready mixed concrete batch plant Serial number of docket Date and the licensed number of the truck Name of the purchaser Name of location of job Specified characteristic concrete strength and the amount of cement used (kg) or the mix proportions Quantity of concrete Time of loading or of first mixing of cement and aggregates, whichever is earlier Agreed slump Maximum size of coarse aggregates specified
Page 12 of 32

(11) (12) (13) (14) (15) Trade name of admixture, if any The signature of the Supervisor who shall also enter the time of arrival of the truck and the time of completion of discharge Position where concrete is placed Number of cubes taken if any, and cube reference Any other requirements as may be instructed
One copy of the docket shall be given to the Engineer on delivery. The Engineer reserves the right to instruct the Contractor to change the Supplier in view of unsatisfactory performance or to rescind his approval for further use of ready mixed concrete during the progress of the Works if any of the requirements of this Specification has, in his opinion, not been satisfactorily complied with. No water in excess of the quantity required in the approved mix shall be allowed to be added to the concrete to increase its workability affected by elapsed time and/or temperature. While it is not being discharged, the concrete in a transit trucks/ truck mixer/truck agitator shall be kept continuously agitated. The concrete shall be placed in its final position and left undisturbed within two hours from the time when the cement was added to the mix. Deviations from this time interval may be permitted by the Engineer subject to trial mixes carried out.
14
GRADES OF CONCRETE
The grades of concrete to be used in the Works shall be shown in the Drawings. For each grade of concrete the mix shall be designed so that, when tested in accordance with this Specification the minimum works cube strength and the minimum and maximum cement contents shall be as set out in Table 1.14. Attention is drawn to the fact that the specified strength given in Table 1.14 is minimum strengths. Whilst it is appreciated that the Contractor may use statistical methods, value of sets of 28 day works cube test shall not be considered satisfactory if the requirements of this Specification are not met. Preliminary trial mixes of each of the classes of concrete to be used in the Works shall be made by the Contractor to ensure that, the mix as designed will comply with the strength and other requirements of this Specification. Trial mixes shall be carried out at such a time so that final mixes to be used shall be agreed well in advance of requirements. For each grade of concrete, a set of 8 cubes shall be made from each of 3 consecutive batches. Four cubes from each set of 8 cubes shall be tested at 7 days and the remainder at 28 days. Cubes shall be made, cured, stored and tested all in accordance with SS 78 : 1972. Preliminary cube strength tests results shall exceed the minimum strength requirements of Tables 1.14 by not less that 33%.
Page 13 of 32
Table 1.14
Grades of Concrete 50 7 days 40 45 35 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 15 11 -
Grade of Concrete Minimum works cube crushing strength, N/mm Minimum works cube crushing strength, N/mm2
30 26 23 19
28 days
50
45
40 35
30
25
20
15
Minimum recommended cement content in kg/m3 of fully compacted concrete Maximum cement content in kg/m3 of fully compacted concrete Maximum water/cement ratio
440 425 415 410 405 360 325 290 250
550 550 550 550 550 550 550 550 550 0.40 0.40 0.45 0.45 0.45 0.50 0.55 0.55 0.65
In order to satisfy the Engineer that the workability of the proposed mixes is such that the concrete can be readily worked into corners, recesses and around all reinforcement without segregation or "bleeding", the Contractor shall carry out a series of workability tests on the preliminary trial mixes in accordance with SS 78 : 1982. No concrete shall be placed until the Supplier has received the Engineer's approval for the mix proportions. The Contractor shall not vary the approved mixed proportions, size or grading of aggregates nor alter the sources of supply of materials without the prior approval of the Engineer. Alterations to mixes already approved by the Engineer shall be subjected to further trial mixing as specified. The Engineer may order alterations to mix proportions should works cube test results indicate that such changes are necessary in order to comply with specified strength and workability requirements. No additional payment shall be made in respect of such variations to mixes whether ordered by the Engineer or requested by the Contractor himself.
15
CEMENT CONTENT
For ordinary reinforced concrete, the cement content for water retaining structures and structures in contact with water/ground, shall not be less than 400 kg/m3 unless written approval is obtained.
ECAS-EJ CONSULTANTS PTE LTD 16 ADMIXTURES

All admixtures shall comply with BS 5075 Parts 1 and 3. (a) No admixtures will be permitted without written permission and in no circumstances will chloride admixtures be allowed. In the event of permission being granted in principle the tests described in the Specification shall be carried out with the intended proportion of admixture incorporated and comparison shall be made with concrete manufactured without the admixtures to prove that the density has not been reduced below 2320kg/m3. When admixtures are used on the Works, very strict control is to be maintained to ensure that the correct quantity of admixture is used at all times. Admixture containing chloride shall not be used.
(b)
17
(a)
REQUIREMENTS FOR DESIGNED MIX

The Contractor shall submit details of his mix design to the Engineer for his provisional approval. Details submitted shall include : (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) the type and source of cement the type and source of aggregate the grading details, in tabular and graphical form, of the fine and coarse aggregates the grading details, in tabular and graphical form, of the combined aggregates, together with details of the proportions in which the fine and coarse aggregates are to be combined the aggregate-cement ratio by weight the water-cement ration by weight the workability in terms of both slump and compacting factor having due regard to the final location and dimensions of the concrete
(v) (vi) (vii)
(viii) the target mean strength and the current margin. (b) The concrete mix shall be designed to have at least the required minimum cement content and to have a mean strength greater than the required characteristic strength by at least the current margin. The current margin for each particular type of concrete mix shall be taken as having the smaller of the values given by (i) or (ii). (i) 1.64 times the standard deviation of cube tests on at least 100 separate batches of concrete of nominally similar proportions of similar material and produced over a period exceeding 5 days but not exceeding 6 months by the same plant under
(c)

similar supervision, but not less than 1/3 of the characteristic strength for concrete grade 10 or 15, or 7.5 N/mm2 for concrete of grade 20 and above. (ii) 1.64 times the standard deviation of cube tests on at least 40 separate batches of concrete of nominally similar proportions of similar materials and produced over a period exceeding 5 days but not exceeding 6 months by the same plant under similar supervision, but not less than 1/3 of the characteristic strength for concrete grade 10 or 15, or 7.5 N/mm2 for concrete of grade 20 and above.
(d)
When there are insufficient data to satisfy (i) or (ii) above, the margin for the initial mix design shall be taken as 2/3 of the characteristic strength for concrete of grade 10 or 15, or 15 N/mm2 for current margin only until sufficient data are available to satisfy (i) or (ii) above. However, when the required characteristic strength approaches the maximum possible strength of concrete made with a particular aggregate, a smaller margin but not less than 7.5 N/mm2 shall be permitted for the initial mix design subject to the prior approval of the Engineer. Evidence shall be submitted to the Engineer for each grade of concrete showing that at the intended workability, the proposed mix proportions and manufacturing method will produce concrete of the required quality. Three separate batches of concrete shall be made for trial mixes using materials from the proposed supply and under full scale production conditions. Sampling and testing shall be in accordance with BS 1881. The workability of each of the trial batches shall be determined and four cubes made from each batch for test at 28 days. A further four cubes from each batch shall be made for each test at 3 days and 7 days. The trial mix proportions are adequate if the average strength of the 12 cubes testes at 28 days exceeds the specified characteristic strength by the current margin minus 3.5 N/mm2 or if twelve tests at an earlier age indicate that it is likely to be exceeded by this amount. Trial mixes will be required to demonstrate that the maximum free water/cement ratio is not exceeded. Two batches shall be made in laboratory with cement and surface dry aggregates known, from past records of the suppliers of the material, to be typical. The proposed mix proportions shall not be accepted unless both batches have the correct cement content and a free/water cement ratio below the maximum specified value at the proposed degree of workability. For this purpose, existing laboratory tests reports may be accepted instead of trial mixes only if the Engineer is satisfied that the materials to be used in the structural concrete are likely to be similar to those used in the tests. During production, the Engineer may require trial mixes to be made before a substantial change is made in the materials or in the proportions of the materials to be used. During production, adjustments of mix proportions can be made, in order to maximize the variability of strength to approach more closely the target mean strength, provided the express approval of the Engineer is obtained. Such adjustments are regarded as part of the proper control of production but the specified limits of minimum cement content and maximum water/ cement ratio shall be maintained. Changes in cement content shall have to
Page 16 of 32
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(j)
(k)

be declared. Such adjustments to mix proportions shall not be taken to imply any changes to the current margin. (l) A change in the current margin used for judging compliance with the specified characteristic strength will become appropriate when the results of a sufficiently large number of tests show that the previously established margin is significantly too large or too small. Recalculation of the margin should be carried out in accordance with sub-clause (c) but, although a recalculated margin is almost certain to differ numerically from the previous value, the adoption of the recalculated value would not generally be justified if the two values differ by less than 18 per cents when based on tests on 40 separate batches; or less than 11 per cent when based on tests on 100 separate batches; or less than 5 per cent when based on tests on 500 separate batches.
18
QUALITY CONTROL SAMPLING AND TESTING

(a) Initial sampling and testing of cement, aggregates, water, plant and concrete trial mixes shall be conducted as stated above. Routine quality control tests shall subsequently be conducted throughout the whole period of this Contract by the Contractor for all concrete works. A record of these tests shall be kept on the works, identifying particular portions of concrete in the works with the respective samples and tests made. Copies of all test records shall be submitted to the Engineer promptly on completion of each respective test. The test shall be carried out for the following items in Table 1.18(b).
(b)
Table 1.18(b) Routine quality control tests Item Aggregates 18.1.1.1.1 Tests Field silt test for sand Remarks

Surface moisture of coarse aggregate As directed by the Engineer after rain. Adjustment of mixing water is necessary for any change. Twice a day. For any change adjust the quality of water. For first batch of each placement, and twice more per day during mixing. Value should be within +25mm of required slump See sub-clause ( c ) below See sub-clause ( c ) below To be sampled if and when directed. Make 3 specimens from each sample. Daily check for accuracy required before use. Limit of tolerance to be +2%
Surface moisture of fine aggregate Concrete Slump tests or Compacting Factor test on fresh concrete.
Cubes for compressive strength Minimum cement content Specimens for flexural strength, and core tests Plant Inspection of gauges
(c)
Compressive Strength Tests on Concrete (i) Concrete strength will be based on tests on cubes at 28 days age. The practical advantages of testing at 3 or 7 days or by use of accelerated curing methods are recognised and where carried out, may be allowed to assist the Engineer and the Contractor in interim acceptance of the concrete quality. Final acceptance, however, will be based on the 28-day tests. The characteristic strength is defined as the 28-day strength below which 5% of the tests fail.
(ii)
(iii) The concrete quality control system adopted is a statistical one depending on the standard deviation, s, of the 28-day cube test results where
(x-m)2 n-1 = an individual result = number of results

Page 18 of 32
and x n

m = mean of n results (iv) The concrete shall be sampled according to one of the rates specified in Table 1.18 (c) below as selected by the Engineer who will be expected to choose a rate applicable to the degree of control of workmanship and material quality exercised by the Contractor as well as the nature of the work. Ordinarily, Rate 1 is applicable to highly stressed and to critical members such as columns, transfer beams and cantilevered beams, Rate 2 to ordinary work and Rate 3 is for mass concrete work. Table 1.18 (c) Rate of Sampling Rate 1 Volume of Concrete per Per Sample 5m3 or 5 batches batches Rate 2 10m3 Or 10 batches batches Rate 3 20m3 or 20 batches batches
Whichever is the lesser volume
(v)
Two cubes shall be made from each randomly selected sample under Rate 1. A single cube shall be made from each randomly selected sample under Rates 2 and 3. All the concrete in any one sample shall be taken from a single batch. Sampling shall be taken at the point of discharge of the mixer, or in the case of ready-mixed concrete, at the point of discharge from the delivery truck.
(vi) The concrete complies with the specification if: A. The average strength of any group of 4 consecutive test cubes exceeds the characteristic strength by half the current margin (See Tables 1.18 (vi) A-1 and 1.18 (vi) A-2 below). Each individual test result is greater than 85% of the specified characteristic strength.
B.
or C. For small projects, the acceptance criteria is based on a group of four (4) concrete cubes. C.1 Each of the four (4) cubes in a group has a strength not less than the specified characteristic strength
or

C.2 Not more than one cube has a test strength less than the specified characteristic strength but not less than 85% of the specified characteristic strength, and the average strength of the group is not less than the specified characteristic strength plus the standard deviation of the group.
Table 1.18 (vi) A-1 Initial current margin and required minimum cube strength less than 40 batches and 6 days production. 18.1.1.2 Grade 18.1.1.2.1.1 N/mm2 Characteristic Half the Required Strength Current Minimum Margin Value Of N/mm2 Mean of 4 cubes N/mm2 2.3 3.3 5.0 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 9.3 13.3 20.0 27.5 32.5 37.5 42.5 27.5
7 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
7 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
Table 1.18 (vi) A-1 Current margin and required minimum cube strength for more than 40 batches (Produced between 5 days to 6 months) Grade Characteristic strength, C N/mm2 Half current margin N/mm2 Required average value of 4 cubes = C+C N/mm2
C 7 10 15 20 25 30 35 7 10 15 20 25 30 35 0.82S 0.82S 0.82S 0.82S 0.82S 0.82S 0.82S

Minimum value of C 1.17 1.67 2.50 3.75 3.75 3.75 3.75
7 + 0.82S,or 8.17 10 + 0.82S,or 11.67 15 + 0.82S,or 17.50 20 + 0.82S,or 23.75 25 + 0.82S,or 28.75 30 + 0.82S,or 33.75 35 + 0.82S,or 38.75
40 40 0.82S 3.75 40 + 0.82S, or 43.75 * The greater of the two alternative figures given for each grade shall be the minimum required strength value. (vii) The minimum value of C' given in Table 1.18 (vi) A-1 may be further reduced to half by the Engineer if warranted by the results of more than 100 consecutive batches of concrete. The required minimum values given by Table 1.18 (vi) A-2 shall be considered an interim result pending the subsequent production up to 40 batches and 6 days production time. If more than one cube in a group fails to meet the second requirement or if the average strength of any group of four consecutive test cubes fails to meet the first requirement, then all the concrete in all the batches represented by all such cubes shall be deemed not to comply with the strength requirements. For the purpose of this sub-clause the batches of concrete represented by a group of four consecutive test cubes shall include the batches from which samples were taken to make the first and the last cubes in the group of four together with all the intervening batches. If only one cube result fails to meet the second requirement, then that result may be considered to represent only the particular batch of concrete from which that cube was taken provided the average strength of the group satisfies the first requirement. In the event of non-compliance with the testing plan, the Engineer may order the Contractor to carry out tests on the hardened concrete in the structure. These may include non-destructive methods or the taking of cored samples. Non-destructive loading tests shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of BS 8110 and CP65 Alternatively, if the structure or part of the structure fails to fulfil any requirements of the test, the Engineer may order replacement of the sub-standard concrete or any other action he deems necessary. The entire cost of testing and any remedial action shall be borne by the Contractor.
(viii)
(ix)
(x)
(xi)
19
TRANSPORTING
The concrete shall be transported from the mixer to the place of deposit in the works as rapidly as practicable and by means which will prevent segregation of the material or loss or contamination of ingredients. It shall be deposited as near as practicable in its final position to avoid rehandling or flowing. The concrete shall be conveyed by such vertical or inclined chutes that meet with the approval of the Engineer.
ECAS-EJ CONSULTANTS PTE LTD 20 PLACING OF CONCRETE

(a) The concrete shall be placed in the positions and sequences indicated on the Drawings, in the Specification or as directed by the Engineer. Except where otherwise directed, concrete shall not be placed unless the Engineer is present and has previously examined and approved the positioning, fixing and condition of reinforcement and any other items to be embedded and the cleanliness, alignment and suitability of the containing surfaces of formwork. The maximum horizontal length of wall or floor in any one direction that shall be poured in one operation is 7.50 metres. The construction of walls and floor bays shall be carried out consecutively with a period of 7 days allowed between adjacent pours except where waterstops are provided when this period can be reduced. Alternatively, a gap of 600 mm wide shall be left between adjacent pours and filled not earlier than 12 days after formation. Where kickers are required, they shall be at least 100 mm high and they shall be constructed at the same time as the concrete on which they sit. The concrete shall be deposited as nearly as possible in its final position without rehandling or segregation and in such a manner as to avoid displacement of the reinforcement, other embedded items or formwork. Wherever possible, bottom opening skips shall be used. Where chutes are used to convey the concrete, their slopes shall not be such as to cause segregation and suitable spouts or baffles shall be provided where necessary. Concrete shall not be dropped through a greater height than 2 metres except with the approval of the Engineer who may order the use of bankers and the turning over of the deposited concrete by hand before being placed. Where pneumatic placers are used, the velocity of discharge shall be regulated by suitable baffles or hoppers where necessary to prevent segregation, or damage and distortion of the reinforcement, embedded items and formwork, caused by impact. Concreting shall be carried out continuously between and up to predetermined construction joints specified below in one sequence of operation. In the case of slabs or beams designed to be monolithic with walls or columns, at least one day lapse shall be allowed after casting of the wall or column to allow for initial shrinkage before casting the beam or slab. The surface of the concrete shall be maintained reasonably level during placing. A record shall be kept on the Works site of the time and date placing the concrete in each portion of the structure, and the reference numbers of the test cubes pertaining to batches of concrete in particular parts of the structure.
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h) (j)
21
PLACING CONCRETE IN WATER

The placing of concrete under water will not be permitted except where agreed by the Engineer to be necessary. In placing concrete under water, it shall not be dropped into the water but shall be carefully placed in position by enclosing it in bags, or by means of bottom dumping bucket or tremie, or by continuous discharge through pipes leading from the mixer. Whichever method is proposed to use, full details shall first be submitted to the Engineer for his approval. The surface of the concrete deposited under water shall be kept as nearly as possible horizontal and no concrete shall be placed in running water or in water liable to disturbance by pumping. Placing shall be such as to require the minimum amount of spreading. Tamping to such an extent that segregation takes place shall be avoided. Sufficient time shall be allowed for the concrete to set before it is subjected to any form of loading and also to ensure that it shall suffer no damage from subsequent pumping or de-watering operations.
22
CONCRETING IN ADVERSE WEATHER

No concreting will be allowed to take place in the open during storms or heavy rains. In places where such conditions are likely to occur, the Contractor is to arrange for adequate protection of the materials, plant and formwork so that the work may proceed under proper cover. Where strong winds are likely to be experienced, additional precautions to ensure protection from driving rain and dust shall also be taken. The Engineer may withhold approval of commencement of concreting until he is satisfied that full and adequate arrangements have been made.
23
CONCRETING AT NIGHT OR IN THE DARK

Where approval has been given to carry out concreting operations at night or in places where daylight is excluded, the Contractor is to provide adequate lighting at all points where mixing, transportation and placing of concrete are in progress.
24
NO PARTIALLY SET MATERIAL TO BE USED

All concrete and mortar must be placed and compacted within 20 minutes of its being mixed. Unless otherwise approved, no partially set material shall be used in the work. Where truck-mixed concrete is used, water shall be added under supervision either at the site or at the central batching plant as directed but, in no circumstances shall water be added in transit.
25
CONCRETING IN HIGH AMBIENT TEMPERATURE

(a) In hot weather and in places where the ambient shade temperature exceeds 32o, the Contractor shall take measures in the mixing, placing and curing of concrete. These shall be such as to ensure that the temperature of the mixed concrete at the time of placing shall include the shading of aggregates, water
Page 23 of 32

supply tanks and pipelines, from the direct rays of the sun, the spraying of aggregates with water, cooling of the mix constituents, machinery reinforcement and moulds and the reduction of transportation time to the minimum. (b) During placing, suitable means shall be provided to prevent premature stiffening of the concrete placed in contact with hot surfaces. All concreting areas, formwork and reinforcement shall be shielded from the direct rays of the sun and sprayed with water when necessary.
26
COMPACTING OF CONCRETE
(a) The concrete shall be fully compacted throughout the full extent of the layer and shall be brought up in level layers of such depth that each layer can be easily incorporated with the layer below with the use of internal vibrators or by ramming. It shall be thoroughly worked against formwork and around any reinforcement or embedded items without displacing them. Except where otherwise permitted by the Engineer, concrete shall, during placing, be compacted by immersion vibrators having a frequency of at least 8,000cycles/minute and of a type to be approved by the Engineer, The vibrators shall be suitable for continuous operation. The vibrators shall be disposed in such a manner that the whole of the mass under treatment shall be adequately compacted at a speed commensurate with the supply of concrete from the mixers. They shall be operated by workmen skilled in their use who shall be additional to the labourers employed on placing and tamping the concrete. The internal vibrators shall be inserted and withdrawn slowly and at a uniform pace of approximately 100mm per second. Compaction shall be deemed to be completed when cement mortar appears in a circle around the vibrator; over-vibration, leading to segregation of the mix must be avoided. The internal vibrators shall be inserted at points judged by the areas of mortar showing after compaction, with a certain allowance made for over-lapping, and the shall not allowed to come into contact with the formwork of the reinforcement and shall be inserted at a distance of 75mm from the former. The pan vibrators shall be placed on the surface of the concrete, which shall have previously been tamped and levelled, leaving the allowance in height for the compaction, until cement mortar appears under the pan. The vibrator shall then be lifted and placed on the adjoining surface and these operations shall be repeated until the whole surface has been compacted. Alternatively, a vibrating screed spanning the full width of the surface may also be used. Vibration is not to be applied directly, or through the reinforcement, to sections or masses of concrete, which have hardened or after the initial set has taken place. Vibration must not be used to make the concrete flow in the formwork so as to cause segregation.
(b)
(c)
27
CURING AND PROTECTION

(a) Concrete shall be protected during the first stage of hardening from the harmful effects of sunshine, drying winds, rain, running water or anything likely to interfere with the process of setting. The protection shall be applied as soon as practicable after completion of placing by covering the concrete surface with a layer of sacking, canvas, hessian, straw mats or similar absorbent material or a layer of sand, kept constantly moist by spraying with water as necessary for 7 days or such periods as may be directed by the Engineer. Other methods of preventing the water of hydration in the concrete from evaporating may be used if approved by the Engineer. In the case of floor surfaces, the hessian shall not be applied until the concrete is hard enough to resist marking. Where formwork cannot be removed within 12 hours of placing, the concrete shall be kept shaded from the direct rays of the sun and shall, where necessary, be sprayed with water to minimise the loss of moisture from the concrete. All work shall be protected from damage by shock or overload, including falling earth and construction loads not computed for.
(b)
(c)
28
CONCRETE COVER
Concrete cover to members shall be provided as indicated on the drawing. Where not stated, concrete cover to main reinforcement shall not be less than that indicated in Table 1.28:
Table 1.28
Concrete Cover Concrete cover to main reinforcement 25mm or diameter of bars, whichever is greater 40mm 35mm 35mm or diameter of bars, whichever is greater 45mm 50mm
Structural member Solid slabs (above ground) Main columns Suspended ground floor slabs Beams and ribs (above ground) Ground beams Pile caps
The vertical distance between two horizontal main steel reinforcement bars or the corresponding distance at right angles to two inclined main steel reinforcement, shall not be less than 50mm. This vertical distance shall be maintained by the use of spacer bars placed between the reinforcement.
29
(a)
CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
The Contractor shall submit details of his proposals for construction joints and concreting programme to the Engineer for approval. The Contractor is to allow for working beyond
Page 25 of 32

the ordinary working hours where necessary in order that each section of concrete may be completed without any lapse while the work is in hand. (b) The number of construction joints should be kept as few as possible consistent with reasonable precautions against shrinkage. All construction joints are to be formed square to work. Keyways are to be formed in all horizontal and vertical construction joints except where ordered to be omitted by the Engineer. Where work is resumed on a surface which has set, the whole surface shall be thoroughly roughened or scabbled tools so that no smooth skin of concrete that may be left from the previous work is visible. These roughened surfaces shall thoroughly clean by compressed air and water jets or other approved means and brushed and watered immediately before depositing concrete. If so ordered, roughened surface shall be covered with cement mortar (1:2 mix) prior to placing the new concrete.
(c)
(d)
30
(a)
DESIGNED JOINTS
Contraction joints, where specified, shall be formed as deliberate planes of discontinuity in the concrete structure. Expansion joints shall be formed in the same way as contraction joints but in addition, "flexcell" compressible filler as manufactured by Fosroc Expandite Pte Ltd or similar approved shall be supplied and placed in the joints to provide freedom for two adjacent concrete slabs or blocks to expand. The exposed edges of the joints shall be sealed with an approved polysulphide rubber sealing compound to BS 4245. Whereas designed joint occurs in water retaining structure, or where otherwise ordered, the joint shall be made watertight by the provision of a continuous waterstop strip of copper, rubber or plastic (such as Poly-Vinyl-chloride, P.V.C.) as specified, fixed across the joint where shown on the drawing. Special care shall be taken to ensure that the concrete is well worked against the embedded parts of the strip and is free from honeycombing. Precautions are to be taken to protect any projecting portions of the strips from damaging during the progress of the works and in the case of rubber and plastic, from light and heat. In the case of copper waterstop where direct bituminous painting shall be applied to the lips of the loop shall be fitted with a bituminous compound, these applications shall be made before the strip is buried in the concrete.
(b)
(c)
(d)
31
BLINDING CONCRETE
Several days before concrete is to be deposited on a foundation on the ground, a blinding of concrete grade 15 of 75mm minimum thickness, shall be placed over the ground below the underside level of the reinforced concrete to form a hard even

surface on which to concrete the latter. Where other details are indicated in the Drawings, this Clause shall not apply.
32
MASS CONCRETE BACKING TO MASONRY OR BRICKWORK

Mass concrete backing to masonry of brick facing shall be mixed slightly wetter than mixed for placing against timber forms. Before any concrete is placed, the mortar joints in the facework shall have thoroughly hardened, and the back of the facing must be thoroughly wetted. The concrete shall be carefully tamped round any ties or bond stones, and mortar from the concrete shall be carefully worked into the open joints in the back of facework.
33 33.1
FORMWORK General
The formwork shall be constructed of sound, well-seasoned timber or other approved material of such quality and strength as will ensure complete rigidity throughout the placing, ramming, vibration and setting of the concrete. It shall be sufficiently tight to prevent loss of liquid from the concrete. Where formwork is not provided with special lining as specified in Clause (b) below, the faces in contact with concrete shall be planed smooth, true to alignment and free from surface imperfections and the joints between boards shall be tongued and grooved or caulked with tight fitting fillets recessed into adjacent boards and covering the joints. Internal ties or struts shall be of metal and capable of removal without injury to the concrete. No part of any metal tie or spacer remaining permanently embedded in the concrete shall be nearer that 50mm to finished surface of the concrete. Constructi9on details shall be arranged to permit easy removal, and wedges and bolts shall be employed whenever possible in preference to nails.
33.2
Cleaning and Treatment of Forms

Before concrete is deposited, the forms shall be thoroughly cleaned and from sawdust shavings, dust, mud or other debris by hosing with clean water. Temporary opening shall be provided in the forms to drain away the water and rubbish. Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, the inside surface of forms shall, before placing of the reinforcement, be coated with an approved mould oil or other release agent, care being taken at all times thereafter to keep the reinforcement free any such material. There shall be no excess material in the form prior to concreting. All formwork shall be inspected by the Engineer after preparation and immediately prior to depositing concrete and no concrete shall be deposited until approval of the formwork has be obtained from the Engineer.
33.3
Removal of Formwork

Formwork shall be removed without such shock or vibration as would damage the concrete. The minimum striking times shall be as listed in Table 1.33(c) below. The times are given in days, where a day is to be of 24 hours duration. Table 1.33 (c) Locations Minimum Striking Times Minimum Striking Times Ordinary Portland Cement Concrete (days) 5 3 1 6 10 21 3
slabs soffits (structural props left in) Beam sides (greater than 1200mm lift) (less than 1200 mm lift) Beam soffits (structural props left in) Slab structural props Beam structural props Column and walls (unloaded)
The foregoing Table is given as a guide for ordinary Portland Cement. The Engineer may at his adjustment alter the above times if he considers such adjustment to be necessary.
34
FORMS FOR EXPOSED CONCRETE SURFACES

Forms for all permanently visible concrete surfaces shall be such as to ensure that surface is of the correct shape, line and dimension. Where rough formwork is specified, no surface irregularities greater than 10mm shall be allowed and, in the case of reinforced concrete, the full cover to steel shall be maintained. Where wrought formwork is specified, the forms shall be such as to produce a smooth and even surface free perceptible irregularities, and tongued and grooved; planed boards or plywood or steel forms shall have their joints flush with surface. The full cover to reinforcement steel shall be maintained. The Contractor shall make due allowance for the renewal and/or repair of shuttering for which more than one use is intended.
35
FORMS FOR NON-EXPOSED CONCRETE SURFACES

Where the finished surface of concrete is not to be permanently exposed, the forms may be constructed of plain, butt-jointed sawn timber unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. In mass concrete, surface irregularities may be permitted nut in reinforcement shall be maintained at all points.
36
SURFACE DEFECTS
Page 28 of 32

As soon as the formwork has been removed, but after inspection by the Engineer, honey-combing or small holes in faces be filled with cement mortar composed of equal parts of Portland Cement and sand. However, if in the Engineer's opinion, any defects cannot be made good by touching up, he may order the replacement of the work, which will be at the contractor's own cost.
37
TRIM OPENING I REINFORCED CONCRETE

All necessary openings for pipes, fittings outlets, etc., shall be formed and trimmed in high tensile bars to approval.
38
FIXING AND CAVITIES IN CONCRETE

The Contractor shall ascertain from the drawings or from sub-Contractors or from elsewhere, particulars of all bolt and other fixings, and of all openings, holes, pockets, chases, recesses and other cavities so that before the placing of the concrete, all bolts, boxes and fixings shall be inplace. No holes shall be cut after the concrete has been placed without express authorisation from the Engineer.
39
(a)
CONCRETE FINISHERS
General The faces of concrete work shall have the finished indicated on the Drawings or in the Bills of Quantities, if these are provided. The Finished surface of all concrete work shall be sound, solid and free from honeycombing, protuberances and blemishes. No plastering of imperfect concrete will be allowed and any concrete that is defective in any way is to be cut and replaced to such depths and be made good in such manner as the Engineer may direct at the Contractors own expenses. The cavities left by formwork fixing devices are to be made good by completely filling the hole with mortar, which shall be such as to dry out with the same colour as the adjacent concrete.
(b)
Fine Finish When a fine finish is specified, the surface of the concrete shall, immediately following the removal of the forms, be wire brushed to remove any surface imperfections or irregularities. It shall then be well brushed with water and rubbed down to a smooth finish by means of a carborundum block. Where directed, the rubbing down shall be preceded by the application of a Portland Cement wash and the surface thus treated shall be carefully protected from rapid drying out by suitable means.
(c)
Concrete Surfaces Without Formwork (i) Where, on an upward facing horizontal or near horizontal surface which does not require formwork, no particular finish is called for, the surface shall be that produced by the proper placing and compaction operations without further labours.

(ii) Where a fair surface is specified, it shall be obtained by screeding. This shall be done immediately after compaction of the concrete, by the slicing and tamping action of a screed board running at the top edges of the formwork, or on accurately set screeding guides, to give a dense concrete skin, true to line and level. Where a fine surface is specified, it shall be obtained by first screeding the concrete as described in the preceding sub-clause then leaving it until the concrete has stiffened and the firm moisture has disappeared. Floating shall then be applied with a steel or wooden float to produce a glossy surface or a sand paper surface as required. Working should be kept to a minimum compatible with a good finish. The surface shall be true to the required profile to fine tolerance. Wherever necessary, a properly constructed overhead cover shall be erected before the work is commenced to prevent the finished surface from being marked by raindrops or dripping water.
(iii)
(d)
Workmen The finish to the exposed concrete surfaces shall only be carried out by skilled workmen experienced in this class of work. The engineer may order the removal of any workman whom he may consider insufficiently experienced or skilled for this class of work and require the substitution with workmen of the required standard.
(e)
Wire Brushed Finish Immediately after removal of the forms the surface of the concrete shall be well scrubbed down by means of stiff wire brushed and water to remove the cement from the surface and expose the aggregate.
(f)
Bush hammered Finish Not less than 3 weeks (for Ordinary Portland Cement concrete) after the concrete has been placed the exposed surface shall be bush-hammered to remove the cement from the surface and expose the aggregate. Bush hammers shall be of an approved type, and they shall be worked to within 12mm of all corners and arises, the treatment of the remaining 12mm borders being hand finished similar to that of the adjoining bushhammering. Bush hammers shall be kept perpendicular to the surface being worked and care shall be taken to ensure that only the surface mortar and the irregular projections of the aggregate are removed without any fracturing or loosening of the portions left embedded. As the bush-hammering is completed, the surface so treated shall be washed with water and scrubbed down with a stiff brush. All finished surfaces shall be of an even and uniform appearance with the exposed aggregate clean and free from film.
(g)
Specimen Panels of Concrete Where required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall construct and treat specimen panels of concrete to the required finish, in order to satisfy the Engineer as to the suitably and efficiency of the proposed method of treatment.
Page 30 of 32
40
SURFACE TOLERANCES
The acceptable tolerance on concrete surfaces measured in millimetres shall be as listed in Table 1.40
Table 1.40 Type of Structure
Acceptable tolerance on concrete surfaces. Type of Irregularity Sawn Formwork Faced Formwork Tamped Formwork Float Formwork
Buried concrete
Departure in alignment and grade Variations in cross sectional dimensions Deviation from alignment checked against a 3m straight edge
+50 10
---
10
---
+10 5
---
+10 5
---
10
---
10
---
Exposed concrete and internal surfaces of sewer culverts
Departure in alignment and grade Variations in cross sectional dimensions Deviation from alignment checked against a 3m straight edge
---
10
10
---
+10 5
---
+10 5
---
41
a)
STRUCTURE TESTS
The Engineer shall instruct the Contractor to make a loading test on the works or any part thereof if in the Engineers opinion, such a test is necessary. If the test so instructed to be made solely or in part for the reason that the site-made concrete cubes fail to attain the specified strength, the test shall be made at the Contractors own expenses. If the test so instructed to be made because of one or more circumstances attributable to alleged negligence on the part of the Contractor shall be reimbursed for the cost of the test if the result thereof is satisfactory. If the test be instructed to be made for any reason other than the foregoing, the Contractor shall
b)

make the test and shall be reimbursed for all costs relating thereto, irrespective of the result of the test. c) For the purpose of testing floors, roofs and similar structures and their supports, the test load shall be equivalent to one-and a quarter times the live load for which the Works or part thereof to be tested has been designed. The test load shall not applied within twenty-eight days of the completion of placing of the concrete in the part of the Works to be tested, and the latter shall be unsupported during the test by the shuttering or other non-permanent support. The test shall be made as instructed. For test on a floor, roof or similar construction, the result shall be deemed to be satisfactory if upon removal of the load the residual deflection does not exceed one quarter of the maximum deflection occurring during the second test. If the result of the test is not satisfactory, the Engineer shall instruct that the part of the Works concerned shall be taken down or cut out and reconstructed to comply with this Specification, or that other measures shall be taken to make the Works secure. If in accordance with this Specification the Contractor is liable to conduct the test at his own cost, he shall also at his own cost, taken down or cut out and reconstruct the defective work or shall execute remedial measures as instructed.
d)
e)
42
PREPARATION OF GROUND BELOW PERMANENT CONSTRUCTION

Plan concrete in foundations or site concrete shall be placed in direct contact with the bottom of the excavation, the concrete being deposited in such a manner as not to be mixed with the earth. Alternatively, when directed by the Engineer or shown on drawings, hard-core and/or sand blinding shall be used, or a layer of building paper is specified.
EXTERNAL WORKS AND SERVICES SPECIFICATION
Specification: External Works And Services (Oct 2011) Page 1 of 30
9.0 EXTERNAL WORKS AND CIVIL ENGINEERING WORKS
EXTERNAL WORKS AND SERVICES
9.1.1 Generally This section is to be read in conjunction with the various trades as specified in the PWD General Specification wherever applicable.
9.1.2 Site Clearance, Earthworks and Turfing i) General a) The Contractor shall clear the site and remove all debris from the site immediately after the site possession. The Contractor is to allow in his tender for any necessary additional clearing of shrubs, plants, exposed and buried tree stumps, etc. and any extra cutting, trimming and filling including earth from the Contractors own source and/or carting debris off site. Close turf all horizontal surfaces and all slopes and banks and to all areas as directed by the engineer including trimming, levelling and spreading with top soil. Make good all turfed areas disturbed by the work. Maintain the turfing during the Defects Liability Period, as specified in the contract.
b)
c)
d) e)
ECAS-EJ CONSULTANTS PTE LTD 9.1.3 Site Drainage, Composite Channels & Sump i) Site Drainage a) The Contractor shall provide adequate facilities for the draining of the site to ensure that all works under the contract are carried out in the dry. Perimeter cut-off drains and internal systems of drains shall be provided to discharged the run-off from the site by channelling to a settling pond where silt can be precipitated. Before existing drains are filled up, adequate temporary drainage relief shall be provided to drain the areas affected. The temporary drains shall be filled up on completion of the permanent diversions. The Contractor shall ensure that all drains, silt traps, etc. within the site and any other drains which may be affected by the progress of his works are kept clean and free from silt and other materials. The cleaning and silting of these drains shall be executed at least once fortnight. The Contractor must ensure cleanliness of the site in general is maintained and shall take necessary measures at all times to prevent mosquito breeding. All temporary drains shall be cement lined. Before commencement of any work, the Contractor shall submit through his QP a set of site drainage plans to the Ministry of the Environment, Drainage Dept for approval.
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g) h)
ii)
Covered R.C. U-drains / Precast Composite Channel a) All drains shall be constructed as R.C. U-drains or R.C. composite channel (subject to the approval of the engineer). All drains shall be of concrete Grade 30 and to provide jointed in cement mortar (1:3) for composite channel. All drains shall laid in proper gradient including all excavation, sand bedding to bottom and sides, laying to curves, stopped ends, cascades and connection to drains and sumps, all as indicated in the QPs drawings. The subgrade must be properly compacted and consolidated to the QPs approval. R.C. U-drains or composite channels shall be covered with R.C. cover slab of sizes as indicated in the QPs drawings. Hot dipped
b)
ECAS-EJ CONSULTANTS PTE LTD galvanised mild steel gratings with frames shall be provided at every 5.00 m intervals along the length of drains with RC covered slabs. c) d) The coping level shall be 100 mm below the level of the footpath unless otherwise shown in the QPs drawings. The contractor shall provide hot dipped galvanised mild steel security grilles to all openings, eg. between drains and fencelines, etc, as directed by the engineer.
iii)
Culverts a) All culverts shall be constructed as R.C. box culverts or pipe culverts (subjected to engineer approval). The box culverts shall be reinforced concrete of concrete grade 30, reinforced as indicated on QPs drawings including all necessary excavation, hardcore bed and connection to sumps. If pipe culverts are used, they shall be precast concrete class Y Humespun reinforced concrete grade 30 pipe surrounded with designed thickness of concrete grade 30, reinforced as indicated on QPs drawings including all necessary excavation, hardcore bed and connection to sumps. Reinforced concrete inspection manholes of adequate size to match culverts shall be provided at every 5.00 m centres. Provide hot dipped galvanised heavy-duty mild steel grating with frames to R.C. inspection manholes. Contractor shall provide details of construction, if this is not available, to the QP for approval before any works had been put in hand. The parapet wall to culverts shall be of in-situ concrete grade 30 reinforced with weldmesh and finished with cement and sand (1:3) rendering to all sides and top as indicated by the QP.
b)
c)
iv)
Drains Across the Drainage Reserve Any drains across the drainage reserve must be covered with 50mm thick P.C. slab.
v)
Sumps
ECAS-EJ CONSULTANTS PTE LTD a) Sumps shall be of in-situ reinforced concrete Grade 30 on 150 mm thick hardcore blinded with unwashed sand as directed in the QPs drawings completed with all excavation and connections to drains. The internal surfaces of the R.C. sumps shall be lined with 20 mm thick cement and sand (1:3) plain face plaster. For the purpose of this contract, the minimum size of the sump shall be 1.5 times the maximum width of the drains or culverts connecting into it.
b)
vi)
Alternate Access The contractor shall provide adequate facilities for the provision of alternate access when the existing road is disturbed during the construction of pipe culverts, drains and other diversion of services. He shall ensure that all existing services are adequately protected during excavation and installation of pipe culverts and other services diversion.
vii)
Connections to Existing Drains or Sumps The Contractor shall ensure that connections to existing drains or sumps enable smooth flow. This shall include all necessary breaking up and making good of existing drains, hacking and reinstating portion of footpath and laying of culvert to existing drain, all to the approval of the QP
9.1.4 Driveway
i)
Generally Bituminous roads shall consist of 250 thick granite aggregate compacted in two layers blinded with quarry dust, and a 75mm thick B1 or B3 asphalt hotmix base course and 50mm thick wearing course, as directed in the QPs drawings. 2% cross-fall throughout except curves.
ii)
Preparation of Road Formation a) Where the bearing capacity of the soil is determined by the QP to be adequate and where the road is in cut, excavations shall be carried out to the required levels as required by the thickness of construction and the levels of the finished road. The formation shall be excavated to camber or cross-fall shown for the finished road and trimmed to an even surface and thoroughly rolled and compacted to the satisfaction of the QP.
ECAS-EJ CONSULTANTS PTE LTD b) Where the road is on previously finished ground or where excavation has to be carried deeper than normal formation level on account of weakness in the subsoil as directed by QP in his drawings or as determined by the QP during the progress of the works, the formation shall be brought up to the correct level with filling of good earth and proper compaction as specified by QP and to the satisfaction of the project S.O. All high spots in the ground are to be trimmed off and the area reconsolidated as specified. Should any depression appear in the formation during compaction, they shall be filled, levelled and compacted as specified by the QP.
c)
d)
iii)
Compaction of Sub-Grade a) Subgrade of road formation shall be compacted by mechanical means using the approved type of compaction equipment such as smooth-wheel roller, tamping roller, pneumatic type roller and vibration smooth-down roller, to the required density as specified by the QP. The Contractor shall provide at their own cost all the necessary labour, plant, tools, instruments and materials for carrying out all tests at the site as well as at laboratories approved by the engineer and when directed. The Contractor shall carry out at their own cost the following control tests on road subgrade and sub-base as and when directed and in the presence of the QP or her representative: 1) Minimum 3 numbers in-situ dry density tests with a volumeter at every 50 m2; Any other tests that the QP may request from time to time during the contract period.
b)
c)
2)
iv)
Road Base a) The laying of the road base shall be as specified in the PWD General Specification March 1987 and as directed by the QP
v)
Asphalt Hotmix
ECAS-EJ CONSULTANTS PTE LTD a) b) The Contractor is to note that 60/70 penetration grade bitumen shall be used for all asphalt premix course. The Contractor shall also note that the classification and grading of different asphalt concrete mixes will be as per the PWD General Specification.
vi)
Concrete Kerbs a) Precast concrete kerbs in Grade 30 shall be laid on cast in-situ concrete foundation in Grade 30 concrete at edges of bituminous road carriageway as shown in the QPs drawings. Top of kerb shall be 175mm above finished level of road or flush with existing kerbs and laid true to line and level. Joints between kerbs shall be filled with cement and sand mortar (1:2) mix. Kerbs laid to curves shall be purpose-made radius kerbs.
vii) Scupper Pipes a) Concrete pipes shall be 225mm diameter approved precast concrete pipes laid at 4.50m centres.
viii) Interlocking Paving Stones for Carpark & Driveway a) Supply and lay 100mm thick interlocking paving blocks or other approved equivalent; with precast concrete kerbs or other kind of approved restraining edges to be constructed prior to laying interlocking blocks. The paving blocks shall be laid on a suitably prepared sub-base. Sub-base construction shall consist of 200mm crusher run on well compacted sub-grade. All falls required for the surface water drainage shall be built in during the preparation of the sub-base, which is then compacted for stability and blinded to a smooth finish so that surface water cannot penetrate through to the subsequent sand layer to any appreciable degree. The laying course consists of clean sharp sand (0-3mm) spread to give a thickness of 50mm minimum after compaction. The profile of the uncompacted sand shall be similar to that of the surface and shall be accurately screeded and levelled. The screeded height of the laying base should be approximately the thickness of the block minus 20mm, lower than the required finished level of paved area to allow the blocks to be vibrated down. Once screeded and levelled, the laying base must not be compacted or disturbed in any way.
b)
c)
ECAS-EJ CONSULTANTS PTE LTD d) Starting from a straight edge and preferably from a corner, lay the stones directly onto the screeded sand in the pattern selected. Junctions and curves require no variation in laying technique. Blocks are placed together as tightly as possible. After a sufficiently large area of the main surface has been laid, cut blocks to fit the gaps at the edges. Vibrate the blocks to their final level with a vibrating plate compactor. This compacts the sand underneath and at the same time forces sand up between the blocks. Spread dry, sharp sand over the surface to completely fill the blocks between the blocks. All paving blocks must be hard, even in shape, with true arises and well curved. Samples of which must be approved by the engineer and kept in site office. Colours and patterns of laying are to be approved by the engineer.
e)
9.1.5 Construction of Precast Concrete Drains and Culverts

i)
The precast units and sections shall be true to shape and of correct dimensions, finish and strengthened with correct reinforcements wherever required. All precast units shall first be approved for use by the QP before they are incorporated in any part of the works. Precast channels, etc. shall be properly laid, bedded on a sand base at least 75mm thick unless otherwise stated by QP and joints grouted and pointed in cement mortar. Side connections where required or shown on the QPs drawings shall be formed and secured in concrete and/or cement mortar, as directed by QP and shall finish to a smooth, uniform and regular appearance.
ii)
iii)
9.1.6 Foul Drainage i) Generally a) The foul drainage work shall be executed by a fully licensed firm and shall be in full accordance with the requirements of the Ministry of Environment. If the work is not satisfactory in any respect, the Contractor shall rectify the defects at his own expense. Pipes under building and across roads shall be ductile iron pipes laid on concrete bed with surround as specified by QP
b)

ii)
Foul Drain Pipes a) Foul drains shall be 150mm diameter ductile pipe with flexible joints laid on Type B bedding including 150mm concrete Grade 20 surround to pipe.
iii)
Concrete Bed, Haunching and Surround to Pipe a) The concrete bed foundation and type section for the pipes shall consist of a concrete or reinforced concrete as shown in details on the QPs drawings. In all cases, the concrete shall well rammed or vibrated and worked under and around the pipes. No concrete shall be placed around the pipes until the pipe joints have been inspected and approved. At approximately every four pipes or 6 metre whichever is the less interval the contractor shall form a joint in the concrete bed or surround by vertically shuttering the bed or surround with 25 mm thick fibreboard, timber or other approved material. The shuttering material shall be left in to form a permanent joint where the concrete bed is required to be reinforced all reinforcement shall stop on either side of the joint. In placing the concrete in surround, the contractor is required to concrete right against the side of the trench excavation. The QP will instruct the Contractor, wherever he thinks fit, to either omit timber from the base of the trench or to pull up the timbering as the concrete is placed and concrete against the trench excavation. Where the excavation has been carried out to a greater width than the required Type Section or approved width, the Contractor will be required to provide the additional concrete necessary to concrete to the sides of the excavation.
b)
c)
d)
iv)
Inspection Chambers a) Construct inspection chambers complete with medium or heavy duty inspection chamber covers and frames to BS 497 at locations as shown in the QPs drawings to sizes and depths that will permit effective functioning of the drainage system and all to be in accordance with the requirements of the Sewerage Department, Ministry of the Environment.
v)
Testing
ECAS-EJ CONSULTANTS PTE LTD a) Test the whole of the foul drainage system with water to the satisfaction of the QP both before and after covering in and flushing out on completion of the work. All gravity pipelines and sewers of 525mm or less in diameter before being surrounded and covered shall be tested by filling with water in a manner approved by the QP and in the presence of this representative. The pressure shall be measured from the highest point of the pipeline under test and shall be 1.2 metre head of water. Pipelines will not be accepted until they have withstood the required pressure for 30 minutes without a loss in excess of 1.5 litres for 100m for each 300mm in diameter.
b)
vi)
Manhole a) Where detailed cast-in-situ or reinforced concrete tube manholes are to be built in the positions shown on and in accordance with the details on the approved QPs drawings and to the requirements of the Sewerage Department, Ministry of the Environment. The chamber and shaft rings may be supplied in different lengths and each section will be provided with lifting holes. The tapers to be used will be of a fixed length. The joints between the sections shall be of an ogee form and the contractor shall set each section accurately in position making the ogee joint with cement mortar to form a watertight joint. Before completion of the manhole, all the lifting holes, ogee and other joints shall be neatly pointed. The reinforced concrete slabs covering the chambers and the shafts of the manholes shall be set and pointed in cement mortar to form watertight joints. At all points where pipes are built into concrete walls, or floors, great care shall be taken that the joint is watertight. If found to be otherwise, the concrete shall be cut away and replaced with concrete, to make a watertight joint to the satisfaction of the QP
b)
c)
d)
ECAS-EJ CONSULTANTS PTE LTD e) Manhole covers and frames are to be set in cement mortar and surrounded with grade 20A (Class A) concrete and covers left flush with the surrounding ground or road surface as the case may be and shall be set on two courses of 225mm brickwork. The fine adjustment of cover levels shall be effected by creasing courses of hard burnt tile. Care shall be taken to ensure that the cover is level with and sloped to any fall or grade in the surrounding surfaces. Details for manhole covers and frames to be in accordance to BS 497.
vii) Backdrops and Tumbling Bays a) b) Where detailed, tumbling bays or backdrops are to be constructed in accordance with the details on the approved QPs drawings. Special spigot and socket tumbling bay, or backdrop junctions shall be used in the junction between the two lines of pipes. For backdrops and tumbling bays above 300mm diameter the junction shall be of ductile iron to approved dimensions and shape. Tumbling bay backdrop pipes are to be built in the walls of the manhole by cutting a neat hole in the precast concrete rings sufficient for building in the pipes and pointed in cement mortar. The joint shall be finished flush with the inside of the manhole and neatly splayed on the outside to form a watertight joint.
c)
viii) Clearing Pipelines of Obstruction a) After testing of the pipelines as specified and at a time to be directed by the QP, the interior of the pipelines shall be inspected to ascertain that the pipes are entirely clear of obstruction and that the invert is smooth. In the case of pipes which cannot be inspected from the inside, generally under 600 mm in diameter, a loose plug shall be passed through each pipeline to ensure that the pipes are entirely clear of obstruction and that the invert is smooth. The loose plug shall be in the form of a cylinder with solid ends made of timber not less than 25 mm in thickness or of any other material approved by the QP The outside diameter of the ends of the plug shall not be smaller than 25 mm less than the diameter of the pipe through which it is to be passed and its length shall not be less than its diameter. The QP will not make the inspection until he is satisfied that the lengths concerned are complete, clean and ready for operation.
b)
c)
d)
ECAS-EJ CONSULTANTS PTE LTD e) f) Any obstruction in the pipelines shall be removed and any unevenness of the invert shall be made good. If as a result of the removal of any obstruction, the QP considers that damages may have been caused to the pipelines, he shall order the length to be re-tested at the expense of the contractor. Should such re-test prove unsatisfactory, the contractor shall at his own expense amend the work and carry out such further tests as are required by the QP
ix)
Fracture of Pipes In the event of pipes being fractured after being to all appearances properly laid whether due to imperfect beds having been formed or the material for refilling having been improperly selected or to any other cause, the contractor in every instance, will be held responsible and he will be called upon to replace such defective pipes at his own cost, if such defect appears before the expiration of the period of maintenance.
9.1.7 Sub-soil Water Drainage Pipes

i)
All sub-soil water shall be drained using white PVC corrugated and fully perforated sub-soil pipes. The pipes shall be of a certain stiffness and yet flexible to accommodate ground movements and any trench irregularities. The pipes shall have the following technical properties: a) b) Material: White Plasticised Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Corrugations: i) ii) c) d) Depth of Corrugation: 6 mm Pitch of Corrugation: 10 mm
ii)
Numbers of Perforation in circumference of pipes: 8 nos Length of pipe: i) ii) iii) Diameter 80 mm/100 mm =100 M Diameter 160 mm =50 M Diameter 200 mm =45 M
e)
Discharge Capacity at 1% to 2 % gradient: i) ii) iii) iv) Diameter 80 mm = 2.1 l/s Diameter 100 mm = 4.2 l/s Diameter 160 mm = 15 l/s Diameter 200 mm = 23 l/s

iii)
The pipe shall be resistant against impact and shall have undergone a fully integrated Quality Assurance system test (BS5750 Part 2) and has flowrate performance (BS4962) as per the following chart: -
Performance Data Size Inside Diameter (mm) 71.5 91.0 146.5 184.0 Drainage Area Per Metre Length (mm2/m) 5376 5952 3840 3264 Approx Length Per Coil (m) 100 100 50 5.8
(mm) 80 100 160 200 9.1.8 Sewerage Work

i)
The whole sewerage works shall be executed by licensed plumber and shall be in full accordance with the requirements of the Ministry of Environment. If the work is not satisfactory in any respect, the contractor shall rectify the defects at his own expense. Supply and lay necessary drainpipes and connections including detailed methods of laying, provision of new inspection chambers or manholes, etc. all as shown in the QPs drawings and to the approval of the relevant authorities, including reinstating of all works disturbed. All pipes shall be 150 mm diameter vitrified clay pipes of flexible joints laid on Type D bedding including 150 mm concrete Grade 30 surround to pipe unless otherwise specified or stated in QPs drawings. The Contractor is to arrange for all necessary inspections by ENV during and not after the contract period and obtain the approval of the Sewerage Department, ENV before the expiry date of this contract and before the handing over of the completed works to the engineer. All location of the pipes, manholes, etc. shall be pegged for the approval of the QP prior to any laying or excavation. He shall liaise with ENV for any benchmarks with regards to levels for sewerage works. Test the whole of the Sewerage system with water to the satisfaction of the QP both before and after covering in and flushing out on completion of the work.
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
ECAS-EJ CONSULTANTS PTE LTD 9.1.9 Sewerage Treatment Plant

i)
The sewerage treatment plant have to include all mechanical works, internal plumbing and sanitary works, internal plumbing and sanitary works, surrounding aprons, drains, chain-link fences and all other ancillary works and finishes as detailed in the ENV specification. The QP has to design the sewerage treatment plant that can handle the capacity as specified.
ii)
9.1.10 Aluminium Chain Link Fencing

i)
Supply and erect aluminium chain link fencing as shown in the QPs drawings and subject to engineers approval. The fencing shall complete with double-crank anti-climbs, hot dipped galvanised steel angled posts with concrete footings, hot dipped galvanised steel beading to be secured by bolts and nuts, hot dipped galvanised steel angled post bracing. Strands straining wires and concrete kerbs, all to the manufacturers instructions and QPs approval. All hot dipped galvanised steel used shall comply with BS 729.
9.1.11 Gates
i)
Provide 2 leaves mild steel gates to details and dimensions all as shown in the QPs drawings. Provide drop bolts, shoot bolts and hinges to details as shown in the QPs drawings. Provide 1 no. open shackle padlock to gate with duplicate keys. Gates shall be primed with one coat red lead primer before delivery. Touch up primer and apply 3 coats synthetic enamel paint as specified and approved by engineer.
ii)
iii) iv)
9.2
TEMPORARY TIMBER HOARDING

The Contractor shall erect temporary timber hoarding of 3 m high with all necessary supporting structure along the contract boundary as indicated in the QPs drawings. The Contractor shall include the cost of painting graphic with a coat of white wash on the timber hoarding as base and to the engineers approval.
9.3
TAS MANHOLES AND CONDUIT- PIPES

9.3.1 TAS Works Generally
i)
The completed works are subject to Singapore Telecoms final testing and acceptance. The works shall be carried out by a Telecom licensed contractor, approved by the engineer. The construction of Telecom manholes and ductworks shall conform to the Telecoms Specifications, Drawings and Safety Measures for Pipe Laying and Reinstatement Works Ref. LP/LPS/L4/02/11/13/85 dated Nov 85 or its latest edition or other related drawings where applicable. The Contractor shall provide a copy of the abovesaid Telecom Specifications for the QPs and engineers reference respectively at the site office. The Contractor shall test the completed works prior to handing over and he shall allow in his tender for all such expenses incurred in obtaining such approval.
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
9.3.2 Telecoms Pipelaying

i)
The pipe shall be laid straight and level whenever possible. If a straight run is not possible, the radius of curvature shall be determined on site by the QP Unless otherwise specified in the drawings or as directed by the QP, the gradient of the UPVC pipes under crossing or over crossing other services shall be 1:6 for diameters 100 mm and 1:3 for diameters less than 100 mm. A layer of 150mm thick hardcore bed well blinded with sand shall be provided where muddy, clayey or soft soil is encountered. The hardcore shall consist essentially of broken bricks/stones blinded with sufficient blinding material to aid consolidation.
ii)
iii)
iv)
The pipe formation shall be as detailed on the drawings unless otherwise directed by the QP Pipelaying shall not be done in the absence of the Telecoms Supervisor unless prior permission has been given. The Contractor shall do any necessary cutting of pipes according to the requirements of the works.
v)
vi)
vii) Pipes shall undercross drains that are not deeper than 2.0 m deep with a minimum clearance of 0.5 m below the invert of the drain. viii) Pipes overcrossing a drain or culvert shall have their own supports and shall not rest on the drain or culvert. ix) The Contractor shall use pipes and couplings that conform to the specification in the TELECOMS SPECIFICATIONS. The trench shall be excavated to the required width and depth. The bottom of the trench shall be free from stone, levelled and well punned UPVC pipes are to be laid with polypropylene spacers at a maximum spacing of 1.5 m apart to allow clearance between adjacent pipes.
x)
xi)
xii) Flared mouth UPVC pipes shall be used for entry into manhole wall. The outside surface of the pipes shall be roughened with glass paper or sand paper and a coat of solvent cement applied for its length in the manhole wall. xiii) The starting end of the pipe shall be blanked off with a board to act as an anvil against which the pipe can be driven home. When jointing the next length of pipe, both pipe ends as well as the inside of the coupling shall be thoroughly cleaned with a dry rag and then given a liberal coating of solvent cement. The coupling shall then be pushed into the first pipe by hand and a suitable wooden batten is then placed across the remote end of the coupling and tapped with a hammer until it is engaged midway. The next length of pipe shall then be engaged to the coupling and similarly tapped until full engagement is effected.
xiv)
The first layer of concrete shall be placed to the required thickness on the prepared trench bottom. The bottom layer of pipes shall then be laid (using the spacer to maintain the spacing between pipes) such that a minimum gap, sufficient for the specified concrete thickness, remains between the outside pipes and the side of the trench or trench shuttering where used. The next layer of concrete shall then be placed to the prescribed thickness before the second layer of pipes is laid. This shall be continued until the final layer of concrete is laid to the specified thickness. The concrete shall be evenly placed around the duct and each batch, as it is placed, shall be properly compacted without creating unbalanced side thrust against the pipe.
9.3.3 Telecoms Lead-In Pipes i) Lead-in pipes used shall be of the type as specified in the TELECOMS SPECS. The location of the entrance of the lead-in pipes shall be as shown and directed by QP in his drawings. Pipes shall be laid at a minimum depth of 1.0 m below the final ground level or as directed. Pipes shall be laid in a straight run. When bending is unavoidable, the bend shall be gradual and smooth. No S bend is allowed. A 90 degree upturn when changing from the horizontal to vertical plan, shall be done with approved type, factory made bent pipe. The pipe shall be clipped and flushed against the wall and shall rise to a height of 1.8 m above ground level unless otherwise directed. A nylon rope shall be provided in each pipe to facilitate cable pulling after pipe testing.
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii) All lead-in end of the riser pipe shall be capped with end cap to prevent entry of earth, debris or cement.
9.3.4 Telecoms Manholes i) Manholes to be constructed are specified in the QPs drawings. If the manhole specified cannot be constructed due to unforeseen circumstances, the engineer has to be informed immediately. The presence of unforeseen obstructions in the ground, or adverse ground condition, may necessitate the construction of a type other than that specified, or a modification of one or more of the dimensions stipulated in the relevant drawings. The contractor shall be advised of any modification to the drawing by the QP. The contractor shall not carry out any modification without the approval of the engineer. Before any concrete is placed: a) b) The bottom of the excavation must be properly levelled and consolidated. The bottom shall be kept dry by providing a sump hole as specified in the drawings to accommodate the water pump, and a layer of 150 mm thick hardcore material shall be provided where necessary.
ii)
iii)
iv)
Pipe shall be cast in-situ and manhole fittings placed as construction of the manhole proceeds. Pipe shall enter manhole at such depth as to ensure a minimum clearance of 450 mm above the invert level of the manhole. Rawl plugs, channel brackets and anchor irons shall be provided by the contractor and fixed in the manholes as shown in the QPs drawings Concrete for filling the recess of the frame and cover shall be of 1:1:2 mix and shall be filled up to the ribs without covering the ribs. Manhole walls shall be fairfaced and not rendered. Any projection shall be removed, and cavities filled with cement mortar. The walls shall not be coated with cement or cement/sand wash. The floor shall be given a 20mm rendering of cement mortar with a fall towards the sump hole from all directions. Only approved formwork shall be used in the manhole construction.
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
ix)
x)

xi)
Completed manhole shall be pumped clear of water and made ready for the QP to inspect.
9.3.5 Others i) The Contractor shall test the completed work prior to handing over and he shall allow in his tender for such expenses incurred. Sand shall be filled up in all electrical pit and trenches only after the electrical sub-contractor has carried out the cable installation. All electrical trenches and pits shall be covered with 300 mm long hot-dipped galvanised m.s. gratings. Provision is to be made for cable entry and exit when fabricating the gratings. All openings/sleeves shall be sealed up with the approved material only after the electrical sub-contractor has installed their trunking/laying of cable. Concrete kerb (100 mm high) shall be provided for all lead-in pipes/interfloor openings only after the electrical sub-contractor has completed the trunking installation/laying of cable. The Contractor shall seal up the gap between the opening and trunking first before doing the concrete kerb.
ii)
iii)
iv)
9.4
WATERPROOFING TO BASEMENT
9.4.1 General i) All concrete shall be designed in accordance with the latest editions of one of the internationally recognised standards such as British Standard 8007: Water Retaining Structures. All concrete shall consist of the following: a) b) c) iii) External Waterproofing Membrane Concrete Waterproofing Additive Internal Waterproofing Cementitious Membrane
ii)
All three (3) systems must be supplied by a single company with the ISO 9002 certification. The work shall be carried out by specialists with a ten years guarantee upon completion works. The whole waterproofing system shall be installed by a specialist who is registered with the CIDB under the waterproofing installation works.
iv)
9.4.2 External Waterproofing Membrane i) Material a) b) The waterproofing membrane shall be preformed sheet membrane bonded to the substrate. Bonded system shall consists of membrane of elastomeric bituminous compounds reinforced with cross-laminated high density polyethylene film of 100 microns. The product must incorporate a selvedge strip to promote immediate lap sealing and this selvedge shall be a minimum of 25 mm. The membrane shall have an average thickness of 4mm and meet the following equivalent standards: -
c) d)
ii)
Property
Value Dimensional Stability -Longitudinal -Lateral Membrane Strength Elongation A) B) Composite Rubberised Bitumen Adhesive 200% 1200% +/-0.2% +/-0.2% 56N/cm
Test Method MOAT 5.1.6(70C) MOAT 5.1.6(70C) BS2782 Method 320
BS2782 Method 320 BS2782 Method 320
Puncture Resistance Adhesion (180 Peel) Water Vapour Permeability Vapour Resistance Water Penetration Joint Hydrostatic Pressure
Specification: External Works And Services (Oct 2011)
300N 40 N/cm 0/0.23g /m2/24h
ASTM E154 ASTM D1000 BS3177
892 MN/s/g NIL 5 Bar MOAT 5.1.4 Din 16935
Page 20 of 30
ECAS-EJ CONSULTANTS PTE LTD Tensile Strength at Break >3 N/mm2 ASTM D412 (both longitudinal and transverse)
9.4.3 Installation i) Specification a) b) All preparatory work shall be carried out in accordance with the manufacturers specifications and requirements. Installation of the waterproofing membrane shall be carried out by trained applicators approved by the manufacturer and with accepted good practice in the trade.
ii)
Substrate Surfaces All substrate surfaces shall be free of loose, deleterious materials, dust or coatings, which are likely to impair adhesion. All damaged surfaces are to be made good to the satisfaction of the QP prior to the commencement of the waterproofing works.
iii)
Receiving Concrete Surfaces Concrete surfaces shall be steel trowelled finish and be approved by the QP prior to the commencement of the waterproofing works.
iv)
Pretreatment of Cracks and Joints All cracks and joints shall be pretreated in accordance with the manufacturers specifications.
v)
Corner and Cant Treatment a) b) Chamfered fillets shall be cast to internal and external corners to prevent knife edging of membranes. All cants at vertical and horizontal intersections shall either be formed in situ (prior to application of main waterproofing membrane) or precast and shall be not less than 50mm x 50mm triangular section.
vi)
Curing of Pretreated Area All pretreated area shall be cured for 24 hours minimum or according to manufacturers recommendations, except in the cast of cementitious
ECAS-EJ CONSULTANTS PTE LTD materials where it shall be 7 days before the main waterproofing membrane is applied.
vii) Securing of Membrane The waterproofing membrane shall be securely tucked in or fastened as shown in the QPs drawings or according to the manufacturers applications. viii) Membrane Lap a) The individual lengths of membrane shall be joined in accordance with manufacturers specifications. The joint shall be checked and tested for water-tightness in accordance with quality standard set by the manufacturer. A water-based fluid membrane compatible with the waterproofing membrane, as recommended by the manufacturer shall be applied on the edge of the joint for double protection. Unless otherwise specified by the manufacturers instructions and test reports, the membrane sheets shall be lapped with at least 150mm laps. End laps shall be staggered with minimum staggered distance of 1000mm.
b)
ix)
Receiving Surface Preparation Immediately before the waterproofing membrane is laid, the surface to be waterproofed shall be cleaned, smooth, dry and free from voids, spalled areas, loose aggregates and protrusions, with no coarse aggregates visible, and free from membrane curing compounds all in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. All contaminants such as grease, oil, etc are to be removed from the exposed concrete surface.
x)
Prime Concrete Surfaces The concrete surfaces shall be primed in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
xi)
Laying the Membrane The membrane shall be laid such that no air is trapped between it and the concrete surfaces or between successive layers of the membrane.
xii) Embedded Fixtures, Pipes or Cast Holes for Fixing Where embedded fixtures, pipes or cast holes for fixing are required through the waterproofing membrane, temporary plugs shall be inserted to
ECAS-EJ CONSULTANTS PTE LTD allow the fixing to be located through the membrane. The membrane shall be cut by a cylindrical stamp cutter or approved equivalent. Under no circumstances, shall be membrane be drilled. Where drilled fixtures are required, the membrane shall first be cut as above. xiii) Turning and Joints All turnings, joints, etc shall be provided with double layers of the waterproofing membrane as specified herein or according to manufacturers specifications to accommodate some movement. xiv) RC Tanking Slab for External Waterproofing For external waterproofing applications, the tanking slab shall be extended by at least 300mm beyond the external wall line and the membrane dressed over the edge of the tanking slab. xv) Permissible Temperature Range The membrane application shall take place within the temperature range of 25C to 35C. The contractor may erect tentage over the area where the waterproofing membrane is laid in order in order to achieve the specified temperature range. 9.4.4 Protection of Waterproofing Membrane i) Horizontal waterproofing membrane Horizontal waterproofing membrane shall be protected by a minimum 50mm of cement/sand screed (1:3 mix). It shall be placed within 24 hours after laying of the waterproofing membrane. The membrane shall be inspected thoroughly before covering and all corrections to be made immediately. Any damaged areas shall be repaired with a minimum of 300mm x 300mm patch. ii) Vertical waterproofing membrane Vertical waterproofing membrane shall be protected with a rigid, noncompressible, chemically inert and root-impenetrable tampered board within 24 hours of laying of the waterproofing membrane. Particular care shall be taken to prevent any damages to the waterproofing membrane during backfilling or concreting. iii) Continuous application
ECAS-EJ CONSULTANTS PTE LTD If application of waterproofing membrane is continued from one day to the next, all exposed edges must be properly terminated to ensure a complete seal against water penetration.
9.4.5 Treatment of Membrane at Concrete Joints i) The waterproofing membrane bridging all construction joints and any other movements joints shall form a continuous watertight layer. A double layer of waterproofing membrane shall be placed at locations of these joints. This strip shall be at least 300mm wide; the edges of the overlaps shall be sealed with a water-based fluid membrane compatible with the membrane, recommended by the manufacturer for double protection. The central 100mm along this strip shall not be bonded to the concrete and shall form a loop of 50mm. No construction joints or expansion joints shall be placed along the lapping of the waterproofing membrane.
ii) iii)
9.4.6 Internal Waterproofing Membrane The cementitious waterproofing material shall be a ready-to-use 2 components flexible cement slurry based on a synthetic latex and a corresponding cement filler. It shall be applied 2 coats at the rate of 1.5 kg/m2. The application shall not have any toxic effect upon drinking water. 9.4.7 Protection The cementitious membrane when cured, shall be protected by a thin layer of screed (at least 20mm). The cured membrane must not be exposed to the sun for too long. After it has cured for about 3 days, tile beddings shall be laid to protect the membrane. 9.4.8 Technical Data Component A Supply form Color Bulk density Specific gravity Storage temperature Effect of humidity Mixing proportions or Specific gravity (mixed)
Component B
liquid powder milky white grey 1.1 kg/l 1.03 kg/l sensitive to frost moderate none same as cement 1 2.6 (by weight) 1 2.4 (by volume) 1.9 kg/l 1.9 kg/l
ECAS-EJ CONSULTANTS PTE LTD Application temperature Physiological effects Toxicity not less than + 5C neutral non-toxic not less than +5C same as cement non-toxic
9.4.9 Watertight Concrete for Basement i) General Specification a) b) Integral Watertight Concrete Protection System The approved integral watertight concrete system specified under this section shall consist of silica fumes incorporating suitable admixtures and meeting the following technical requirements.
ii)
Properties of Dry Compacted Silica Fume SIO2 D.O.T. Fa2O3 Al2O3 MgO Na2O K2O CaO SO3 90% min 8% max 0.20% max 0.30% max 0.80% max 0.20% max 0.40% max 0.20% max 0.20% max
Silica fume shall be stored at appointed ready-mix concrete suppliers batching plant in a clean and dry storage silo and added to concrete mix. Dosage at 20 kgs to per metre cube of concrete. iii) Properties of Superplasticiser Admixture a) The superplasticiser or high range water reducer used in the production of integral concreting waterproofing system shall be of a water soluble, sulphonated napthalene polymer based admixture. The admixture shall have the following properties: - dry material content : 40 + 2% - relative density : 1.205 + 0.02 b) It must not contain any added chlorides and must meet the requirements of BS 5075 to SS 320. Test reports must be produced to show his compliance to the standards before the commencement of the project. The superplasticiser must be compatible with the use
ECAS-EJ CONSULTANTS PTE LTD of dry compacted silica fume in the concrete mix. Dosage of superplasticiser to per 100 kgs of cement shall be 129 + 200 ml.
iv)
Properties of Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture a) The water reducing and retarding admixture used in the production of integral concrete waterproofing system shall be ready to use liquid based on lignosulphonates and hydroxylated polymers. The admixture shall have the following properties: - dry material content : 43 + 2% - relative density b) :1.200 + 0.02
It must not contain any added chlorides and must meet the requirements of BS 5075 to SS 320. Test reports must be produced to show its compliance to the standards before the commencement of the project. The water reducing and retarding admixture must be compatible with the use of dry compacted silica fume in the concrete mix. Dosage of water reducing and retarding admixture to per 100 kgs of cement shall be 359 + 100 ml.
v)
Cement Content Minimum cement content (OPC) shall be 350 kgs/m3 and the maximum shall not be more than 400 kgs/m3.
vi)
Appointment of Concrete Supplier The Contractor are to appoint qualified ready-mix concrete suppliers with the necessary experience and capacity to ensure steady and consistent supply integrating the specified system to prevent cold joint in the concrete from occurring.
vii) Concrete Grade and Slump Requirements Unless otherwise specified, all concrete to be used for the project shall have a minimum compressive strength of 40 N/mm2 in 28 days with maximum water/cement ratio of 0.38 and a high workability slump of 125 to 175mm at point of placement. viii) Mix Design
ECAS-EJ CONSULTANTS PTE LTD The Contractor is to submit concrete mix design for the specified integral watertight concrete system to the QP for his approval.
ix)
Acceptance Testing a) Trial mix at the concrete batching paint is to be carried out to ascertain the suitability of the mix prior to the actual casting. The average 7 and 28 days compressive strength shall have an average compressive strength of 30 Nmm2 respectively. Samples obtained during trial mix shall also be subjected to coefficient of permeability test at kgs/cm2 test pressure for specimen at 28 days. The average of the permeability test results at 28 days shall be less than 1x1012m/s or less than 20mm and penetration according to the DIN method. All test results obtained during the trial mix and approved by the QP shall be used as reference results for future testings during construction.
b)
x)
Treatment of Construction Joints a) Construction joints where applicable or shown shall have surface with aggregate exposed finish formed by an approved surface retarder. The specified retarded for construction joints and other exposed aggregate concrete application shall all be applied once the surface retarder is covered with plastic sheet. Hose surface of concrete and remove unset cement matrix with coarse brush or broom within 24 hours. High pressure water jetting should be used to treat the construction joint. 1) Reinjectable Joint Sealer All construction joints at the basement shall have a reinjectable plastic hose placed and fixed by clips in the joint prior to casting concrete. The plastic hose will have: -a rigid core, and outside diameter of 19 mm -longitudinal internal injection, hole diameter 6mm -discharge openings diameter 3mm and have a history of previous projects.
ECAS-EJ CONSULTANTS PTE LTD The injection resin will be a water washable non-toxic modified vinyl ester which after curing will swell when in contact with water.
2)
Swellable Rubber All basement construction joints except those mentioned in 4.1 shall have swellable rubber seals. The product will be a vinyl ester based which physically will swell on water immersion. The action must be non-chemical and reversible. Different grades must be available for salt water and toxic water. Profiles will be 20 mm x 10 mm and supplied in rolls in a waterproof packing. Fixing is either by mailing or gluing using a compatible material supplied by the manufacturer.
xi)
Curing and Protection of Concrete a) All fresh concrete shall be protected by approved means from rain, sun and drying wind. It shall be kept free from any vibrational disturbances. Exposed surfaces of concrete are to be kept moist and covered for 7 days after placing with a material such as polythene sheet with an absorbing material which is kept damp by frequent watering. Concrete placed below the ground shall be protected from falling earth during and after placing. Concrete placed in ground containing substances shall be kept free from contact with such ground and with water draining therefrom, during placing and for a period of 3 days or as otherwise instructed thereafter. The groundwater around a structure below the ground shall be kept to an approved level of pumping, or the works shall be flooded or other approved means taken to prevent flotation. Approved works shall also be taken to protect immature concrete from damage by debris, excessive loading, vibration, deleterious groundwater, mixing with earth or other materials, flotation and other influence that may impair the strength and durability to the concrete. Concrete damaged through improper or insufficient curing shall be made good at the Contractors expense.
b)
c)
ECAS-EJ CONSULTANTS PTE LTD xii) Scope of Works by the Contractor To ensure that aggregate are adequately exposed by surface retarder at all construction joints. a) Thorough curing of cast concrete by approved method and in accordance to the good civil engineering practice.
b)
Where honeycombs or cracks are encountered, main contractor are to submit their propose repair method and material complete with method statements for the QP approval before proceeding with such works.
xiii) Scope of Works by the Specified Integral Watertight Concrete System
Supplier a) To provide calibrated dispensing equipment for the accurate dosing of the specified admixture. To provide independent quality control personnel at batching sale to check the quality of concrete raw materials prior to casting. To ensure workability and quality of concrete during the batching are of the type and standard specified. Provide experienced personnel to recommend correct placing of concrete and proper method of compaction the placed concrete to achieve the quality and standard specified.
b)
c)
d)
STRUCTURAL STEELWORKS SPECIFICATION
Specification: Structural Steel Works (Oct 2011)

Page 1 of 18

1.0 STRUCTURAL STEELWORKS 1.1 1.1.1 MATERIALS Steelwork The Contractor shall produce fully detailed steelwork fabrication and shop drawings including marking drawings for all the structural steelwork. All shop drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for his acceptance prior to the commencement of fabrication, but this acceptance shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities for the work under the Contract. 1.1.2 The materials and goods for structural steelwork shall comply with the latest edition of the following British Standards: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) 1.2 1.2.1 Steel - BS EN 10210-1 Grade S275JOH for structural hollow tubes and BS EN 10025 Grade S275 for other structural sections Structural steelwork - BS 5950 Structural steel hot-rolled sections - BS 4 Part 1 and BS EN 10056-1 Black bolts - BS 4190 Special quality bolts - BS 3692 High strength friction grip bolts - BS 4395 Welding electrodes for manual metal - arc welding - BS EN 499 Electrode wires and fluxes for submerged arc welding - BS EN 756 & BS EN 760 Structural steel hot-rolled hollow sections - BS EN 10210-2 Methods of test for paints - BS 3900
INSPECTION AND TESTING The Contractor shall carry out all necessary inspection, to ensure that steel containing laminations or other defects is not incorporated in the work. Any inspection carried out by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligation to provide such inspection. Steel found to be defective at any stage of fabrication or subsequently shall be discarded and replaced by sound material notwithstanding any acceptance of the material previously given or implied by the Engineer.
1.2.2
All tests on structural steel shall comply with the latest Structural Steel Codes and in addition:

Page 2 of 18

(a) (b) (c) (d) Where alternative temperatures are quoted for Charpy V-notch tests, they shall be carried out at -15C or the nearest lower value. Ladle analyses and mechanical test certificates shall be provided by the Contractor for all steel unless otherwise accepted by the Engineer. The carbon equivalent values shall not exceed the specified maxima. All material 35 mm thick and over shall be tested by ultrasonic equipment and any which, in the opinion of the Engineer, is unsuitable due to the amount of lamination, shall be discarded. Material under 35 mm thick shall be similarly tested where required by the Engineer.
1.2.3
The Contractor shall provide all necessary facilities, equipment and qualified personnel to carry out sampling and testing of materials, inspection of fabrication and surface treatment of the steelwork, including the handling or re-handling of materials as necessary. The Engineer shall be advised prior to sampling and testing, and shall be given the opportunity to attend. Facilities, equipment and qualified personnel shall likewise be afforded to enable the Engineer to carry out any non-destructive testing and/or visual inspection of welds required by him. The type of non-destructive testing shall include but not limited to the following: * * * * magnetic particle flaw detection test (to BS 6072) penetrant flaw detection test (to BS EN 571-1) ultrasonic examination (to BS EN 1714) radiographic examination (to BS EN 1435)
Unless stated in the Particular Specification or specified in the Drawings, the quality of welds shall be assessed in accordance with the acceptance levels given in BS EN 288-3. Any weld with defects greater than the maximum permitted shall be liable for rejection. The visual inspection of fusion welds shall be carried out in accordance with BS EN 970. The type and frequency of testing shall be at the direction of the Engineer. The cost of all testing of welds shall be borne by the contractor. 1.2.4 10% of the total number of fillet welded joints are to be tested by approved laboratories. Position of joints to be tested and the type of test to be carried out, are to be selected and approved by the Engineer. All weld tests results are subjected to the Engineers approval. The cost of testing of welds using the methods of ultrasonic and radiographic examinations shall be borne by the contractor if the welds so tested fail to meet the requirements of the contract. Work which, in the opinion of the Engineer, is not in accordance with the Drawings or this Specification will be rejected. Any delay caused by such rejection shall not in any way relieve the Contractor of his obligations under the Contract.
1.2.5
1.3
FABRICATION

Page 3 of 18

1.3.1 All material, before and after fabrication, shall be straight unless required to be of curvilinear form, and shall be free from twists. The fabrication tolerances shall comply with BS 5950 : Part 2 : 1985: Section 7.2. 1.3.2 Clearances. Care shall be taken to ensure that the clearances specified are worked to. The erection clearance for cleated ends of members connecting steel to steel shall not be greater than 2 mm at each end. The erection clearance at ends of beams without web cleats shall be not more than 3 mm at each end, but where, for practical reasons, this clearance has to be increased, the seating shall be suitably designed. Where black bolts are used, the holes shall be made not more than 2 mm greater than the diameter of the bolts, for bolts up to 24 mm diameter, and not more than 3 mm greater than the diameter of the bolts, for bolts over 24 mm diameter, unless otherwise required by the Engineer. 1.3.3 Cutting shall be by shearing, cropping, sawing or machine flame cutting. Hand flame cutting shall be permitted only with the prior permission of the Engineer. Sheared or cropped edges shall, if necessary, be dressed to a neat workmanlike finish and shall be free from distortion where parts are to be in metal-to-metal contact. 1.3.4 Holes through more than one thickness of material for members such as compound stanchion and girder flanges shall, where possible, be drilled after the members are assembled and tightly clamped or bolted together. Punching may be permitted before assembly, provided the holes are punched 2 mm less in diameter than the required size and reamed after assembly to the full diameter. The thickness of material punched shall be not greater than 15 mm. When holes are drilled in one operation through two or more separable parts, these parts shall be separated after drilling and the burrs removed. Holes in connecting angels and plates, other than splices, also in roof members and light framing shall be punched full size through material not over 12 mm thick, except where required for close tolerance or barrel bolts. All matching holes for black bolts shall register with each other so that a gauge 2 mm less in diameter than the diameter of hole will pass freely through the assembled members in a direction at right angles to such members. Finished holes shall not be more than 2 mm in diameter larger than the diameter of the black bolt passing through them, for bolt diameters up to 24 mm, and not more than 3 mm greater than the diameter of the black bolt for bolt diameters over 24 mm, unless otherwise specified by the Engineer. Holes for close tolerance and barrel bolts shall be drilled to a diameter equal to the nominal diameter of the shank or barrel subject to a tolerance of +0.15 mm and -0 mm. Preferably, parts to be connected with close tolerance or barrel bolts shall be firmly held together by tacking bolts or clamps and the holes drilled through all the thickness at one operation and

Page 4 of 18

subsequently reamed to size. All holes not drilled through all thickness at one operation shall be drilled to a smaller size and reamed out after assembly. Where this is not practicable, the parts shall be drilled and reamed separately through hard bushed steel jigs. Holes for rivets or bolts shall not be formed by a gas cutting process. 1.3.5 Assembly. The component parts shall be assembled in such a manner that they are neither twisted nor otherwise damaged, and shall be so prepared that the specified cambers, if any, are provided. All tubular members shall be sealed so as to prevent the access of moisture to the inside of the members. 1.3.6 Where necessary, washers shall be tapered or otherwise suitably shaped to give the heads and nuts of bolts a satisfactory bearing. The threaded portion of each bolt shall project through the nut at least one thread clear. In addition, at least one thread plus the thread run-out shall remain between the nut and the unthreaded shank of the bolt. In all cases where the full bearing area of the bolt is to be developed, the bolt shall be provided with a washer of sufficient thickness under the nut to avoid any threaded portion of the bolt being within the thickness of the parts bolted together. Where a tubular member is drilled to take bolts or studs, provision shall be made to prevent the access of moisture to the interior of the tube. For example, a transverse sleeve can be inserted where a bolt passes through a tube, or grommets can be used under heads and nuts. 1.3.7 High strength friction grip bolts where employed, shall be used in accordance with BS 4604, Part 1, with modifications and additions given below. All bolts shall be provided with hardened steel washers under both head and nut. The washers shall be suitably levelled where the angle between the bolt axis and the steel bearing surfaces is outside the limit of 90o + 1o. Each bolt shall be tightened to its specific proof load and the required induced tension shall be indicated by the compression of protrusions on the bolt head. Load indication washers will not be accepted. Before any bolt of a group is finally tightened all bolts of the group shall be part-tightened in the correct sequence by applying a bedding torque as given in the following table. After the bedding torque has been applied to each bolt, the further tightening of the bolts shall be carried out strictly in accordance with the requirements on the site assembly drawing until the gap under the load indicating bolt head has been reduced to the specified dimension. Any bolt which in the opinion of the Engineer has been over tightened shall be removed and replaced by a fresh bolt. Table 1.1 : Bedding Torque to be Applied

Page 5 of 18

NOMINAL DIAMETER OF BOLT (mm) BEDDING TORQUE (Nm)
MIN 20 22 24 27 100 125 155 200
MAX 200 250 310 400
The Contractor shall submit site assembly drawings for acceptance of the Engineer giving full details for the proper assembly of each joint. The drawings shall show the exact sequence for tightening all the bolts, of whatever kind, in the structure, the number of tightening cycles, and the torque to be applied at each stage of the work. The Contractor shall ensure that the steelwork is fabricated and erected strictly in accordance with the Drawings and shall ensure that all friction grip surfaces are fully in contact. High strength friction grip bolts shall not be used for erection or pulling up purposes. Bolts used for this purpose must be removed after use and not left in the permanent works.
1.3.8
Welding of structural steelwork shall comply with BS EN 1011-1. The temperature of steels welded in accordance with BS EN 1011-1 shall not be lower than 10C when welding is commenced. The manufacture, classification, code and size of electrodes shall be to the acceptance of the Engineer. Electrodes and fluxes shall be so chosen that the properties of the deposited metal are not inferior to those of the parent metal. Electrodes shall be used in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. The welding plant shall be capable of maintaining at the weld the voltage and current specified by the electrode manufacturer. The Contractor shall supply instruments for the verification of such voltages and currents as may be required by the Engineer. Welding shall be carried out under the continuous direction of an experienced and competent supervisor. Operators shall have passed tests, appropriate to the type of work being carried out, as specified in BS EN 287-1 or BS 4872, Part 1, which is to be determined by the Engineer.
1.3.9
Details of the proposed welding procedures together with diagrams showing the build-up of all main welds shall be submitted to the Engineer for acceptance before work is started. Welding procedures shall be such that distortion is reduced to a minimum, and the sequence of welding such that all welds are made under conditions of least possible

Page 6 of 18

restraint. The Engineers acceptance shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for ensuring that distortion in the finished structure is kept to a minimum. Welds shall be kept free from slag or other inclusions, all adhering slag being carefully removed immediately after the completion of each run. Slag and weld spatter shall be removed from surrounding surfaces after welds have been completed. Unless otherwise described on the Drawings, main butt welds shall be complete penetration welds. Run-on and run-off plates of the same thickness and profile as the parent metal shall be attached by means of clamps at each end of the weld. The weld shall extend at full profile for a minimum distance of 25 mm into the run-on and run-off plates. Run-on and run-off plates shall be removed by a method accepted by the Engineer. Additional metal remaining after the removal of the plates shall be removed by grinding or other accepted method. Where butt welds are ground flush there shall be no loss of parent metal. Fillet welds shall be continuous throughout unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or where accepted by the Engineer 1.3.10 Site welding will only be permitted in exceptional circumstances and shall be restricted to welds of a minor nature. The Engineers specific acceptance shall be obtained beforehand in every case and such acceptance shall be subject to the proper conditions for welding being obtained. The Engineer may direct the Contractor to prepare and test specimens in accordance with BS 709 and BS EN 1435. When tests are on butt welds, the specimens shall be obtained from run-on plates of 100 mm minimum length. The Contractor shall make radiographic examinations of welds where necessary. Welds which, in the opinion of the Engineer, have any serious defects shall be cut out and renewed to the acceptance of the Engineer. Stanchion splices and butt joints of compression members dependent on contact for the transmission of compressive stresses, shall be accurately prepared to butt so that the permitted stress in bearing is not exceeded nor eccentricity of loading created which would induce secondary bending in the members. Stanchion caps and bases shall be prepared in a similar manner to the above, and where this is obtained by machining, care shall be taken that any attached gussets, connecting angles or channels are fixed with such accuracy that they are not reduced in thickness by more than 2 mm. Each piece of steelwork shall be distinctly marked before delivery, in accordance with a marking diagram, and shall bear such other marks as will facilitate erection. ACCESS LADDERS, HANDRAILING AND FLOORING Access ladders shall comply with the following requirements: (i) (ii) Single run ladders shall comply with BS 4211. Stair treads for ladders shall be a galvanised steel anti-skid grating.
1.3.11
1.3.12
8.3.13
1.4 1.4.1

Page 7 of 18

(iii) Handrailing shall be 40 mm nominal diameter boregalvanised steel tubing with thickness of 3.25 mm. The lengths of tubing shall be joined together with internal sleeves and concealed screws. Handrail standards shall be of solid forged steel approximately 40 mm in diameter and 3.25 mm thickness with balls and welded plate feet or side palms as required. Bolts, nuts and washers shall be hot dip galvanised or sherardized.
(iv) (v) 1.4.2
Open mesh floor panels shall be expanded steel diamond mesh open steel flooring 25 mm deep, medium duty. Chequer plate shall be of raised leaf pattern, 10 mm thick over the chequers, of accepted manufacture. Access ladders and handrailing shall be finished to System 1, and flooring to System 2, as defined in Clause 8.7 of this Specification. ERECTION All stages of the erection procedure (including any temporary or permanent fastenings) shall be to the acceptance of the Engineer. The Engineers acceptance of the erection procedure shall not prejudice the Contractor's responsibility under the Contract. In particular, and without affecting the generality of this Clause, the Contractor shall ensure that the following requirements are met: (i) (ii) The structure shall be correct to the dimensions given on the Drawings after erection has been completed and all finishing and surfacing added. Permanent bolts shall not be used as service bolts during erection where such use is, in the opinion of the Engineer, liable to cause damage to the protective treatment provided to the bolt. The Contractor shall be responsible for any loss or damage which may be caused by handling and erection of steelwork or by any of his plant. Damage to any part of the structure shall be reported to the Engineer before remedial work is started. Remedial work shall be to the acceptance of the Engineer. Damaged steel or material shall not be used in the Works unless accepted by the Engineer.
1.4.3
1.4.4
1.5 1.5.1
(iii)
(iv)
The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the correct levels and positions of steelwork within the following tolerances: for line and level for plumb : : 5 mm 5 mm per 10 metres of height

Page 8 of 18

1.5.2 Foundation bolts shall be cast in to the dimensions shown on the Drawings. The projecting ends of bolts shall be well greased and wrapped in sacking which shall remain in position until the commencement of steelwork erection. Prior to delivery of steelwork for erection, the Contractor shall check concrete bases or other seating for level, setting out, projection and full degree of adjustment of holding-down bolts or other fixings and ensure they are in accordance with the Drawings. The Contractor shall remedy any discrepancies or inaccuracies to the acceptance of the Engineer. Modification to the steelwork or fixings, bending of holding-down bolts, or the use of an excessive number of washers to accommodate errors in position and projection of bolts or fixings shall not be carried out except with the written permission of the Engineer. After final levelling, alignment of the steelwork, and installation of anchor bolts, the damaged existing screed shall be made good with an accepted epoxy mortar. The epoxy mortar mix and method of placing shall be submitted to the Engineer for his acceptance prior to the commencement of work. 1.5.4 The erection tolerances shall comply with BS 5950 : Part 2 : 1992 : Section 7.3
1.5.3
1.6 1.6.1
STEELWORKS - PROTECTION AGAINST CORROSION General
1.6.1.1 Protective work shall be carried out in accordance with the relevant clauses of BS 5493 : 1977. 1.6.1.2 All paints shall comply with SS 5, SS 6, SS 7, SS 34, BS 7956 where applicable unless otherwise stated. In addition paints for steelwork shall comply with the following requirements: (a) All paints forming part of any one painting system shall be obtained from the same manufacturer. Paint shall be supplied in sealed containers of a capacity, unless otherwise accepted by the Engineer, of not more than 20 litres. Each container shall be clearly marked with the manufacturer's name, paint type, colour, production batch number, date of manufacture and pot life. Prior to the commencement of painting of steelwork, the Contractor shall submit for the Engineers acceptance a full specification of the paint or paints he proposes to order, together with the name of the manufacturer whose paint he proposes to use. If instructed to do so by the Engineer, he shall supply liquid samples of the various paints concerned for examination and testing. No paint shall be used without the prior acceptance of the Engineer.
(b)

Page 9 of 18

Paint that exceeds the shelf life specified on the container by the manufacturer, or paint that in the opinion of the Engineer has deteriorated and is not fit for use shall be rejected. 1.6.1.3 Primers and paints shall be applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations and shall be carried out by skilled painters under the supervisor provided by the paint supplier. 1.6.2 Application
1.6.2.1 Except where otherwise specified or where accepted by the Engineer, protective treatment shall be carried out in the steelwork fabricator's works after fabrication. Shop treatment shall be carried out in a weather-proof structure under clean, dry conditions. Paint shall not be applied when the relative humidity is in excess of 85 per cent, or when the surface temperature is less than 3oC above the dew point temperature, or when the temperature of the surface to which the coating is applied, is greater than 55C. Steelworks of which the application of treatment has started shall be protected from external atmospheric conditions until completion of the treatment and the subsequent curing period. 1.6.2.2 Paints shall be used strictly in order of delivery from the manufacturer. Paint shall not be used after the expiration of the pot-life stipulated by the manufacturer, and paints of limited pot-life shall not be mixed with fresh paint or have thinners added to them. 1.6.2.3 Painting processes and methods shall be to the acceptance of the Engineer. All tools, solvents and plant used shall be such as to obtain the best possible results and shall be maintained in good condition throughout 1.6.2.4 Each coat of paint shall be applied by the methods specified, or by other methods accepted by the Engineer, so as to produce a continuous film of paint of uniform and even thickness. Successive coats shall be of a different shade so that the coverage of each coat is clearly visible. Each coat shall be thoroughly dry and cleaned of all dust and loose paint before the application of a further coat. Where required by the Engineer, surfaces shall be cleaned by washing down with a solution of accepted liquid detergent, followed by rinsing with clean, fresh water. 1.6.2.5 Following the application of the final shop coat on any member, a curing period of not less than 36 hours shall be allowed before exposure to external atmospheric conditions. 1.6.2.6 Wherever practicable, successive coats in paint systems should differ in colour. However, manufacturer's recommendations in respect of the colours of the undercoats and first coat should be observed. 1.6.3 Blast Cleaning

Page 10 of 18

1.6.3.1 Blast-cleaning where specified shall be carried out in accordance with BS 7079, but to give a surface finish Sa 2.5 to ISO 8501-1. The maximum grade of abrasive shall be as specified in Table 2 of BS 7079. The abrasive shall be free from contamination, and recovered material shall be cleaned to the acceptance of the Engineer before re-use. Non-metallic (containing Silica) abrasives shall not be used. The blast-cleaned surface shall have a surface profile height between 50 and 100 microns. 1.6.3.2 Blast-cleaned steelwork shall be free from dust, mill scale and adherent particles. The first coat of primer shall be applied by an accepted airless spray process with the least possible delay, and in any case within 2 hours of blast cleaning. The successive coats shall be applied within the time periods specified by the manufacturer. Suitable masks shall be provided at friction grip bolted connections to ensure that the friction surfaces are kept free of primer and paint. 1.6.4 Galvanising Galvanising for articles and products after fabrication shall be in accordance with BS 729, Part 1. The steelwork shall be pickled in dilute muriatic acid, then stoved and dipped in a bath of spelter. Each article shall be covered evenly on all sides with zinc to give an additional weight of 0.60 kg per sq. m of surface covered and shall be free from runs. Unless otherwise accepted by the Engineer, cold formed or cold worked steel sections shall not be hot dip galvanised. Subject to the acceptance of the Engineer, light steel section used in the interior of buildings for supporting light architectural finishes may be fabricated from steel sheets or plates. The steel sheets or plates shall be hot dip galvanised in accordance to BS EN 10143. Except when otherwise permitted by the Engineer, the designation of the steel shall be BS EN 10143 sheet Z25G - 275 or of higher quality in terms of strength and corrosion protection. 1.6.5 Cleaning Mechanical cleaning where specified shall be carried out by power-driven steel-wire brushes to give a surface finish St 2 to ISO 8501-1. Brushes shall be of appropriate shapes so as to ensure adequate preparation of the whole surface. All dust shall be removed by vacuum cleaning.
1.6.6
Handling Lifting and handling methods used during the protective treatment and in subsequent transport, storage and erection shall be such as to ensure that damage to the treatment is kept to the absolute minimum. Such damage as does occur shall be made good by cleaning to bare metal and re-applying the full painting system. The new paint shall overlap the existing paint by at least 50 mm all round the affected part.
1.6.7
Storage

Page 11 of 18

1.6.7.1 Where it is necessary to store painted fabricated steelwork prior to erection, it shall be kept clear of the ground and stacked in such a manner as to ensure that no pools of water or dust accumulate on the surfaces. Suitable packing shall be provided between layers of stacked steelwork. Covers, when provided, shall be well ventilated. 1.6.7.2 Steelworks delivered to site which, in the opinion of the Engineer, is not in accordance with this Specification for cleaning and shop painting shall be returned to the steelwork fabricator's works. The existing painting system shall be completely removed and the full system re-applied to the acceptance of the Engineer. 1.6.8 Bolts, Nuts and Washers
1.6.8.1 Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, all bolts, nuts and washers shall be hot dipped galvanised in accordance with BS 729 or sherardized in accordance with BS 7371, Part 8 and shall be further prepared and coated to the same standard as the adjacent surfaces. Subject to the acceptance of the Engineer, electroplated threaded components complying with BS 3382 may be used for supporting light interior architectural finishes of less than 20 kg/m2. 1.6.8.2 All contact surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned by hand wire brushing or similar means immediately prior to being brought together. 1.6.8.3 After tightening, bolt heads, nuts and washers shall be thoroughly cleaned and exposed surfaces painted with an accepted two-packed non-phenolic etch primer followed by the appropriate full system of primers and paints. Special care shall be taken at friction grip bolted connections to ensure that paint is well worked into the gaps between the load indicating protrusions. 1.6.9 Partially Encased Steelwork Refer to Clause 8.7.3.
1.7
PROTECTIVE SYSTEMS The following specification is applicable to all steelwork including steelwork used in subframes to architectural finishes, louvre panels and the like, with the exception of the following: stainless steel - no protective system required steelwork embedded in concrete - no protective system required covers and gratings - to be galvanised only

Page 12 of 18

bracket and services fixings, hangers and tray work - to be galvanised only 1.7.1 System Applications Systems 1, 2, 3 and 4 are for the following applications : System 1 Steelwork not visible to the public. System 2 Steelwork visible to the public (Alternative 1). System 3 Steelwork visible to the public (Alternative 2). Systems 2A and 3A are normal repair procedures to Systems 2 and 3 respectively. System 3B is a less demanding repair procedure to System 3A suitable for rafters, purlins and the like. System 4 Steelwork exposed to highly aggressive environmental conditions. 1.7.2 Detail of Systems Refer to Table 8.2. 1.7.2.1 Galvanising Hot-dipped galvanising shall be in accordance with Clause 1.6.4. 1.7.2.2 Degreasing Degreasing shall be carried out using a water-based degreaser. The emulsified residue shall be washed off with a copious amount of fresh water. Trapped water in crevices shall be blown out with clean dry compressed air. Degreasing and washing shall be repeated where necessary to the acceptance of the Engineer.
1.7.2.3 Blast Cleaning Prior to blast cleaning, any heavy layers of rust shall be removed by chipping. Visible oil, grease and dirt shall also be removed. Blast cleaning shall be carried out to ISO 8501-1, Sa 2 grade to the acceptance of the Engineer. After blast cleaning, the steelwork surface shall be cleaned of loose dust and debris. 1.7.2.4 Solvent Cleaning

Page 13 of 18

The steelwork shall be solvent cleaned to remove all contamination and then washed with clean, fresh water. Trapped water in crevices shall be blown out with clean dry compressed air. Solvent cleaning shall be repeated where necessary to the acceptance of the Engineer. 1.7.2.5 Hand and Power Tool Cleaning Any heavy layers of rust shall be removed by chipping. Visible oil, grease and dirt shall also be removed. Hand and power tool cleaning shall be carried out to ISO 8501-1, St 3 grade to the acceptance of the Engineer. After hand and power tool cleaning, the steelwork surface shall be cleaned of loose dust and debris. 1.7.2.6 Grinding Grinding shall include the removal of protruding or uneven surfaces of the damaged steelwork and paintwork. 1.7.3 Partially Embedded Steelwork For steelwork that is partially embedded in concrete the coating shall extend for 100mm beyond the exposed area. 1.8 1.8.1 COATING SPECIFICATION The properties of the coatings shall be as follows: A. Two-Pack Epoxy Zinc Rich Primer two component epoxy polyamide cured high flash point fast drying at least 85% zinc content in the dry film at least 60% volume solids
B.
Two-Pack Epoxy Micaceous Iron Oxide High Build Primer two component epoxy polyamide cured high build product indefinite period for overcoating designed to be used as sealer coat over zinc epoxy primer micaceous iron oxide pigmentation at least 65% volume solids

Page 14 of 18

C. Two-Pack Epoxy Fade Resistant Chemical Resistant Pigmented Paint High Build Paint D. two component epoxy polyamide cured high build product resistant to fumes and spillage of mild acids, alkalis, salts and solvents chemical and weather resistant pigmentation at least 60% volume solids
Two-Pack Polyurethane Fade-Resistant Chemical Resistant Pigmented Finish Paint two component polyurethane isocyanate cured very high gloss finish high abrasion resistance excellent chemical and solvent resistance chemical and weather resistant pigmentation at least 60% volume solids
E.
Surface Tolerant Epoxy Primer two component epoxy aromatic amine cured designed for use over surface finish St 3 grade to ISO 8501-1. high film thickness achievable by brush application aluminium paste pigmentation good chemical and solvent resistant long overcoating time-up to 6 months with polyurethane at least 80% volume solids
F.
Inorganic Zinc Silicate Primer two component zinc silicate ethyl primer at least 85% zinc content in dry film temperature resistant up to 400 0C at least 60% volume solids
G.
Epoxy Primer For Galvanised/Stainless/Carbon Steel Surfaces two component epoxy polyamide cured at least 57% solids ratio by volume.
H.
Two-pack Tar Free Epoxy two component high solids polyamine adduct cured tar free at least 80% solids ratio by volume. mixing ratio of base and hardener by volume 75:25. epoxy.

Page 15 of 18

1.8.2 Checking of Coating Continuity and Thickness The Contractor shall institute a quality control system that is acceptable to the Engineer to check the continuity and thickness of paint or metal coatings with the aid of approved electronic measuring devices which are capable of measuring the resistance of the coatings. Measurements shall comply with the recommendations of SS 5. 1.8.3 Compatibility The Contractor must ensure that all paints within a system have compatibility between coats and with the metal substrate. There should be adequate adhesion to substrate and between coats over the operating temperature range and there should be no undersoftening to cause lifting, wrinkling or bleeding through of stains. Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, all components of a paint system shall be from the same manufacturer. 1.8.4 Toxicity All paints and coatings must be non-toxic and shall not create a toxic hazard during application. All paints and coatings shall not produce toxic fumes or other toxic materials when exposed to fire, so as not to cause risk to human health. The Contractor shall submit test certificates from reputable testing laboratories, which are acceptable to the Engineer attesting to the non-toxicity of the paints and coating. 1.9 FIRE PROTECTION All structural steel members except roof members shall be one and a half hour fire-rated by means of spraying or other methods which might be approved by the Engineer. Fire protection coat shall be of uniform and adequate thickness and shall be applied in strict accordance with the manufacturers instructions.

Page 16 of 18

Table 1.2 : Detail of Systems
System 1 Blast clean Galvanise. Degrease. System 2 Blast clean 1 coat of shopapplied Coating A. Min D.F.T 40 microns. 1 coat of shopapplied Coating B. Min D.F.T 100 microns. 1 coat of shopapplied Coating C. Min D.F.T 125 microns. Solvent clean. System 2A Hand and Power Tool clean. 1 coat of siteapplied Coating E. Min D.F.T 40 microns. Solvent clean. System 3 Blast clean Galvanise. Degrease. System 3A Degrease. Grind as necessary. System 3B Degrease. Grind as necessary System 4 Blast clean Galvanise Degrease.
Step 1 Step 2 Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
1 coat of shopapplied Coating G. Min D.F.T 80 microns. 2 coats of shopapplied Coating C. Min D.F.T 80 microns per coat.
Step 6
2 coats of siteapplied Coating C. Min D.F.T 125 microns per coat. 1 coat of siteapplied Coating D. Min D.F.T 50 microns.
1 coat of shopapplied Coating G. Min D.F.T 80 microns. 2 coats of shopapplied Coating C. Min D.F.T 80 microns per coat. 1 coat of shopapplied Coating D. Min D.F.T 50 microns.
Power clean.
Power clean.
1 coat of siteapplied Coating G. Min D.F.T 80 microns. 2 coats of siteapplied Coating C. Min D.F.T 80 microns per coat. 1 coat of siteapplied Coating D. Min D.F.T 50 microns. 290 microns.
1 coat of siteapplied Coating B. Min D.F.T 80 microns. 1 coat of siteapplied Coating D. Min D.F.T 50 microns.
1 coat of shopapplied Coating G. Min D.F.T 80 microns. 2 coats of shopapplied Coating H. Min D.F.T 150 microns per coat.
Step 7
Minimum Total Dry Film Thickness (D.F.T)
240 microns (excluding galvanising)
1 coat of siteapplied Coating D. Min D.F.T 50 microns. 315 microns.
340 microns.
290 microns. (excluding galvanising)
130 microns.
380 microns. (excluding galvanising)
Specification of Coatings A to H are given in Clause 1.8 Note : System 3 is preferred when compared to System 2

Page 17 of 18
Proposed Upgrading of Existing St. Stephen's School
DECLARATION/UNDERTAKING Note : This section must be fully completed by Tenderer (including furnishing all information as required) for Price-Quality Method (PQM) evaluation purposes
1. PERSONS EMPOWERED TO ACT The following persons are empowered to sign contract documents and act on my firms/company s behalf for this project: Name NRIC No. Position Held
2.
GST STATUS OF FIRM Non-taxable under the GST Act * Taxable under the GST Act * The GST Registration No. is : (A photocopy of the Certificate of Registration for goods & Services Tax shall be enclosed)
* Tick where applicable.
DC/ 1
DECLARATION/UNDERTAKING
3. SUB-CONTRACTORS TO BE EMPLOYED
I/We confirm that my/our specialist sub-contractors are BCA/MOF-EPPU registered companies under the appropriate work heads and financial limit. I/We further agree that these firms are not debarred from tendering of Government projects. This specialist sub-contractor shall be subjected to the SO s approval. The Information of my specialist sub-contractors are as follows:a. Demolition Works Name of Sub-Contractor BCA Registration Category Financial Classification b. Piling Works :___________________________________________________ :___________________________________________________ :___________________________________________________
Name of Sub-Contractor BCA Registration Category Financial Classification c.
:___________________________________________________ :___________________________________________________ :___________________________________________________
Structural Steelwork & Post Tension Works
Name of Sub-Contractor BCA Registration Category Financial Classification
:___________________________________________________ :___________________________________________________ :___________________________________________________
d.
Pre-Cast Works Name of Sub-Contractor BCA Registration Category Financial Classification :___________________________________________________ :___________________________________________________ :___________________________________________________
DC/ 2
e. Fitment Name of Sub-Contractor BCA Registration Category Financial Classification f. :___________________________________________________ :___________________________________________________ :___________________________________________________
Air-conditioning, Refrigeration & Ventilation Works Name of Sub-Contractor BCA Registration Category Financial Classification :___________________________________________________ :___________________________________________________ :___________________________________________________
g.
Communications and Security Systems
:___________________________________________________ :___________________________________________________ :___________________________________________________
h.
Electrical Engineering Works Name of Sub-Contractor BCA Registration Category Financial Classification :___________________________________________________ :___________________________________________________ :___________________________________________________
i.
Fire Prevention and Protection Works Name of Sub-Contractor BCA Registration Category Financial Classification :___________________________________________________ :___________________________________________________ :___________________________________________________
DC/ 3
j. Lift & Escalator Installation Works Name of Sub-Contractor BCA Registration Category Financial Classification k. Plumbing & Sanitary Works Name of Sub-Contractor BCA Registration Category Financial Classification l. Pest Control :___________________________________________________ :___________________________________________________ :___________________________________________________ :___________________________________________________ :___________________________________________________ :___________________________________________________
:___________________________________________________ :___________________________________________________ :___________________________________________________
m.
Others Name of Sub-Contractor BCA Registration Category Financial Classification :___________________________________________________ :___________________________________________________ :___________________________________________________
DC/ 4
4. AWARDS
Please furnish a copy of any certificates issued by the relevant authorities with regards to any of the achievements listed below for past 3 years. Failure to submit the certificates will reveal the achievements not being considered. Awards ( tick the appropriate box only) BCA
Others (please specify)
DC/ 5
5. TIMELINESS, TRACK RECORDS & QUALITY PERFORMANCE
DETAILS OF COMPLETED BUILDING PROJECTS THE FIRM HAS BEEN THE APPOINTED MAIN CONTRACTOR IN THE LAST 3 YEARS No. Description of Project Name, Address, Tel & Fax of Employer / Client Details of Work Project Value* Date of Contractual Commencement & completion Actual date of completion LD (days), if any CONQUAS Score
MOE School Projects With CONQUAS score
Without CONQUAS score
Other Projects With CONQUAS score
Without CONQUAS score
* If unit of currency is foreign, please provide the equivalent in Singapore Dollars. Note: 1. Contractor to strictly adhere to this declaration form. To make additional copies (as necessary) for detailed submission. DC/ 6
6. CURRENT WORKLOAD: SCHEDULE OF CURRENT PROJECTS UNDERTAKEN BY THE FIRM No. Description of Project Name, Address, Tel & Fax of Employer / Client Details of Work Stage of Project Overall Project Value* (a) Value based on work done* (b) Balance of Project Value* (a)-(b) Date of Commencement Date of Completion
MOE School Projects
Other Projects
* If unit of currency is foreign, please provide the equivalent in Singapore Dollars. Note: Contractor to strictly adhere to this declaration form. To make additional copies (as necessary) for detailed submission. DC/ 7
7. EXPERIENCE IN PRECAST CONSTRUCTION Please furnish particulars of projects executed by your firm in the last three years which you have experience in precast construction. Description of Project + Name & Address of Client Name & Address of Architect or Consultant Value of Contract * Percentage Participation in Project Precast Elements @ Structural Element Non-Structural Element Date of Commencement & Completion Name of Associated Firms (if any) & described Scope of Involvement
+ Indicate location (country) if project was not in Singapore. * If unit of currency is foreign, please give the equivalent in Singapore Dollars. @ List the precast elements and the percentage content in the project. DC/ 8
Proposed Upgrading of Existing St. Stephen's School 8. FINANCIAL CAPACITY Please furnish the following information relating to the financial position of the firm. a) b) c) d) Authorised Capital: Present Paid-Up Capital: Accumulated Reserves / Losses: Annual Turnover over the last three (3) financial years:
Year Singapore Overseas Total:
e)
Financial Statement Attach as an Appendix to your submission: i) A copy of Audited Financial Report for the last three (3) years ii) A copy of up-to-date Registry of Company and Businesses Computer Information Business Profile together with the tender submission
f)
DP Rating Tenderer to declare current DP Rating Standing.
9.
FINANCIAL CAPACITY a) Is your firm intending to enter into any financial arrangement such as factoring agreement for this project?
Yes / No If yes, please provide details for the financial arrangement. b) Does your firm have any financial arrangement such as factoring agreement for other Ministry of Educations projects? Yes / No (*Note: Please note that pursuant to PSSCOC Clause 30.1, all assignments of interests, rights or benefits must be approved by the Employer in writing. Otherwise, it will not be binding on the Employer).
DC/ 9
10. PROJECT SPECIFIC PROPOSAL
TECHNICAL PROPOSAL/WRITEUP: UNDERSTANDING OF REQUIREMENTS & CONSTRAINTS OF PROJECT The tenderer shall submit a write up to demonstrate their understanding of the Employers requirements and constraints and to propose how these would be addressed. It shall include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Approach to Work Method of Construction Programme of work Site Safety Management Program Commitment on Site Management
DC/10
11. PROFESSIONAL/TECHNICAL STAFF TO BE ASSIGNED TO PROJECT
Submit details of Project Manager, C&S Engineer, Architectural Co-ordinator & M&E Co-ordinator (according to Specifications Site Management team) No. Name Designation Nationality NRIC No./ Passport No. Qualifications Years of Relevant Experience School Construction Experience, if any
Project Manager C&S Engineer Architectural Co-ordinator M&E Engineer / Co-ordinator Safety Officer Others (please specify) :-
The above proposed Site Management Staff shall be employed full-time at site from Contract Commencement Date to Contract Completion Date or other extended time periods as may be applicable under the provisions of the Contract. Please enclose the curriculum vitae for each of the above professional/technical staff to be deployed on this project. The information given shall include the following: Name NRIC/Passport No. Nationality Present position Years with the firm Qualification Year and type of experience (in particular related to similar projects) Project value and involvement
DC/11
12. DECLARATION ON LEGAL STANDING DETAILS OF LEGAL ISSUES THAT THE FIRM IS INVOLVED CURRENTLY Name of Project Client/Subcontractor Details of legal issue
No.
DC/12
Proposed Upgrading of Existing St. Stephen's School DECLARATION/UNDERTAKING 13. INFORMATION ON MAJOR SHAREHOLDERS Person, Company or Corporation which owns, whether directly or indirectly, at least 50% of the total number of shares in the tenderer Name Address Details of shares held by such person, company or corporation Number of Shares % of Shares Class of Shares
DC/13
Proposed Upgrading of Existing St. Stephen's School DECLARATION/UNDERTAKING 14. DECLARATION
The undersigned hereby certify that to the best of my knowledge, the particulars given in the application forms for the PQM exercise are true and correct. The employer, or its representative, is authorised to make direct enquiries, request for information and make references to any person, firm, public official or organisation named in the submission to verify the information submitted herein or regarding the competence and general reputation of the firm.
Signature Name & Designation (Director) NRIC/Passport No. Date
: ___________________________________________ : ___________________________________________ : ___________________ : ___________________
For and on Behalf of Name of Firm & Company stamp Address
: ___________________________________________ : ___________________________________________ ___________________________________________ ___________________________________________
Telephone No.
: ___________________
Signatures of Witness Name NRIC/Passport Name of Firm & Company Stamp Date
: ___________________________________________ : ___________________________________________ : ___________________________________________
: ___________________________________________ : ___________________
DC/14
Proposed Upgrading of Existing St. Stephen's School UNDERTAKING TO SAFEGUARD OFFICIAL INFORMATION
My attention has been drawn to the Official Secrets Act (Chapter 213, Revised Edition 2012) and in particular to Section 5 thereof which relates to the safeguarding of official information. 2 I understand and agree that all official information acquired by me in the course of my work and consultancy with any government department, statutory board or government-owned company is strictly confidential in nature, and is not to be published or communicated by me to any unauthorised person in any form at any time, without the official sanction of the relevant Permanent Secretary or the Chief Executive Officer of the statutory board or government-owned company. 3 I further understand and agree that any breach or neglect of this undertaking may render me liable to prosecution under the Official Secrets Act.
.. (Signature of Officer)
.. (Full name in BLOCKS and NRIC)
.. (Designation)
.. (Name of Company)
_____________________ (Date)
(Signature of WITNESS)
____________________ (Full name in BLOCKS)
__________________ (Designation)
__________________________ Ministry/Government Dept/Statutory Board/Government-owned Company
_____________________ (Date)
DCS/1
MAINTENANCE OF WATER COOLER / WATER DISPENSER The Contractor is required as part of his tender submission to offer an optional maintenance contract for the coolers/dispenser installed after the guarantee period. a) Water Cooler Replacement of cartridge Maintenance contract after guarantee period (option to be exercised by School) b) Hot and Cold Water Dispenser Replacement of cartridge Maintenance contract after guarantee period (option to be exercised by School) $ 60.00 per piece $ 200.00 per annum per dispenser $ 60.00 per piece $ 200.00 per annum per cooler
The Contractor shall deem to have read and agreed to the use of the rates contained above. The Contractor also agreed that the prices stated above shall remain valid and binding and shall not be withdrawn at any time before the end of the Defects Liability Period of the Contract. The undersigned further agrees that in the event of acceptance of the above stated offer by exercising the option, to execute a formal Maintenance Agreement with, and submit the Security Deposit to the Employer or School. The cost of servicing per annum (after Defects Liability Period) shall include all transportation, equipment, labour, material, parts, etc that are necessary to perform the maintenance required. The Contractor shall comply with the maintenance schedule for the coolers / dispensers all as specified in the Contract (Appendix).
Signature of Contractors
Signature of Witness
Full Name in Block Letters
Full Name in Block Letters
Designation
Designation
Company Stamp
DCW/1
Proposed Upgrading of Existing St. Stephen's School APPENDIX A - LIST OF DRAWINGS
Drawing No. Architectural
Title
Refer to Architects Team 3 Pte Ltd's drawing list
Structural Refer to ECAES-EJ Consultants Pte Ltd's drawing list
Mechanical & Electrical Refer to HY M & E Consultancy Services Pte Ltd's drawing list
AA/1
Proposed Upgrading of Existing St. Stephen's School APPENDIX B PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE (FOR NON-FIXED PERIOD CONTRACTS) To: ___________________________ and his successors in office for and on behalf of the St. Stephen's School, The Visitor In Singapore of The Christian Brothers' Schools (hereinafter called "the Employer"). Whereas on the _____ day of _____________ an Agreement (hereinafter called "the Contract") was made between _______________________ (name of Contractor) of ______________ (address) (hereinafter called "the Contractor") of the one part and the Employer of the other part whereby the Employer agreed to ____________ _________________ (state nature of contract) for the sum of Singapore Dollars ______________ (S$ ___________ ). And Whereas the Contractor is required under the Contract to pay ___ per cent of the total value of the Contract as a Security Deposit for the performance of his obligations under the Contract. Now in consideration of the Employer not insisting on the Contractor paying ___ per cent of the total value of the Contract as a security deposit for the said Contract, we (at the request of the Contractor) hereby agree as follows: 1 In the event of the Contractor failing to fulfil any of the terms and conditions of the said contract, we shall indemnify the Employer against all losses, damages, costs, expenses or otherwise sustained by the Employer thereby up to the sum of Singapore Dollars _________ (S$ _______ ) ("the Guaranteed Sum") upon receiving your written notice of claim for payment made pursuant to Clause 4 hereof. 2 We shall not be discharged or released from this guarantee by any arrangement between yourself and the Contractor with or without our consent or by any alteration in the obligations undertaken by the Contractor or by any forbearance whether as to payment, time, performance or otherwise. 3 Our liability under this guarantee shall continue and this guarantee shall remain in full force and effect from [insert effective date: contract commencement date] until [insert initial expiry date: contract end date plus DLP plus 6 months] [insert if expiry date is subject to automatic extention: provided always that the expiry date of this guarantee and our liability thereunder shall be automatically extended for successive periods of [specify duration of each extension: 6 days / months] unless we give you 90 days' written notice prior to the expiry of our liability of our intention not to extend this guarantee in respect of any future extension and provided further that you shall be entitled, upon receiving such notice of our intention (and within the period specified in Clause 4 hereof), either to: (a) * (b) make a claim under this guarantee; or direct us to pay such amount (not exceeding the Guaranteed Sum) as you may specify into a suspense account to be governed and disbursed by us subject to the Association of Banks in Singapore's Guidelines for operation of a Suspense Account; or direct us to extend the validity of this guarantee for a further period not exceeding 6 days / months (and this guarantee shall then expire at the end of such further period)].
(c)
4 This guarantee is conditional upon a claim or direction as specified herein being made by you by way of a notice in writing addressed to us and the same being received by us at [insert address of Banks notification office: ___________________ ] within 90 days from the expiry of this guarantee. Thereafter this guarantee shall become null and void notwithstanding that this guarantee is not returned us for cancellation except for any claim(s) or direction submitted to us in writing not later than 90 days from the expiry of this guarantee.
* Not applicable for Insurance Bond issued by insurance companies
AB/1
Proposed Upgrading of Existing St. Stephen's School APPENDIX B PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE (FOR NON-FIXED PERIOD CONTRACTS)
5 We shall be obliged to effect the payment required under such a claim or direction within 30 business days of our receipt thereof. We shall be under no duty to inquire into the reasons, circumstances or authenticity of the grounds for such claim or direction and shall be entitled to rely upon any written notice thereof received by us (within the period specified in Clause 4 hereof) as final and conclusive. 6 The Employer may make more than one claim on, or direction under, this guarantee so long as the claims or directions are made pursuant to Clause 4 hereof and within the period specified therein and the aggregate amount specified in all such claims and directions does not exceed the Guaranteed Sum. 7 This guarantee is issued subject to the laws of the Republic of Singapore and the jurisdiction of the Singapore courts. Dated this _______ day of ______________ AS WITNESS our hand
Signed by: _______________________________ (Name and designation of officer) for and on behalf of the ________________________________ (Name of **Bank/Insurance Company) in the presence of Name ___________________ Designation ______________ _____________________ (Signature of Witness) _____________________ (Signature)
** Delete whichever is not applicable.
AB/2
APPENDIX C1 SPECIMEN OF GUARANTEE
GUARANTEE To: St. Stephen's School The Visitor In Singapore of The Christian Brothers' Schools 20 Siglap View Singapore 455789 Tel: 6241 9513 Fax: 6442 2576
Annex 1
THIS DEED is made the ________day of ________________Two Thousand and _________ (20____) by _________________________________________________________________[name of Specialist] of ___________________________________________________________________________[address] WHEREAS this Deed is supplemental to a Contract (hereinafter called the Principal Contract) dated the _____day of __________________ 20______ and made between _______________________________ [name of Contractor] _________________________________________________________________ of ________________________________________________________________[address] (hereinafter called the Contractor) of the one part and the St. Stephen's School, The Visitor In Singapore of The Christian Brothers' Schools (hereinafter called the the Employer) of the other part whereby the Contractor agreed and undertook to ____________________________________________________________________________________ [state nature of Works & Contract No.] (hereinafter called the Works) for the sum of Dollars: _________________________________________________________________(S$_______________). AND WHEREAS it is provided, inter alia, by the Principal Contract that the Contractor shall execute the whole of the ______________________________ [state nature of Works] works to the satisfaction of the Superintending Officer that the Contractor warrants that the works shall be executed using good materials and with all due care and professional skill, and further warrants. #(a) #(b) #(c) Against any subterranean termite infestation Against water ingress and lack of water tightness of the built-up membrane roofing Against water ingress, lack of water tightness and defects in insulation of the metal roof system. (applicable to roof repairs and grandstand canopy upgrading) Against water ingress and lack of water tightness of the waterproofing system Against any defect, deterioration, failure, lack of fitness, non-satisfaction of performance specifications or other requirements or other faults in the work Against abnormal deterioration, leakage of water and air, structural failure or deformation of components, failure of operating parts, discolouration of finishes, glass leakage or cracking, faulty expansion joints, grouting, sealant compound installation, bimetallic corrosion, delamination of glass and edge separation and staining by sealant. Warranty ensuring the integrity of the film, against colour fading and peeling of coating. Against any corrosion in the metalwork, defect, deterioration, failure, lack of fitness, nonsatisfaction of performance specifications or other requirements or other faults in the galvanising work.
#(d) #(e) #(f)
#(g) #(h)
AC/1
SD2174 MOE Anglo-Chinese School\024_Appendix_C1_Specimen_of_Guarantee
GUARANTEE #(i)
Annex 1
Against any corrosion in the metalwork, defect, deterioration, failure, lack of fitness, nonsatisfaction of performance specifications or other requirements or other faults in the painting work Against peeling, cracking, blistering, blotchiness, loss of gloss, shine, patchiness, fading and discolouration, growth of fungus or other biological organism Against operational defects, moisture related damage, delamination of material, faulty material and workmanship. Against any termite infestation, effectiveness of the acoustic performance, discolouration, cracking, growth of fungus, defects in materials, integrity of fixing system and workmanship. Against excessive surface wear, edge ravel, zippering, discoloration (10% of greater), loss in friction, surface uneveness and peeling. Against any defects in the built up system resulting in peeling/debonding of materials, defects in materials and workmanship, and warranty ensuring the effectiveness of drainage. Against defective materials and poor installation and/or workmanship Warranty ensuring the effectiveness of the system, condensations issues and defects, defects in materials and workmanship, defective materials and poor installation and/or workmanship Against moisture related damage, delamination of material, faulty material and workmanship.
#(j) #(k) #(l)
#(m) #(n) #(o) #(p) #(q)
that is, against any defects whatsoever and howsover arising for a period of ten(10) / five(5) / three(3)# years from the date of Substantial Completion of the Works, that the Contractor shall make good all such defects appearing within the said period of ten(10) / five(5) / three(3)# years from the date of Substantial Completion of the Works at his own expense and to the satisfaction of the SO, and that if the Contractor shall refuse, neglect or fail to do so for any reason whatsoever, within such time as may be specified at the complete discretion of the SO in a notice in writing from the SO to make good any such defect, the Employer shall be entitled to engage others to make good the same and charge the costs thereof to the Contractor. AND WHEREAS it is further provided under the Principal Contract that the Contractor shall furnish to the Employer a written guarantee in respect of the __________________________________________ [state nature of works] works used or applied in the Contract, valid for a period of ten(10) / five(5) / three(3)# years from the date of Substantial Completion of the Works, by a third party acceptable to the Employer, in the form and on the terms set out herein, for the due and faithful observance and performance of the aforesaid covenants and obligations on the Contractors part to be observed and performed throughout the said period of ten(10) / five(5) / three(3)# years.
AC/2
GUARANTEE
Annex 1
AND WHEREAS the Contractor having been required to provide such a guarantee for the due and faithful observance and performance of the aforesaid covenants or obligations on his part to be observed and performed, we at the request of the Contractor have consented to guarantee and the Employer has accepted our guarantee in respect of the due observance and performance of the aforesaid covenants or obligations by the Contractor in the manner hereinafter appearing. NOW THIS DEED WITNESSETH as follows: 1. We hereby guarantee you that if the Contractor shall commit any breach of the aforesaid covenants or obligations on his part contained in the Principal Contract then we shall unconditionally and fully indemnify you against any or all losses, damages, costs, expenses or otherwise, direct or indirect, sustained by you as a result of or in consequence of the breach. This Guarantee is subject to the following conditions: (a) We shall be notified in writing of any non-performance or non-observance on the part of the Contractor of any of the aforesaid covenants or obligations contained in the Principal Contract and on his part to be performed and observed within thirty (30) days after such non-performance or non-observance shall have come to the knowledge of yourself or your representative having supervision of the Principal Contract and a registered letter posted to our aforesaid address shall be the notice required within the meaning of this Deed and you shall permit us to perform the aforesaid covenants or obligations contained in the Principal Contract which the Contractor shall have failed to perform or observe. We shall be released from this Guarantee if the _____________________________ [state nature of works] works are in anyway tampered with either by your servants or agents or by any other person not being our or the Contractors servant or agent. This Guarantee does not cover liability for damage to the _________________________ [state nature of works] works caused by fire, explosion, vibration, structural movement, lightning thunderbolt, earthquake, riot, civil commotion, strikes or labour disturbance. We shall not be discharged or released from this Guarantee by any arrangement made between yourself and the Contractor with or without our consent or by any alteration in the obligations undertaken by the Contractor or by any forbearance whether as to payment, time, performance or otherwise.
2.
(b)
(c)
(d)
3.
Any failure on your part to give the notice required in Clause 2(a) within the time period stated therein or at all shall not render this guarantee or any part thereof void or null in any way PROVIDED ALWAYS that we may recover from you compensation for such reasonable expenses as may actually be incurred by reason for your failure to give the required notice. This Guarantee shall take effect immediately and shall continue in force until ____________[date] [month] [year]* or to any further date to which it is extended by agreement between yourself and ourselves.
4.
AC/3
GUARANTEE
Annex 1
As witness our hands the day and year first above written.
Signed, sealed and delivered by the Abovenamed Designation Name
Signature
in the presence of: Name:
Designation:
Signature:
Address:
# To delete as appropriate * Substantial completion date plus period of guarantee
AC/4
APPENDIX C2 SPECIMEN OF GUARANTEE ROOF WATERPROOFING GUARANTEE To: St. Stephen's School The Visitor In Singapore of The Christian Brothers' Schools 20 Siglap View Singapore 455789 Tel: 6241 9513 Fax: 6442 2576
Annex 2
THIS DEED is made the ________day of ________________Two Thousand and _________ (20____) by _________________________________________________________________[name of Specialist] of ___________________________________________________________________________[address] WHEREAS this Deed is supplemental to a Contract (hereinafter called the Principal Contract) dated the _____day of __________________ 20______ and made between _______________________________ [name of Contractor] _________________________________________________________________ of ________________________________________________________________[address] (hereinafter called the Contractor) of the one part and the St. Stephen's School, The Visitor In Singapore of The Christian Brothers' Schools (hereinafter called the the Employer) of the other part whereby the Contractor agreed and undertook to ____________________________________________________________________________________ [state nature of Works & Contract No.] (hereinafter called the Works) for the sum of Dollars: _________________________________________________________________(S$_______________). AND WHEREAS it is provided, inter alia, by the Principal Contract that the Contractor shall execute the whole of the roof waterproofing works to the satisfaction of the Superintending Officer that the Contractor warrants that the roof waterproofing works shall be executed using good materials and with all due care and professional skill, and further warrants the roof waterproofing works shall be free and remain free from any defects whatsoever and howsoever arising for a period of ten (10) years from the date of Substantial Completion of the Works, that the Contractor shall immediately make good all such defects appearing in the roof waterproofing works within the said period of ten(10) years from the date of Substantial Completion of the Works at his own expense and to the satisfaction of the SO, and that if the Contractor shall refuse, neglect or fail to do so for any reason whatsoever, (a) within forty-eight (48) hours after notice in writing from the SO to make good any such defect, in respect of defects which, in the opinion of the the SO must be remedied promptly to avoid consequential damage or for any reason whatsoever at the complete discretion of the SO; or for all defects, within seven (7) days after notice in writing from the SO to make good any such defect,
(b)
the Employer shall be entitled to engage others to make good the same and charge the costs thereof to the Contractor. AND WHEREAS it is further provided under the Principal Contract that the Contractor shall furnish to the Employer a written guarantee in respect of the roof waterproofing works used or applied in the Contract, valid for a period of ten(10) years from the date of Substantial Completion of the Works, by a third party acceptable to the Employer, in the form and on the terms set out herein, for the due and faithful observance and performance of the aforesaid covenants and obligations on the Contractors part to be observed and performed throughout the said period of ten(10) years. AND WHEREAS the Contractor having been required to provide such a guarantee for the due and faithful observance and performance of the aforesaid covenants or obligations on his part to be observed and performed, we at the request of the Contractor have consented to guarantee and the Employer has accepted our guarantee in respect of the due observance and performance of the aforesaid covenants or obligations by the Contractor in the manner hereinafter appearing.
AC/5
APPENDIX C2 SPECIMEN OF GUARANTEE ROOF WATERPROOFING GUARANTEE

Annex 2
NOW THIS DEED WITNESSETH as follows:
1.
We hereby guarantee you that if the Contractor shall commit any breach of the aforesaid covenants or obligations on his part contained in the Principal Contract then we shall unconditionally and fully indemnify you against any or all losses, damages, costs, expenses or otherwise, direct or indirect, sustained by you as a result of or in consequence of the breach. This Guarantee is subject to the following conditions: (a) We shall be notified in writing of any non-performance or non-observance on the part of the Contractor of any of the aforesaid covenants or obligations contained in the Principal Contract and on his part to be performed and observed within thirty (30) days after such non-performance or non-observance shall have come to the knowledge of yourself or your representative having supervision of the Principal Contract and a registered letter posted to our aforesaid address shall be the notice required within the meaning of this Deed and you shall permit us to perform the aforesaid covenants or obligations contained in the Principal Contract which the Contractor shall have failed to perform or observe. We shall be released from this Guarantee if (i) the roof waterproofing works are in anyway tampered with either by your servants or agents or by any other person not being our or the Contractors servant or agent. (ii) the roof is subjected to traffic other than that for which the roof waterproofing treatment is recommended, or if the roof is submitted to abnormal weight or pressure; or if the roof is in any way built upon including of parapets and the placing on the roof of water tanks or machinery of any kind.
2.
(b)
(c)
This Guarantee does not cover liability for damage to the roof waterproofing works caused by fire, explosion, vibration, structural movement, lightning thunderbolt, earthquake, riot, civil commotion, strikes or labour disturbance. We shall not be discharged or released from this Guarantee by any arrangement made between yourself and the Contractor with or without our consent or by any alteration in the obligations undertaken by the Contractor or by any forbearance whether as to payment, time, performance or otherwise.
(d)
3.
Any failure on your part to give the notice required in Clause 2(a) within the time period stated therein or at all shall not render this guarantee or any part thereof void or null in any way PROVIDED ALWAYS that we may recover from you compensation for such reasonable expenses as may actually be incurred by reason for your failure to give the required notice. This Guarantee shall take effect immediately and shall continue in force until ____________[date] [month] [year]* or to any further date to which it is extended by agreement between yourself and ourselves.
4.
AC/6
APPENDIX C2 SPECIMEN OF GUARANTEE ROOF WATERPROOFING GUARANTEE

Annex 2
As witness our hands the day and year first above written. Signed, sealed and delivered by the Abovenamed Designation Name
Signature
in the presence of: Name:
Designation:
Signature:
Address:
# To delete as appropriate * Substantial completion date plus period of guarantee
AC/7
Proposed Upgrading of Existing St. Stephen's School APPENDIX D SPECIMEN OF LETTER OF UNDERTAKING FOR EMPLOYMENT OF FOREIGN MANPOWER
To:
St. Stephen's School The Visitor In Singapore of The Christian Brothers' Schools 20 Siglap View Singapore 455789
We, ___________________________ (hereinafter termed as the Contractor), hereby declare and undertake that we will not : 1. Employ, and will ensure that our subcontractor will not employ any foreign manpower as defined under the Employment Of Foreign Manpower Act Chap 91A, its subsidiary legislation and/or all enactment or re-enactment thereof (hereinafter collectively referred to as the Employment Of Foreign Manpower Act) unless we and our subcontractors have obtained in respect of the foreign manpower valid work permit required by the Employment Of Foreign Manpower Act. 2. Harbour or employ, and will ensure that our subcontractors do not harbor or employ any person who has acted in contravention of the provisions of the Immigration Act Chap 133, its subsidiary legislation and/or all enactment or re-enactment thereof (hereinafter collectively referred to as the Immigration Act). We shall 1. Exercise due diligence in checking the original of the passport, document of identity or other travel documents and valid work permit of our manpower and/or the manpower of our subcontractors. 2. Provide the Employer with a copy of the Register of Foreign Manpower. 3. Update the aforesaid Register on a monthly basis. 4. Before commencement of works, submit a list of all foreign manpower and/or non-Singapore Citizens employed by us and/or our subcontractors who are on the site for any reason whatsoever. The list shall contain the following information: Name according to legal identification document Nationality Passport number Gender and age Work permit number and/or permit number and/or pass number Expiry date of work permit and/or permit and/or pass. Job designation Any other relevant information as required by the abovementioned Acts
5. Update the aforesaid list on a monthly basis. 6. Issue security passes to all manpower on site, provided that for foreign manpower and/or non-Singapore Citizens, the security passes shall only be issued to those who have valid work permits, and/or permits and/or passes. 7. Ensure that such security passes must be worn at all times by all manpower on site.
AD/1
SD2174 MOE Anglo-Chinese School\025_Appendix_D_Specimen_of_Letter_of_Undertaking_for_Employment_of_ Foreign_Manpower
Proposed Upgrading of Existing St. Stephen's School APPENDIX D SPECIMEN OF LETTER OF UNDERTAKING FOR EMPLOYMENT OF FOREIGN MANPOWER We shall be liable for and shall indemnify the Employer against any damage, expense, liability, loss, claim, proceedings and or penal sanction whatsoever which the Employer may incur or suffer by reason of a breach of the aforementioned Acts provided the same is caused by any act, omission, default or negligence on our part. Any breach of the above mentioned undertaking shall entitle the Employer to terminate our employment in which event all costs and expenditure resulting from the termination will be borne by us.
Signature Of Authorized Person Name Of Signatory
: :
________________________________ ________________________________
Designation Of Signatory Companys Address
________________________________
________________________________ ________________________________ ________________________________ ________________________________ ________________________________
Date
________________________________
AD/2
SD2174 MOE Anglo-Chinese School\025_Appendix_D_Specimen_of_Letter_of_Undertaking_for_Employment_of_ Foreign_Manpower
FLUCTUATION IN THE PRICES OF MATERIALS
1.
Notwithstanding Clause 33, the fluctuation clause shall only be applicable to steel reinforcement and concrete used in Permanent Works only. The prices of steel reinforcement and concrete shall be adjusted in accordance with the provisions of this Option if there shall be any changes in the Index of Steel Reinforcement and Concrete released by the Building and Construction Authority (BCA). All claims for adjustment under this Option shall be substantiated by appropriate vouchers and invoices. It shall be the duty of the Contractor to call upon the SO's site supervisor to witness all delivery of materials subject to price fluctuations, and furnish him a copy of the delivery order immediately thereafter for his records. If for any reason this is not possible, the Contractor shall deliver to the Site Supervisor a copy of the delivery order as soon as possible but not later than the next working day following the date of delivery of the materials, so as to enable him to make any verification he deems necessary. Only one Material Price Index will be used regardless of the different grades or sizes of the concrete and steel reinforcement and weld mesh used. Material price index for steel reinforcement shall be taken to mean that for both steel reinforcement and welded mesh. Price adjustment shall be computed using the following formula:Price Adjustment =
Quantity of material ^ for the period of payment valuation Material Price Index for the month of material delivered minus Material Price Index for the month of tender closing Material Price Index for the month of tender closing
2.
3.
4.
Base Unit Rate of Material published by BCA based on the month of tender closing
^ Quantity of material is based on the actual quantity delivered to site based on delivery order or amount of material based on work done certified for payment in Payment Certificate
FM/1 June 2012, PDMB (MOE) Version 1.0
5.
The Base Unit Rates of steel reinforcement and concrete shall be the material market prices as published by the Building Construction Authority (BCA) and can be found in the BCA Website under Key Construction Information. The address is http://www.bca.gov.sg/keyconstructioninfo/keystats.html. The Base Unit Rate of materials shall be based on the month of tender closing. These rates will be inserted once they are available.
6.
The Contractor shall include in his monthly progress payment claim a detailed record of the amount reimbursable to or deductible from the Contract Sum in accordance with the formats FORM F1 to F4. Such a monthly statement shall be submitted together with the appropriate vouchers and invoices for the SO's verification and inclusion in the monthly progress payment. ON COMPLETION OF THE WORKS AND PRIOR TO FINALISATION OF THE PROJECT ACCOUNTS, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH A WRITTEN STATEMENT CERTIFYING THAT ALL VOUCHERS AND INVOICES FOR ALL MATERIALS SUBJECT TO PRICE ADJUSTMENT HAVE BEEN SUBMITTED AND ACCOUNTED FOR. THE CERTIFICATION SHALL BE IN THE FORMAT FORM F5. Notwithstanding the Contractor furnishing such a certified statement, if in the opinion of the SO there appears to be any discrepancy between the quantity used and those reflected in the vouchers and invoices submitted, the Employer shall be entitled to recover any additional amount due to any decrease in material prices. This amount shall be arrived at by taking the difference between the estimated quantity of the material (with a reasonable percentage added for wastage) and the total quantity as reflected in invoices and vouchers and multiplying by the difference between the Base Index and the lowest Current Index of the material during the currency of the Works. IN ADDITION APPROPRIATE DEPARTMENTAL MEASURES e.q. SUSPENSION, DEBARMENT, ETC. MAY BE TAKEN AGAINST THE CONTRACTOR WHO IN THE OPINION OF THE SO HAS SUPPRESSED OR FAILED TO PROVIDE THE REQUIRED INFORMATION FOR FLUCTUATION ADJUSTMENT PURPOSE.
7.
8.
9.
For the purpose of calculating the amount of adjustment due to price fluctuation of reinforcing steel bars, the following bases shall be used:
Reinforcing Steel Bars a) Gross weight of raw steel bars delivered to site Net weight of processed steel bars; plus 3% wastage Net weight of steel bars incorporated (by measuring from drawings) in precast products plus 3% wastage. Steel reinforcement incorporated in precast concrete products of volume less than one cubic metre shall be excluded
Date Used for Adjustment Date of delivery to site.
b)
Date of respective batch of processed bars delivered to site Date of delivery of respective precast products to site
c)
Concrete d) Volume of raw concrete delivered to site Volume of precast concrete products plus 3% wastage
Date Used for Adjustment Date of delivery to site.
e)
Date of delivery or respective precast products to site
FORM F1
STATEMENT OF FLUCTUATION FOR STEEL BARS Increase / Decrease in Price of Steel for the month of: _____________________
Size in mm Name of Supplier Delivery Note No. Date of Delivery MS HT Quantity Material Price Material Price Prices Delivered Index for the Index for the Increase Decrease (Tonne) month of month of tender closing material (+) (-) delivered Amount Addition $ Omission $
TOTAL:
June 2012, PDMB (MOE) Version 1.0 FM/4
TOTAL:
FORM F2
STATEMENT OF FLUCTUATION FOR REINFORCING STEEL BARS IN PRECAST PRODUCTS# AND PROCESSED BARS Reimbursement of claim for the Increase/Decrease in Price of Steel Bars for the month of: ____________________
Size in mm Name of Supplier Delivery Date of Note / Product Product No. Delivery MS HT Quantity with Material Price Material Price Wastage* Index for the Index for the (Tonne) month of month of tender material closing delivered Prices Increase (+) Decrease (-) Amount Addition $ Omission $
TOTAL: #No adjustment for reinforcing steel bars in precast unit less than one cubic metre in volume. * A 3% wastage shall be added to the quantity of steel before computation.
TOTAL:
FORM F3
STATEMENT OF FLUCTUATION FOR CONCRETE Increase / Decrease in Price of Concrete for the month of: _____________________
Prices Increase (+) Decrease (-) Amount Increase (+) Decrease (-)
Name of Supplier
Delivery Note No.
Date of Delivery
Quantity Delivered (Cum3)
Material Price Index for the month of tender closing
Material Price Index for the month of material delivered
TOTAL:
TOTAL:
FORM F4
STATEMENT OF FLUCTUATION FOR CONCRETE IN PRECAST PRODUCTS# Reimbursement of claim for the Increase/Decrease in Price of Concrete for the month of : _________________________________
Name of Supplier
Delivery Date of Note / Product Product No. Delivery
Grade
Quantity Material Price Material Price Delivered Index for the Index for the (m3) month of month of material tender closing delivered
Price Adjustment Increase (+) Decrease (-) Addition $
Amount Omission $
TOTAL :
TOTAL :
FORM F5
To:
The Superintending Officer
PROJECT TITLE:
________________________________________________ ________________________________________________ ________________________________________________
CONTRACT NO:
_________________________
I / We* certify that to the best of my / our* knowledge, all the relevant vouchers and invoices for all materials which are subject to price adjustment in accordance with the Fluctuation Clause for the above project have been submitted to your office, and that I / We* have not suppressed any information to the disadvantage of the Employer.
Signature
Name of Contractor : Date :
cc QS Attn: * Delete where not applicable
June 2012, PDMB (MOE) Version 1.0
FM/8
BORE LOG
CLiENI St. Stephen'sPrimorySchooi Works PRoJICT: Soil nvestigotion Si. Stephen'sPrimorySchool,20 Siglop View,Singapore455789 LOCATION:
B 0 R E H oN L0 E: B H l
SHEET N0: 1 0F 2 ,.199 119. KS13-3441 REDUCED LEVEL: NORIHING: FASTING: INCLINATI0N: Verlicoj
Rock
Groin Slze
C0NSULTANT: Ecos-EiConsuli onts Pte L I O 26.06 2013 DRILLING DATT STARTED: 28-06-2013 DRtLLtNG DATECOMpLETED
PREPARED BY: VenKot
BoREH0LE DtA: 100 mm 54 mm C0RE DIA:

Rotory DRtLLtNG METHOD.
D A t E p R E p A R E D :0 8 - 0 7 - 2 0 1 J
E A
DRILL BY
somon
E
ption Descr
t nal prt(o.5lrx I 00x1.50)m3. Loose Brownish yellow spottedred and
S P T( N - V a i u e ) S o m D l e s & Iests
I
:.
ShmrSi.ffqli
P i
*
-R9eCg
0.50)
150 9
{:
D5l
Depth
c
G/sA/c&s
;<
,== o
Limir(%)
0,00
crev
Silty fine to coarseSAND Greenishgrey spottedblack Silty fine to coarse SAND
(1.s0)
5/30 (i/2/3)
w
l
SM
1.50 BE? 1.50-2,20 220-2.65 J.00 J.00-a45

SM
PRE L MI {A i '
Loose greymottledred Yellowish Silry fine to coarse SAND
(1.s0)
8/30 12/4/4)
DSJ P2
Reddish grey spottedyellow Silty fine SAND
tlfi"tI
D S 4 +.50 P3 .+.50-+s5
SM
(d50) 3/30 (j l /2)
ril
X
a
UD2 6.90-235
Loos Light reddish grey mottled yellow and spottedblack Silty gravelly fine to coarse SAND
(i/3/4)
u X
DS5 9 . 0 0 UDJ 9.00-9.35 P5 9.35-9.80
SM
(J.00)
Mediumdense greyspotted yellow Light Reddish Silty fine SAND

(3.00)
?5130 ',7110/ P 6
w '/.
DS6 UD4
12.44 lZdJ-12.41 12-40-1245
SM
Dense Ljght red spottedgrey Silty SAND
J3/s 'JO/14/ t9)
D57
15.00 1500-1545
SM
P R I tI{ Il:t
Light grey to grey spotled Yellow and Red SILT
(rfrl
I
14.00
l
ts/1o ',13/19/
(2.00)
0s8
P8
18.00
SM
zo)
MH
TOBE CONTINUED
REMARKS:
I(N
PTE LTD KWANG S]NG ENGINEER]NG
LEGEND:
V O I El -Pressuremekr rest (PMT) -vone sheorrest (9 -Disturbed sompl. (Ds) -Pocker Test (PKr)
-StondordPenevation -ettempea (Mz) (uD), (oD), (ps), & Test (P) fl -Utidist:]tned Somple (UD) -Pistonsomple (Ps) WA VU -Open Dtive ThickwollSomple (0D) [ M a z r e r s o m p l e( M z ) -core nun (cn) N [ \ N - D e n i s o nS o m p l e( D s ) M t^
(Ds)
BORE LOG
C - ' E \ T : 5 t . S t e p " q ' . P f l m o r yS . h o o . pROJECT: Soil lnvestigotion Works
BoREH0LE No: BHl

SHEET N0: 2 0F 2
J6B NO: KS1J-J441
S:i . S t e p h e sn P r m o r y S c h o o l2 , 0 S glap View,Sinqopore455789 _oCA-0N

CoNSULTANT Ecos Ei Consult o n t sPte Ltd
26_06_2013 DRiLLING DATE STARTED: D R 1tL N GD A T E 66yp 666 28 06 201J

PREPARFD By: Venkot kumor
BOREH0LE DtA: 100 mm

COREDlA: 54 mm Rolary DR|LL|NG METHOD.
REDUCED LEVEL: NORIHING:

FASTINC-
0:8 - 0 7 - 2 0 1 3 DATEPREPARED Description
DR1 | By:
9
Somon
INCLINATI0N: Verticql
= F
S P T( N - V o l u e ) Somoles & Tests Rock Depth
JRI- I
R 3!a
a;
:f
.sess9
Light grey to grey spottedYellow and Red SILT ,,' Hard Reddish grey spotited yellow SILT (1.00)
2; G/sA/c&s 3.-
c
(l
g<
:g
Liml (7) IL
/s/ao 5
+5) (J.00) 2a
DS9
21_04 21,01J-21.45
MH
PFt IN]NAt Y
D S l O 24.00 P 1 0 24_01J-24.15 MH
21
Hard Grey SILT
r00130
,25/45, is)
(6.40)
2t
0olJ0 .25/St r0)
P 1 l 27.tX 27.45
2(
3( tao/25 3l P12 JOJO 30.70

MH
Borehole terminated at 30.40rn

3,
ist
y'loter (Meqsured from Ground Level) Ground Level

Dote Tlme
Depth (m)
3:
cosing (m) oepth 5.00
27-46-2013
1&00
9.00
3-50
INA D ( PRTLIIV
3:
5;
=
Rm/rcR(4 REMARKS:
IN
PTE LTD KWANG SING ENG]NEEFING
LEGEND:
V O I E -Pressur.neie. rest (PMT) -vone sheorTest (9 -Disturbed somple(Ds) -Pocker Test(PhT)
M -StandordPenetrotion rest (P) 2\ WA -U..dislwbed somp e (UD) W -Apen Dtlue fticl,roll Somple (0D) N\N MozrerSomDle(MZ) N -Denison sorirple (Ds)
ll fl
(Mz) (uD), (oD), (PS), & (Ds) ]-,rttempea -Pistonsomple (PS) -core Run (cR)
BORE LOG
Ctlt-lr. t: Si. Siephen " P.'mory School
Works SoilInvestiqoiion PROJECT.

St. Stephen'sPrirrory S.1oo, 20 SrglopView,Sirgopo'e 455789 L0CAIION: CONStll TANT: Ecos Ei Consult r nts Pte Ltd
BOREHo N L o E : BH2
SHEET N0: 1 0F 3 JoB NO. KSlJ-3441 REDUCED LEVEL: ING: NORTH
FASTINC.
19 02 2013 DRILLING DATE STARTED: 2J-06-201J DRtLLtNG DATE CoMpLtTED.

P R E P A R EB D ): L j n nH t e A u n g
BORFHOI F DIA:
1 0 0m m 54 mm Somon
E
CORE DIA: DRILL BY
Rotory DRtLLtNG METHOD. SPT(N-Volue)SomDles& Tests Rock
DATEPREPARED:04-07-2013 Description
Trial pit(o.50x1 00x1.50)'n3. Frim light brownish yello$' Sandy CLAY wirh decayed So11 Yellowtsh grey Srlty tine to coarseSAND
INCLINAT|oN: Veriicol
= F Groin Size
Sheor Sir$oth
&9
:x
-R?339
(1.50)
0epih
9 D51
a iz
I -t;l-
3<
!e
Limit (%)
0.00
rI(I
cs
,,L il\
3-
\-at -Fi. I
(1.50)
l
3/30 i3/3/5) 2/30 I') "ol
m
{
P1
1.50 r.50-z20 BE? 2_2V2.65

SM
Stiffto hard DarkbrownPeary vgetation CLAY with decayed Very denseDarkgreySrltytine to mediumSAND with decayed vegetation
]
(1.50)
8 Pt5 r$84.+s
tfta (o/o/1)
m 4
PJ
cPt
D54 4 . 5 0 UDz 450-5.r0 5.10-5.55
(ds0)
2/& \ (o/1h)
7
I Light grey 10 dark grey spotted yellow Silq,fine to coarse SAND
?s1Ja X P 5 {6/1O/ 1s)
DS5
9.00
SM
(6.00)
12
1l
\11'0,
?t1Jo X
P6
1L@-1L45
1 50 0
Brownish grey with spotted yellow and red Sandy SILT
26/30 l1g/12/ t4)
DS6
15-00 150O-15,,t5
5M
PRE i$i\47{l =R
(s.001
1i z9/30 :11/14/ ts)
P8
r&00-1a,45
MS
TO BE CONTINUED
RoolrxR(' REMARKSI
IN
LTD PTE ENGINEERING KWANG SINC
LfGEND:
V O I E -Pressuremeter Test (PMr) -voie srreorrest (v) -Disiulbedsomple(Ds) -PockerTed (PKD
Penetrotion f-]-rttemred(uD), (Mz)& (DS) V -St ndord (0D), (PS), A, Test(P) -Pistonsomple S.mple(UD) (PS) WA -Undistutbed Vh -open Dtire Thickwoll somple(00) II (MZ) Somple -c*" n," lcny N\ -Mozier [ somple(DS) NN Denison
BORE LOG
CLIENT: St. Stephen'sPrimory School Worl,s PROJECTSoil Invesiigot;on St. Stephen'sPrimory School,20 Siqlop Vlew, Sinqopore455789 LOCATI0N:
BOREHO NL O E : BH2
SHEET N0: 2 0F 3
Dte -td CoNSULIANT Ecos El Colsultonts

DRLLLING DATE STARTED: 19-42-2013 DR1LL1NG DAII 66yp 111p.23-06-201J
;99 xs
BOREHoLE DtA: 100 mm 54 mm CORE DLA: Rotory 9p11U516 M6TH66 Somon DRILL By:
KS13-3441
REDUCED LEVEL: NORTHING: EASTING:

INCLINATI0N:
Croin Size
Linn Htet Aunq DATEPREPARED:04-07-2013

o?
pREpARED By:
Verticol
Sheor Shnoih
Description
tsrownrsh grey wrlh spotted yellolr and red Sandy SILT
E;
SPT(N-VoUe) SomDles & Tests Rock a a

E Depth
.scssF
21
-9
(.)
:= -().
os
Limit (2,
rI\-D
21.00-21.,15
reA{/*q
lvt ll\
It
t\
46/30 X P 9 ',t1/tzt (400) 2t
21
Lrght reddrshgrey spottedred S a n d yS I L T
16/30
t:{",
DS7 2d00 P ] 0 74.00-24.45
MS
(6.00.)
2) 12/10 .13/18/ l4)

27.tn 27.15
2t
2a
MS
tsrownrsh grey mottled yellow and rd Sandy SILT 31
45/30 "15/20
DSa J0.00 P12 J0.oO-JO.,t5
3i
(6.00)
3:
X P 1 3 33.00-33.,t5 +9/30 ',2O/241

2s)
PR] IM IN 4 =
greydappled darkgrey Greenish SILT Sandy
JJ
D59
l7/2e ',8/35)
56.00 J6,00-J6.,t4
MS
(d00)
P15 \o0/28 i2s/6s1
l9_00-39,.13 MS
TO BE CONTINUED
Roo/lcR(t
REMARKS
IN
PTE LTD KWANG SING ENG NEERINO
LEGEND:
V O E E -Pressu.emeier Test (PMT) -vone sheorTest (v) -Disturbed somple(Ds) -Pockerrest (PKT)
(Mz)& (uD),(oD),(PS), J iA rest (P) -undislwbed -Pistonsomple somple(UD) (Ps) WA (0D) ll W -open DrtveThick$oll Somple (MZ) Somple -core nun (cn) N -Mozier (DS) [ NN Denison Somple
M
-Siondord Penevotion
-.lttempea
(Ds)
BORE LOG
CT Soil n
BoREH0LE N0: BH2

School,20 SiqlopView, N0. KSlJ-3441
St. St TION:
REDUCED LEVEL: NORlHING:
greydapprec d a r kS r e y
4L@-1212
Borehole terminatcd at 45.42m
PRELIMN
Ground WoterLevel(Meosured from Ground Level)
r(N
KWANG SNGENGINEERINC PTE LTD
LEGEND:
V e E
-standord Penetrotion Tesi (P) -Pressuremeter (PMT) -Undislubed Somple (UD) Test W w Open Drive ThickwollSompie (oD) -vonesheor rest (v) N\\\-Mozier Somole (MZ) -Disiuded NN -oenisonSo;ple (DS) (Ds) somple ii7 Zr'
(oD), (ps),(MZ) & (Ds []-rtt".p"a (uD), -Piston (Ps) somple f, -core Run(cR) [
Proposed Upgrading of Existing St. Stephen's School APPENDIX G EARTH CONTROL MEASURES
SPECIFICATIONS FOR EARTH CONTROL MEASURES
1. The Contractor shall be responsible for preventing silt from being washed into public drains by implementing an Earth Control Measure (ECM) for the construction site to meet the requirements under the latest Sewerage and Drainage Act Cap 294. (Information on ECM requirements can be found in PUB website www.pub.gov.sg/ecm.) 2. In his tender submission, the Contractor shall submit his schematic ECM plans of the construction site for the contract duration taking into account the different phases of construction activities. He shall also provide the name of the PE who will be endorsing the ECM plan after the tender is awarded. These schematic ECM plans shall make the Contractor aware of the ECM requirements and the cost to implement an effective ECM. Notwithstanding the submission of these schematic ECM plans the Contractor shall deem to have separately price for the ECM in the contract sum. 3. Before construction works commence on site, the Contractor shall engage a Professional Engineer (PE) to plan and design the ECM, and he shall install the ECM according to the PEs design. The ECM plan and design shall be submitted 1 week after the award of the contract. During the course of the construction works, the PE shall review the ECM proposal regularly to meet the changing needs of the construction activities. The Contractor shall improve the ECM as advised by his PE. The planning and design of the ECM shall meet the minimum requirements stipulated and in accordance to the Code of Practice on Surface Water Drainage. 4. The Contractor shall maintain the ECM for the whole duration of the contract to ensure that it is effective at all times. Proper records detailing the maintenance works, supported by dated photographs, shall be kept by the Contractor for verification. 5. The Contractor shall not remove the ECM until all works are completed and upon the advise of his PE. 6. The Contractor shall submit the ECM proposal duly endorsed by his PE to Director, Drainage for records. The proposed ECM shall consist of the following three parts: I. Project Particulars The following information shall be provided under the Project Particulars: (a) Project description (b) Name and address of site occupier; (c) Site area and contract period (d) Location map and site plan. Erosion Control Plan (Described in 7) Sediment Control Plan (Describe in 8)
II. III.
SD2174 MOE Anglo Chinese School\028_Appendix_G_Earth_Control (commented by MOE)
AI/1
Proposed Upgrading of Existing St. Stephen's School APPENDIX G EARTH CONTROL MEASURES
7. During construction, the Contractor shall minimize the formation of bare surfaces under the ECMs Erosion Control Plan. The Plan shall depict graphically the activities, including sequences of work, type and duration for each phase of construction activities to include the following measures to: (a) sequence and schedule of the earthworks / demolition works in stages and progressively with the subsequent construction activities and building works.
(b) minimize site disturbance by keeping site clearance works to a minimum by retaining as much of the existing vegetation as possible. (c) pave up the bare surfaces and all construction access by concrete or milled waste or other suitable materials (d) protect the bare slopes with close-turfing, concrete grouting, canvas or erosion control blanket. (e) protect the earth stockpiles with canvas or erosion control blanket. (f) restore ground cover over disturbed areas, which are or have become bare, as soon as possible. 8. The Contractor shall put in place the ECMs Sediment Control Plan, which aims to capture the sediments washed down from the construction sites. Some of these sediment control measures and facilities, which must be in place before the works start, shall include but not limited to the following: (a) concrete-lined cut-off drains (minimum C7 precast channel) along the perimeter of the construction sites. (b) silt fence properly installed and embedded onto the ground along the perimeter cut-off drains (between the construction site and the cut-off drain). (c) sedimentation basins or any other sediment filtering or settling system of adequate size and sufficient numbers along the perimeter cut-off drain and before the discharge points into public drain. (d) a chemical treating system to be provided before the discharge points into public drain. 9. The PE shall submit full basis of design back up with design calculations to show clearly how the perimeter cut-off drains, silt fence and sedimentation basins are designed and sized as well as how such design will effectively filter off silt and allow only clean water to discharge into public drains. The PE shall also submit the design specifications on the chemical treating system, which can effectively treat the silty discharge from the construction site. The discharge into the storm water drainage system shall not contain Total Suspended Solids in concentrations greater than the limit stipulated in the latest Surface Water Drainage Regulations and Code of Practice on Surface Water Drainage. The intensity of a one-in-two year storm should be adopted for the proposed design.
SD2174 MOE Anglo Chinese School\028_Appendix_G_Earth_Control (commented by MOE)
AI/2
Proposed Upgrading of Existing St. Stephen's School APPENDIX H ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT AND GREENMARK CRITERIA 1) Site management The Tenderer shall: Monitor, document and reduce energy consumption to set targets Monitor, document and reduce water consumption to set targets Monitor, document and reduce waste generated to set targets Provide trending of actual versus targeted consumptions
The Tenderer is to propose and implement an Environmentally Sustainable Green Plan around the site and office. These may include but not limited to: Rain water collection around the site which may be filtrated and reused for vehicle washing, site toilet flushing, office cleaning, etc. Use of membrane filtration system to recycle water on site. Reuse site office and furniture from other previous sites Recycling areas for office and construction waste. Recycle all steel, timber pallets, rebar, copper cable, aluminium cans and paper. Reduced use of paper and other office stationery Use of environmentally friendly cleaning detergent for office Promote pubic transportation use by site staff Provide documentation for the above.
2) Energy Usage During Construction Contractor shall explore opportunities to use alternative fuel as such biodiesel to operate their machinery and office functions. Biofuels do not emit carbon dioxide and hence do not contribute towards green house gases and climate change. 3) Construction Practices The Tenderer shall explore all avenues to reduce the impact of his construction practices to the environment and disturbances to general public and users of other buildings. 4) Material Use The contractor shall review materials used in the construction process. This may include but limited to: not
Divert construction waste from landfills and incinerators. Contractor shall adopt a construction waste management plan to achieve the goals set for diversion from disposal. Consider recycling cardboard, metal, brick, concrete, gypsum wallboard, insulation, etc. Designate an area for collection of such materials and identify haulers and recyclers to handle these materials.
AJ/1
SD2174 MOE Anglo-Chinese School\029_Appendix_H_Enviromental Management Programme and Greenmark Criteria
Proposed Upgrading of Existing St. Stephen's School APPENDIX H ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT AND GREENMARK CRITERIA
Materials reuse. Contractors shall review opportunities to use salvaged, refurbished or reused materials such as flooring, doors and frames, paneling, brick and decorative items. Equipment used during construction such as recycled site offices, site, office furniture, hoardings, formwork, etc shall also be considered. The clients approval shall be sought for all materials that are to be reused. The contractor shall work with the QP in collecting and presenting data for Concrete usage in accordance with BCAs Concrete Usage Index. CUI is defined as the volume of concrete used in a building project (m3) divided by its constructed floor area (m2). Concrete usage can be reduced by using precast component, structural steel components, dry walls, recycled material for non-load bearing elements, recycled aggregate for non-loading bearing structures. Details of CUI may be obtained from BCA website. Provide documentation for the above.
5) Building Maintenance and Operation Guidelines a) The Contractor shall provide a simple building users guide on facilities within building, environmental friendly use and operation of building. The guide should describe the following information to the school users: To include information on energy efficient features and strategies. To include buildings energy target. It will be useful to inform the tenants on the buildings metering and sub-metering strategy and how to read, record and present meter readings. To describe the basic functions and operation of the air-conditioning and mechanical ventilation system, electrical and lighting system. To provide information on available transport facilities such as local public transport information, car parking requirements, cycling facilities (if applicable). To provide information on recycling such as list of potential recycle materials, the location of recycling storage areas and schedules for waste recycling removal. To provide information on environment-friendly practices with regards to renovation works (noise and dust control, ventilation, waste disposal).
b) The purpose of the building users guide is to provide information on the building systems and their operation details. It should be easily understood by school users. The guide will ensure that design features are used efficiently and that changes to space usage are managed in the most environmentally appropriate manner.
c) The provision of a building Operations and Maintenance manual is also necessary to provide the detailed specialist information required by building managers and maintenance staff to enable the system to operate at a high level of energy efficiency.
AJ/2
SD2174 MOE Anglo-Chinese School\029_Appendix_H_Enviromental Management Programme and Greenmark Criteria
Proposed Upgrading of Existing St. Stephen's School APPENDIX I DEED FOR MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT
To:
THIS DEED is made the ________day of ____________________ Two Thousand and ____(20____) by ________________________________________________________________________________ [Contractor] of_______________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ [Address] (hereinafter called the Contractor) Whereas a tender by _______________________________________________________________ [Specialist Sub-Contractor] (hereinafter called the Specialist Sub-Contractor) of ________________________________________________________________________________ [Address] for______________________________________________________________________________ [Description of Specialist Sub-Contractor Works] is intended to be submitted by the Contractor to the Employer (hereinafter called Empolyer) Whereas it is a condition of acceptance of the aforesaid tender that the Specialist Sub-Contractor selected by the Contractor for the _____________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ [Description of Specialist Sub-Contract Works] ________________________________________________________________________________ shall make this deed to the Employer. AND WHEREAS it is also a condition of the award of a contract by the Contractor to the Specialist Sub-Contractor for__________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ [Description of Specialist Sub-Contract Works] that the Specialist Sub-Contractor shall make this deed to the Employer.
AL/1
SD2174 MOE Anglo-Chinese School\030_Appendix_I_Deed_for_Maintenance_Agreement
NOW THIS DEED WITNESSETH as follows; 1. We hereby make an offer to the Employer to maintain the ____________________________ _____________________________________________________________________________ [Description of Specialist Sub-Contract Works] during the Defects Liability Period/Period of Maintenance for ______________ months after the expiry of the Defects Liability Period of the Contract at the following prices which shall include all transportation, equipment, labour, material and parts to perform the periodic maintenance required under the specifications: Project Title:___________________________________________________________________ Details of the Quote 2. We bind ourselves to keep the above stated offer open until the end of the Defects Liability Period of the Contract. 3. In the event that we breach any of our obligations set out in Clauses1 and 2 above, we shall indemnify the Employer against all or any losses, damages, costs, expenses or otherwise sustained by the Employer thereby up to the sum of Dollars:_____________________________ _____________________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________($______________________) [State the total cost of the Specialist Works]
AL/2
As witness our hands the day and year first above written; ) ) ) Signed, sealed and delivered by ) Above named ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ___________________________________ Name
_________________________________ Designation
_________________________________ Signature
In the presence of: Name :________________________________________________
Designation
:________________________________________________
Signature
:________________________________________________
Address
:________________________________________________
AL/3
Proposed Upgrading of Existing St. Stephen's School APPENDIX J DEED OF INDEMNITY FOR ESS
To:
This DEED OF IDEMNITY is made ______________ day of _________________________between ______________________________________________ a company incorporated in Singapore and having its registered office at _________________________________________________________, Singapore _________________________(hereinafter called the Company) of one part and the SP PowerAssets Ltd, a Company incorporated in Singapore having its principal office at 111 Somerset Road, #0805, Singapore 238164 (hereinafter called SP PowerAssets) of the other part.
WHEREAS 1. SP PowerAssets is the owner of electrical installation in the substation of Primary School on Lot 04267N PT, 04297K PT and 04491A PT MK20 and Primary School on Lot 2369M PT MK21, Singapore (hereinafter called the Substation). 2. The Company has requested SP PowerAssets to allow the company, its agents or servants to enter the Substation to carry out substation building modification work.
3. The company will undertake to indemnify SP PowerAssets against all or any claims in any manner whatsoever arising out of the entry.
AM/1 SD2174 MOE Anglo-Chinese School\031_Appendix_J_Deed_of_Idemnity_for_ESS
Proposed Upgrading of Existing St. Stephen's School APPENDIX J DEED OF INDEMNITY FOR ESS
NOW THIS DEED WITNESSETH that the Company covenants with PowerAssets that: 1. the company will at times hereinafter indemnify SP PowerAssests in respect of any claims arising out of the entry to the Substation by the Company, its agents or servants and against all liabilities for personal injury (Whether fatal or otherwise), loss, actions, suits, proceedings, demand, costs and expenses whatsoever which SP PowerAssets may be required to pay to any third party in respect thereof. 2. the Company undertakes to indemnify SP PowerAssets, its employees and agents from and against all liabilities for personal injury (whether fatal or otherwise) arising out of the said entry by the Company, its agents and servants.
In WITNESS WHEREOF the Company has hereunto set its hand and seal the day and year first above written. THE COMMON SEAL OF _______________________________ ) Was hereunto affixed in the presence of:)
___________________________________________ Name & Signature of DIRECTOR
___________________________________________ NAME & Signature of SECRETARY
AM/2 SD2174 MOE Anglo-Chinese School\031_Appendix_J_Deed_of_Idemnity_for_ESS
APPENDIX K STANDARD FORMS CONSTRUCTION STATISTICS

For the Month of:
(To be submitted to QS through SO before 10th day of the following month) Project:
Contractor:
Submitted By (Person preparing return)
Signature
Verified By (Project Architect/Engineer)
Signature
PART I: MATERIAL USAGE

Item Material Unit Price per Unit Material Delivered to Site During the Month Material Used During the Month Projected Material Usage for the Next Month
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Cement (Ordinary Portland) Aggregate (19mm) Crusher-run & Graded Stone Sand (Concreting) Sand (Plastering) Steel Reinforcement Bricks (Common/Facing*) Plywood (Formwork Only) Ready Mix Concrete Concrete in Precast Components
Ton Ton Ton Ton Ton Ton Pc M2 M3 M3
PART II: LABOUR STRENGTH (PER DAY)

Source Singaporean Malaysian Constru Brigade Others Ind Work Permit Blk Work Permit Foreign Workers Non Traditional Source Asean NonHong Asean Kong Total Work Force (Excluding Supervisory Staff)
North Asian Source Taiwan Macau South Korean
Ethnic Group Chinese Malays Indians Others Total No. of Unskilled Workers No. of Accommo dated in Quarters
Location of Quarters:
AN/1
SD2294 Primary Schools at Sengkang Site 16 & 20\032a_Appendix_K_1_Construction_Statistics
APPENDIX K STANDARD FORMS
CONSTRUCTION STATISTICS
PART III: SURVEY ON WAGES OF CONSTRUCTION TRADESMEN Name of Company: Project Value: Submitted by:
Trades Local/PR (exclude CB Men) Manday Concretor Carpenter Steel Bender Scaffolder Brick/BlkLayer Mason Joiner Pavior Tiler Plasterer Roofer Paver Glazier Drainlayer Ironmongers Steel Worker W elder W ireman /Electrician Plumber Excavator /Tractor Driver Mechanic Plant Operator /Crane Driver Piler Labourer Supervisor /Foreman Site Clerk Others Notes: 1) Daily Wages excludes levy, Employer's CPF, overtime, lodging & other allowance 2) Malaysian IWP, refers to Malaysians on 2 to 3 years work permit 3) Malaysian BWP, refers to Malaysians on 6 months work permit 4) Others include Philippines, Indonesians and Sri Lankan Daily Wages Malaysian BW P* Manday Daily W ages Malaysian BWP* Manday Daily Wages Hong Kong ManDaily day Wages
For The Month Of: Project: Type of Work: Designation:

North Asian Sources Taiwan Macau ManDaily ManDaily day Wages day Wages Non-Traditional Sources Thailand Others* ManDaily ManDaily day W ages day W ages
South Korea ManDaily day Wages
India ManDaily day Wages
AN/2
SD2294 Primary Schools at Sengkang Site 16 & 20\032a_Appendix_K_1_Construction_Statistics
APPENDIX K STANDARD FORMS FORM D8 SUMMARY OF MATERIALS ON SITE Progress Payment Claim No. For the period Name of Project :
: :
Date of Submission Type of Materials
: Invoice No. (with copies of invoices attached) Price as shown on the Invoice (S$) Quantities on Site Amount
S$
cts
AN/3
SD2294 Primary Schools at sengkang Site 16 & 20\032b_Appendix_K_2_Summary_of_Material_on_Site_Form_D8
APPENDIX K STANDARD FORMS FORM D9 To: Government of the Republic of Singapore c/o Ministry of Education Project Development and Management Branch MOEHQ (Ghim Moh) 285 Ghim Moh Road, Block C, Level 3, Singapore 279622
PROJECT TITLE:
CONTRACT NO.: I/we* declare that to my/our* best knowledge and belief, the prices stated in the below-listed vouchers and invoices are the nett prices paid to the suppliers after deducting all trade discounts, and that I/we* have not suppressed any information to the disadvantage of the Government. Name of Supplier Invoice No. Date
Signature: Name of Contractor: Date:

*Delete where not applicable
SD2294 Primary Schools at Sengkang Site 16 & 20\032c_Appendix_K_3_Form_D9
AN/4
APPENDIX K STANDARD FORMS

MINISTRY OF EDUCATION DIRECT CREDIT AUTHORISATION FOR BUSINESSES AND COMPANIES FORM 5
For MOE s Use Ref Vendor Number Note: This form must be completed by businesses or companies which wish to have payments due to them for goods supplied or services rendered to the Government credited direct to their designated bank accounts. The businesses or companies have to complete Part I of the form and obtain their bankers certification at part II below and return the ENTIRE form to the Payments Unit, (Tel: 68796998/68797031) Finance Division, Ministry of Education, 1 North Buona Vista Drive, #08-00 MOE Building, Singapore 138675. This ORIGINAL form must be returned by post. PLEASE DO NOT FAX. PART 1 (To be completed by Business / Company) Business s/Company s Name: Business/Company Reg. No: Tel No: Address: Fax No:
Particulars of bank account: (Bank No & Branch No can be found at the bottom of each bank cheque) Bank No. Branch No. Account No.
Name of Account
Permanent Secretary (Education): I/We hereby authorise you to credit payments due to me/us to the above account. Amounts so credited would constitute valid discharge of obligations due to me/us. This authorisation shall continue to be in force until I/we have expressly revoked it by notice in writing to you. It being understood that you may in your absolute discretion determine this arrangement by giving written notice to my/our address last known to you.
Authorised Signature(s) [as in bank s records] (DO NOT DETACH)
Date
Part II (To be completed by Bank) Permanent Secretary (Education) We hereby certify that the signature(s) affixed at Part I above is/are consistent with our records, and that the particulars of the account are correct Name of Bank & Official Stamp AN/5 Authorised Signature & Date
SD2294 Primary Schools at Sengkang Site 16 & 20\032d_Appendix_K_4_Direct_Credit_Authorisation_Form_5
SAFETY & HEALTH RISK REGISTER

Project Tile : Owner : Review : Review Date : Next Review date : Process / Location :
(DESIGN SAFETY GUIDE 1)

Proposed Upgrading of St Stephen's Primary School No. 2 1-Jul-2013 --St Stephen Primary School Can these Risk Assessment Severity Likelihood Risk Level hazards be Residual Risk Level Severity Likelihood Risk Level Further review required?
Proposed Upgrading of Existing St Stephen's Primary School

Type S/NO. Design Consideration Can elements such as steel structures be prefabricated, assembled on ground and then lifted to position for installation? Can the cutting of steel members be done off-site, under controlled conditions to reduce the dust created? Can site welding be reduced so as to reduce fire or burn risks and prefabricated nuts and bolts used as connections? Can prefabricated elements be provided with designed lifting points, and the weight, the centre-of-gravity marked on the drawings and on the items? If the prefabricated structure is required to be temporarily suspended for a period of time before final installation, are there means to ensure the hazards arising are removed? Can joints in vertical steel structure members be designed such that bolting can be done while on the ground? Risks Hazards Identified Proposed Control Measures Action By
Guide 2
1 Hot welding works, lifting works Burns, collapse of material, fall from height, injury / death 4 4 16 Yes Yes, for the structural steel roof truss/frame. Ensure proper use of lifting equipment with experienced operators and 4 lifiting supervisors. Where applicable steel members will be fabricated off-site. Final weld joints to be done on site at ground level, and hoisted by crane. Welding work will be minimized. Hot works Burns, injury 3 3 9 Yes 3 2 6 Yes Contractor 1 4 Yes Contractor/ Consultants
Environmental concernNoise / dust pollution
Eye & respiratory disorders
Yes
Yes
Contractor
This is to be detailed by Contractor. Collapse of material, 4 human injury/ death Contractor/ Consultants
Lifting works
16
Yes
Yes
PREFABRICATION
Prefab elements hoisting and installation work should be planned such that there is no temporary suspension. Lifting works, work at height Collapse of material, 4 human injury/ death 4 16 Yes 4 1 4 Yes Contractor
Lifting works, work at height
Collapse of material, 4 human injury/ death
16
Yes
Can connections be designed to minimize risk of incorrect assembly designed to minimize risk of incorrect assembly (e.g. unique bolt layout for each connection) and clear instructions provided on drawings?
Steel elements of curved roof for Aesthetics Blockand teaching block to be fabricated off-site and welded on site on ground. Bolting to be done on ground where applicable, and parts of steel structure to be bolted while hoisted by crane to roof level. Can be considered, to have elements itemized to ensure correct assembly. Details to be discussed with Contractor
Yes
Contractor
Lifting works, work at height
16
Yes
Yes
Contractor/ Consultants

Project Tile : Owner : Review : Review Date : Next Review date : Process / Location : Consider the work process and the equipment required for heavy lifting. Can the position for parking of these equipment be finalized and cordoned off? Does a foundation for these lifting equipment need to be designed so as to minimize settlement and failure of support? Consider the worst case scenario. Can this scenario be prevented or managed to minimize injuries? Can the need to work at height be removed? E.g. removing the need to work from ladders, removing the need to work where a safe means of access cannot be provided. Can fragile roofing materials be removed or an alternative access route (including a work platform) to the roof be designed? Can there be early installation of permanent access, such as stairs, to reduce the use of ladders or scaffold? Can edge protection or other features that increase the safety of access and construction be designed and installed? Can anchor points for installation of life-line or safety harnesses be mounted where work platforms cannot be installed? Can floor openings, if any, be minimized?

Proposed Upgrading of St Stephen's Primary School No. 2 1-Jul-2013 --St Stephen Primary School Space at perimeter within site and along adjacent driveway will be used for construction access and heavy lifting. Contractor may have moveable crane or 4 tower crane with concrete base. Details to be confirmed with Contractor. Contractor shall engage temporary works PE to design foundation for lifting equipment to 4 minimize settlement and failure of support. Contractor shall engage temporary works PE to carry out risk assessment and consider the worst case scenario to minimize injuries. Project comprises construction of one 5storey ISH block. Construction at height will be assisted by properly installed scaffolding used by workers with PPE.
6 HEAVY LIFTING
Lifting works
16
Yes
Yes
Collapse of crane
Serious injury / death 4
16
Yes
Yes
Collapse of crane
16
Yes
Yes
Fall from height
16
Yes
Yes
Contractor
10 FALLING FROM HEIGHT
Fall from height
16
Yes
Roofing installation to be planned with proper safety access and scaffolding, welllit and sign-posted. 4
Yes
Contractor
11
Fall from height
16
Yes
Staircase cores can be completed to allow for secure access to other floors. To be confirmed with Contractor. 4
Yes
Contractor
12
Fall from height
16
Yes
Edge access like parapet walls and railings to be allowed for during construction.
Yes
Contractor
Safety harness for maintenance of metal sheet roof to be incorporated. Fall from height Serious injury / death 4 4 16 Yes 4 1 4 Yes Contractor
13
14
Fall from height
16
Yes
Floor openings are at service risers, corridors and toilet cores. These are mainly for rainwater discharge and M&E services. Locations have been identified and indicated on drawings.
Yes
Contractor

Project Tile : Owner : Review : Review Date : Next Review date : Process / Location : Can a safer means of access or egress be used instead of the temporary means required? Can the permanent staircase and lifts be completed first and used during the construction stage? Will the design affect the work process and stages during construction? Can temporary works required during construction be planned for? E.g. specifying the type and position of the temporary works so as to ensure spatial considerations have been considered. Are there special construction considerations that need to be highlighted to the contractor for his construction? Does the sequence of construction create any temporary unstable working platform, which requires additional bracing? Can adequate safety factors be incorporated in the design such that overloading or collapse of the permanent or temporary structure is not possible?

Proposed Upgrading of St Stephen's Primary School No. 2 1-Jul-2013 --St Stephen Primary School Separate ingress and egress for contractor will be assigned. Will discuss and confirm with Contractor. To be discussed and confirmed with Contractor. Serious injury / death 4 4 16 Yes 4 2 8 Yes

15 Hit by moving vehicle Injury 3 3 9 Yes 3 2 6 No NA
16
Collapse of crane, fall from height
17 TEMPORARY WORKS AND SEQUENCING
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
Contractor will consider most effective construction procedure and completion at the quickest time. To be discussed and confirmed with Contractor.
NA
NA
NA
NA
Contractor
18
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
Contractor
19
Collapse of crane, fall from height
16
Yes
Supply and installation of curved metal sheet roofing for entrance canopy and Aesthetics block, and sunscreens at staircases. Contractor can plan the works such as to minimise the risk and hazards involved To be discussed and confirmed with Contractor.
Yes
Contractor
20
Fall from height
16
Yes
Yes
Contractor
21
Fall from height
16
Yes
Contractor shall engage temporary works PE to ensure that no overloading or collapse of the permanent or temporary structure.
Yes
Contractor

Project Tile : Owner : Review : Review Date : Next Review date : Process / Location : Can the layout be optimized to prevent any accidents from the flow of traffic, pedestrian, equipment, etc. within and around the site during the construction stage? Consider the flow of traffic, pedestrian, equipment within and around the site during the permanent stage. Can the layout be optimized to prevent any accidents? Is there a need to designate specific material, equipment, vehicular and human traffic flow diagram?

Proposed Upgrading of St Stephen's Primary School No. 2 1-Jul-2013 --St Stephen Primary School Layout is simple and clear with functional spaces aligned to corridor linkages and staircases and at 2 extreme corners of the site. Contractor is allowed 2 4 separate ingress/egress to minimise traffic flow inside site. Layout is simple and clear with functional spaces aligned to corridor linkages and staircases. Corridors are 2.8m wide.

Hit by moving vehicle, pollution by noise and dust
22
16
Yes
Yes
Contractor
LAYOUT
23
Hit by moving vehicle, pollution by noise and dust
16
Yes
Yes
School
24
Hit by moving vehicle
16
Yes
Separate pedestrian and vehicular access is designed for; School will be shifting to separate holding school during 4 construction. So no need separate designation / indication of movement. Functional spaces for people to use comply to MOE room guidelines, BCA requirements for Barrier Free Accessibility. There are also handicapped-friendly lift and toilets. The spaces are generally well- 3 ventilated. Confined spaces are the risers which are accessible from corridors. There are no confined spaces There are no confined spaces Equipment location will consider access by service personnel and avoiding confined spaces 3
Yes
School
Does the design create any confined space in the permanent or temporary stage? 25 CONFINED SPACE Suffocation Respiratory disorder 3 3 9 Yes
No
NA
26
27
Can the confined space be removed from the design? Can the requirement to enter the confined space be minimized by removal of vital equipment or controls from the confined space? Is the emergency route for both the temporary and permanent stages the shortest and most direct? In the emergency route, is there adequate lighting, directions, warning and backup power for mass evacuation of people?
Suffocation
Respiratory disorder
Yes
No
NA
Suffocation
Respiratory disorder
Yes
No
NA
EMERGENCY ROUTE
28
Congestion, difficult evacuation operation
Yes
Emergency route to be determined to discharge directly to safety zones. To check with School OM and also discuss with Contractor prior to construction. Along the emergency route, adequate lighting, directions, warning and backup power will be provided.
Yes
Contractor / Consultants / School
29
Congestion, difficult evacuation operation
Yes
Yes

Project Tile : Owner : Review : Review Date : Next Review date : Process / Location : Can less hazardous materials be specified? E.g. solvent-free or low Solvent adhesives and water-based paints. Can processes that create hazardous fumes, vapors, dust, noise or vibration be avoided? E.g. disturbing existing asbestos, cutting chases in brickwork and concrete, breaking down cast-in-situ piles to level, scrabbling concrete, handdigging tunnels, flame cutting or sanding areas coated with lead paint or cadmium. Can materials that are easier to handle be specified? E.g. lightweight building blocks, limiting the weight of formwork components to less than 25kg. Is there a possibility of floods in the site? If so, how can the hazard be minimized in the temporary and permanent stages? Is there a possibility of lightning strike in the site? If so, how can the hazard be minimized in the temporary and permanent stages?

Proposed Upgrading of St Stephen's Primary School No. 2 1-Jul-2013 --St Stephen Primary School Noted and will comply to meet basic Green-mark requirements. 5 15 Yes 3 2 6 Yes Contractor

30 Air / dust pollution Eye injury, respiratory 3 disorder, ill health
Contractor will submit risk assessment and take all necessary precautionary measures.
HEALTH HAZARDS
31
Air / dust pollution
Eye injury, respiratory 3 disorder, ill health
15
Yes
Yes
Contractor
Will be discussed and confirmed with Contractor. lifting works, work at height Collapse of material, 4 injury/ death 4 16 Yes 4 1 4 Yes Contractor
32
Existing terrain is flat and not prone to flooding. NA NA NA NA #VALUE! NA NA NA NA NA NA
33
WEATHER
34
Hit by lightning
Burn / injury / death
15
Yes
Lightning protection will be provided for the temporary site office, temporary classrooms, and the permanent blocks.
No
NA
35
Are there any other adverse weather conditions that can Wet conditions causing Slip and fall causing affect the ability to safely slippery surface, very dry- injury / dry weather construct the work? hot weather causing dehydration What are the effects of extreme temperature of humidity on instrumentation?
Yes
Wet weather conditions may delay work, especially when there is no roof covers. Temporary measures like canvas sheets 3 will be used to minimize effects of adverse weather conditions. Not likely affecting any instrumentation. NA NA
Yes
36
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA

Project Tile : Owner : Review : Review Date : Next Review date : Process / Location : Can monitoring instrumentation that provides early warning of possible collapse or ground movements be installed? Are there any other major hazards that need to be dealt with? Can materials that can create significant fire risk be removed? Can sources of substantial stored energy, such as preor post - tension cables be specified in the drawings and highlighted for future demolition? Can alterations that have changed the structure significantly be highlighted?

Proposed Upgrading of St Stephen's Primary School No. 2 1-Jul-2013 --St Stephen Primary School Appropriate instrumentation monitoring system will be advised.

Suffocation /injury / death Contractor / Consultants
37
Collapse of soil
12
Yes
Yes
38
Environmental concern / ill heath
Burns / fumes / injury/ eye and respiratory 3 disorder
Materials that may pose fire hazard will be controlled and limited into the site. 4 12 Yes 3 1 3 Yes
Contractor / Consultants
39
Snapping of cables, inaccuracy of installation
Cut injury, structural failure/collapse
Yes
Indicated in drawings. Contractor to submit post-tensioned beam and slab shop drawings and method statement for 4 consultant s approval and capture any changes in the as built drawings. Alterations are indicated and designed for. Changes to design (if proposed by Contractor) will be highlighted by 4 Contractor, and approvals from relevant Authority sought before final installation on site. NA as the school is not occupying the building. 4
OTHERS
Yes
Contractor
40
Structural implications
Collpase / injury
Yes
No
NA
41
Can disruptions to existing utilities within occupied building be avoided?
Security, safety, Collapse, injury / death 4 environmental concern
16
Yes
No
NA
Note: Contractor to conduct risk assessment before carrying out any major / risky activities on site and implement necessary safety procedures
Proposed Upgrading of Existing St. Stephen's School APPENDIX M - BUILDING INFORMATION MODELLING (BIM) REQUIREMENTS BUILDING INFORMATION MODELLING (BIM) CONSULTANT/CONTRACTORS SCOPE OF WORKS
Particular Specifications 1 Definitions (1) BIM Terms of Reference means the terms that relate to the implementation of BIM given in the Annex. Singapore BIM Guide means the guide to the use of BIM published by the Building and Construction Authority for the time being in force.
REQUIREMENTS
IN
THE
(2) 2
The Contractor shall use the Building Information Modelling (BIM) and shall make reference to the BIM Requirements (Annex A) and BIM Terms of Reference (Annex B) for the implementation of BIM in the project and the Singapore BIM Guide (Version 1) for the definitions, specifications and guidelines.
SD2174 MOE Anglo-Chinese School\034_Appendix_M_BIM Requirements_180615
AR/1
Annex A
ANNEX A - BUILDING INFORMATION MODELLING (BIM) REQUIREMENTS

1 1.1 BIM Deliverables The Contractor shall prepare the BIM Deliverables indicated in Table 1 BIM Objective and Responsibility Matrix in this document. The typical BIM elements to be provided in the models shall be in accordance to the Singapore BIM Guide, unless otherwise specified herein. In general, BIM Deliverables shall include a set of digital representations of the Project in the form of CAD Drawings, BIM Models and non-geometrical data that describe the physical, functional and performance characteristics of the Project for the purpose of visualization, simulation, analysis, collaboration, planning and documentation through the project lifecycle. The Contractor shall produce, update, submit and share BIM Deliverables in accordance to the requirements, times and receiving parties as documented in the BIM Execution Plan. The Contractor shall prepare the BIM Deliverables in prevailing version of the following formats: (1) (2) (3) 1.5 Native format of the application and software used in the project PDF or DWF formats for CORENET BIM e-submission and general viewing purposes OpenBIM format as defined in the BuildingSMART website (http://buildingsmart.com/openbim)
1.2
1.3 1.4
The Contractor shall develop an As Built Model up to project handover to the Employer for subsequent operation and maintenance. 1.5.1 The As Built model(s) shall be submitted for the following purposes during the operation and maintenance of the building: Review of the As Built Model(s), including but not limited to 3D visualization, 2D documentation, publication of floor plans etc. Edits and updates of the As Built Model to reflect changes made to the building during operation and maintenance. The As Built model(s) shall be submitted in the format suitable for the puroposes as identified in Clause (above). The formats are as follows: The review of each discipline-specific As-Built Model shall be in DWF or 3D PDF formats. The review of a mult-disciplinary combined As-Built Model shall be in NWD or IFC (latest version) formats. The editing and updating of each discipline-specific As-Built Model shall be in both the native BIM format and the IFC (latest version) formats The As-Built Model(s) of additions & alterations (A&A) shall include details for the scope of work under this contract and frame of the existing blocks following the correct footprint and facade of the building.
1.5.2 1.5.3
2 2.1
BIM Quality Assurance The Contractor shall ensure that the BIM Deliverables meet the quality assurance guidelines as stated in Clause 3.6 and Appendix B (II) of the Singapore BIM Guide. Ownership and Rights to BIM Deliverables The Employer shall have the ownership and exclusive rights to all BIM Deliverables of the Project unless otherwise agreed by the parties. The Employer has the right to grant its appointed agents the rights to use the BIM Deliverables for the purpose of the Project and subsequent operation and maintenance of the Works at his discretion.
3 3.1 3.2
AR/2
Annex A
4 4.1 4.2
BIM Application and Software The set of BIM applications and software proposed by the Contractor shall be fit for purpose and have minimal compatibility and interoperability issues when used in the Project. The Contractor shall reach a consensus with other parties (including consultants) on the type and version of BIM applications and software to be used in the Project, for the Employers approval, before the commencement of the Project.
AR/3
Annex A
Table 1: BIM Objective & Responsibility Matrix

Note: All BIM models shall be used whenever practical or requested, for meetings, coordination, official reviews and communication of options and design intents throughout each project stage as it is being developed, maintained and updated. Project members involved in fulfilling the objective. BIM Project Objective Deliverables A model author; U model users
Arch Struct MEP QS Contractor Other
Conceptual Design Building massing studies or other forms of data representation with indicative dimensions, area, volume, location and orientation Note: Massing models in BIM are not necessary and traditional practice, i.e. massing by non-BIM tools at this stage is acceptable. 1. Create site BIM models for master plan site study and feasibility analysis. 2. Create and compare BIM massing models Space areas and volumes No. of massing models depend on no. of conceptual design alternatives. 3. Generate, freeze and store final documentation of the authorized BIM model in the Conceptual Design phase before progression into the Schematic / Preliminary Design stage. Preliminary Design Generalized building component or system with approximate dimensions, shape, location, orientation, and quantity. Nongeometric properties may be provided. 4. All project members appointed to agree on needs, objectives, process and outcomes of the project. Agreed cut-off dates for exchange of models or other deliverables shall be documented in the BIM Execution Plan. 5. Develop, maintain and update BIM model based on the approved scheme in the Conceptual Design. In preparation for regulatory submission and to the requirements as described in Paragraph 2 of the Consultant s scope of services BIM Execution Plan agreed and signed by related parties For contractors reference only Site Model For contractors reference only
BIM Massing Model
Architectural Model
AR/4
Annex A
BIM Project Objective
Deliverables
Project members involved in fulfilling the objective. A model author; U model users
6. Develop, maintain and update Structural BIM model based on the Architectural Model. Preliminary structural analysis (Use of BIM Model is optional) In preparation for regulatory submission and to the requirements as described in Paragraph 2 of the Consultant s scope of services 7. Develop, maintain and update Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing and Sewerage (MEP) BIM model based on the Architectural Model Preliminary M&E analysis (Use of BIM Model is optional) In preparation for regulatory submission and to the requirements as described in Paragraph 2 of the Consultant s scope of services. 8. Implement design coordination between the Architectural and Structural BIM Models.
Structural Model
MEP Model
Preliminary Design Coordination Report (Architectural and Structural Models only) Preliminary Cost Estimate
9. Prepare cost estimates based on the Architectural Model and to the requirements as describe in Paragraph 2 of the Consultants scope of services. 10. Generate, freeze, and store final documentation of the authorized BIM model in the Preliminary Design phase before progression into the Detailed Design phase. Detailed Design
More detailed version of a generalized building component or system with accurate dimensions, shape, location, orientation and quantity. Non-geometric properties should be provided. 11. Maintain and update the Architectural Model In preparation for regulatory submission and to the requirements as describe in Paragraph 3 of the Consultants scope of services Architectural Model
For contractor s reference only
AR/5
Annex A
Deliverables
In preparation for tender
12. Maintain and update the Structural Model, based on the latest Architectural Model Design, analysis (Use of BIM Model is optional) and detailing In preparation for regulatory submission and to the requirements as describe in Paragraph 3 of the Consultants scope of services In preparation for tender
Structural Model and Calculation
13. Maintain and update the MEP Model, based on the latest Architectural Model Design, analysis (Use of BIM Model is optional) and detailing In preparation for regulatory submission and to the requirements as describe in Paragraph 3 of the Consultants scope of services In preparation for tender
MEP Model and Analysis
14. Implement design coordination between the Architectural, Structural and MEP Models (before issuing of tender) Identify element interferences conflicts and
Clash Detection and Resolution Report (Architectural, Structural and MEP Models) Spatial Validation Report
Verify valid headroom and working spaces for building operations and maintenance activities penetration conflicts will be addressed 15. Produce detailed cost estimation and Bill of Quantities (in accordance with the standard method of measurement) based on BIM models. In preparation for tender and to the requirements as describe in Paragraph 3 of the Consultant s scope of services
Detailed Quantity Cost Estimate & Bills of Quantity
AR/6
Annex A
Deliverables
16. Finalize, freeze and submit Final Design Models (updated and coordinated) within one month after closing of Tender.
Final Design Models for Architecture, Structure and MEP Final compiled report of all clash detections Final Clash Detection and Resolution Report (Architectural, MEP and Structural Models) Final Spatial Validation Report
17. Within one week after Tender award of the Contract, prepare Final Design Models for issue to the successful Contractor, together with working drawings that are derived from it, for his reference.
Final Design Models for Architecture, Structure and MEP
Construction BIM element is modelled with complete fabrication and assembly details over and above the Detailed Design stage where applicable or useful for construction works; otherwise, details may be represented in 2D CAD drawings to complement the Detailed Design stage level of detail. Notes: Ownership of the BIM Model mentioned in this stage belongs to the Contractor only. Drawings issued by consultants and contractors shall be derived from revised and updated BIM models to the fullest extent possible.
18. The contractor will start and continuously update the Detailed Design BIM model to an As-Built BIM Model. 19. Produce Construction Models from Architectural, Structural and MEP Models. The models will be produced in stages. 20. Produce schedules of materials, areas and quantities from the BIM databases for contractors reference. Construction Models with Key Services Coordinated Schedules of materials, areas and quantities
AR/7
Annex A
Deliverables
21. Sub-contractors and specialist subcontractors will generate documents based on the Construction Models Note: Fabrication models and drawings may be produced in the traditional way. 22. Generate, freeze and store final documentation of the authorized BIM model in the Construction phase before progression into the As-Built phase. As-Built
Shop drawings Combined Services Drawings (CSDs) Single Services Drawings (SSDs)
BIM element is similar in level of detail to the Detailed Design stage, but updated with changes during Construction Stage. 23. The contractor will prepare the final AsBuilt BIM Model to reflect amendments in the Architectural, Structural, MEP drawings and the completed form of the construction verified before submitting to the consultants. 24. Consultants to confirm that the As-Built models are in accordance to the BIM model/drawing, corresponding to the final approved amendment plans submitted to the relevant Authorities. Facility Management (Optional) BIM element is modelled as an actual constructed building component or system and is an as-built representation of the actual completed building. Note: Facility Management models in BIM are not necessary and traditional practice, i.e. FM data by non-BIM tools, at this stage is acceptable. 25. [Optional] Incorporate as-built equipment information in the BIM model elements for provision to the Facility Manager (FM). Final as-built models fit for space management, building maintenance & modifications made during occupancy by the FM/Employer. Final as-built models for each discipline U U U U A U
AR/8
Annex B
ANNEX B - TERMS OF REFERENCE: BUILDING INFORMATION MODELLING (adapted from the BIM Particular Conditions with the kind permission of BCA)
1. DEFINITIONS 1.1. BIM means building information modelling and is the process and technology used to create a Model. 1.2. BIM Guide means the guide to the use of BIM published by the Building and Construction Authority for the time being in force (the Singapore BIM Guide) 1.3. BIM Execution Plan means the plan referred to in Clause 3 of this Terms of Reference 1.4. BIM Manager means the person, firm or corporation appointed by the Employer as BIM Manager and includes any person, firm or corporation appointed by the Employer to replace an existing BIM Manager. 1.5. Construction Documents means all drawings, calculations, computer software programmes, samples, patterns, models and other information of a similar nature prepared by the Designer for the Project but not a Model. 1.6. Contribution means the expression, design, data or information that a party to the Project (a) creates or prepares, and (b) incorporates, distributes, transmits, communicates or otherwise shares with other parties to the Project for use in or in connection with a Model for the Project. 1.7. Consultant refers to the party or parties in the Project who are responsible for the design of the whole or some part of the Project under the relevant Principal Agreement(s). 1.8. Drawings means (a) those two-dimensional plans, sketches or other drawings that are contract documents in the Principal Agreement and are created separately from, and are not derived from, a Model and (b) those two-dimensional projections derived from a Model supplemented with independent graphics and annotations specified by the parties to be contract documents in the Principal Agreement. 1.9. Employer means the owner of the Project including any government or statutory Body. 1.10. Model means a digital representation of the physical and functional characteristics of the Project, that is, a three-dimensional representation in electronic format of building elements representing solid objects with true-to-scale spatial relationships and dimensions. A Model may include additional information or data. A Model may be used to describe a Model Element (that is, a portion of the Model representing a component, system or assembly within the Project or Project site), a single Model or multiple Models used in aggregate or in federation. BIM is the process and technology used to create the Model. 1.11. Final Design Model means a Model of those aspects of the Project that are (a) to be modelled as specified in the BIM Execution Plan and (b) have reached the stage of completion that would customarily be expressed in two-dimensional construction documents. This shall not include analytical evaluations, preliminary designs, studies, or renderings. A Model prepared by a Consultant that has not reached the stage of completion specified in this definition is referred to as a Model. 1.12. Model Author means the party responsible for developing the content of a specific Model Element to the level of detail required for a particular phase of the Project. Model Authors are identified in the Model Element Table in the BIM Execution Plan. 1.13. Model User means any individual or entity authorised to use the Model on the Project, such as for analysis, estimating or scheduling. 1.14. Principal Agreement in relation to any party in the Project means the agreement for services, supply and/or construction which that party has entered into for the Project. 1.15. Project means the project in which the parties will be carrying out BIM pursuant to their respective Principal Agreements.
AR/9
Annex B
2.
GENERAL PRINCIPLES (1) The parties to a Project shall incorporate the BIM Terms of Reference into all agreements for services, supply and/or construction where at least one party shall be required to be involved in carrying out BIM. This BIM Terms of Reference shall be passed downstream to subconsultants, suppliers and subcontractors, as applicable. (2) The BIM Terms of Reference does not change any contractual relationships or shifts any risks of the parties in a Project as provided in the Principal Agreements. In particular: 2.2.1. Nothing in this BIM Terms of Reference shall relieve a Consultant from its obligation, nor diminish the role of the Consultant, as the person responsible for and in charge of the design of the Project or any part of the Project.
2.2.2.
Where under applicable law or in contract, the Employer warrants to any party the adequacy and/or sufficiency of design, nothing in this BIM Terms of Reference shall diminish the extent to which the Employer warrants to any party the adequacy and/or sufficiency of design. Participation of a contractor or its subcontractors and suppliers in carrying out BIM shall not constitute performance of design services unless in the Project, the contractor or its subcontractors and suppliers had assumed design responsibility under their respective Principal Agreements. In the event of any inconsistency between a Model and any Drawings, the Drawings shall prevail.
2.2.3.
2.2.4.
(3) As regards the Models produced in BIM: 2.3.1. A Final Design Model is not intended to provide the level of detail needed in order to extract precise materials or object quantities, unless the parties agree in the BIM Execution Plan otherwise. The dimensional tolerances provided in the Principal Agreement shall apply to the dimensions in a Model, unless the parties agree in the BIM Execution Plan otherwise. If there is a conflict between a Final Design Model and any other Model, the Final Design Model shall prevail. If any party to the Project becomes aware of a discrepancy between a Model and either another Model or any contract document in the Principal Agreement, that party shall immediately notify all the other parties to the Principal Agreement and the BIM Manager.
2.3.2.
2.3.3.
2.3.4.
3.
BIM EXECUTION PLAN (1) As soon as practicable and from time to time as required, the BIM Manager shall call all parties to the Project involved in the execution of BIM to meet, confer and use their best efforts to agree upon the terms of or modifications to a BIM Execution Plan. (2) The BIM Execution Plan and the Model shall be developed in accordance with the BIM Guide. (3) As soon as practicable and from time to time as required, the BIM Manager shall call all parties to the Project involved in the execution of BIM to identify and agree on the Final Design Model. (4) The BIM Manager shall schedule and chair all meetings. In the event of any disagreement on the terms or modifications to the BIM Execution Plan, the BIM Managers decision shall be final and conclusive. In the event that more than one BIM Manager has been appointed then the decision shall be the joint decision of the BIM Managers.
AR/10
Annex B
4.
RISK ALLOCATION (1) Each Model Authors Contribution is intended to be shared with subsequent Model Authors and Model Users throughout the course of the Project. In contributing content to the Model, the Model Author does not convey any ownership right in the content provided or in the software used to generate the content. Unless otherwise granted in a separate licence, any subsequent Model Author s and Model User s right to use, modify, or further transmit the Model is specifically limited to the design and construction of the Project, and nothing contained in this BIM Terms of Reference conveys any other right to use the Model for another purpose. It is understood that while the content of a specific Model Element may include data that exceeds the required level of detail specified in the BIM Execution Plan, Model Users and subsequent Model Authors may rely on the accuracy and completeness of a Model Element consistent only with the content required for the level of detail identified in the BIM Execution Plan. Any use of, or reliance on, a Model Element inconsistent with the level of detail indicated in the BIM Execution Plan by subsequent Model Authors or Model Users shall be at their own sole risk and without liability to the Model Author. Subsequent Model Authors and Model Users shall indemnify and defend the Model Author from and against all claims arising from or related to the subsequent Model Author s or Model Users unauthorised modification to, or use of, the Model Author s content. To the extent that any or all Final Design Models are included as contract documents, parties may rely upon the accuracy of information in those Final Design Models (including dimensional accuracy) unless otherwise specified in the BIM Execution Plan. The standard of care applicable to each party regarding any Contribution shall be in accordance with the Principal Agreement or if none is specified, in accordance to applicable law. Each party shall use its best efforts to minimize the risk of claims and liability arising from the use of or access to its Model or the Final Design Model. Such efforts shall include promptly reporting to the relevant party and the BIM Manager any errors, inconsistencies or omissions it discovers in its Model or the Final Design Model. However, this section shall not relieve any party of liability for any of its Contribution. No party involved in creating a Model shall be responsible for costs, expenses, liabilities, or damages which may result from use of its Model beyond the uses stated in the BIM Execution Plan.
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
5.
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS (1) Each party warrants to the other parties to the Principal Agreement that either (a) that party is the owner of all copyrights in all of that partys Contributions, or (b) that party is licensed or otherwise authorised by the holders of copyrights of expression contained in the Contribution to make such Contribution under the terms of this BIM Terms of Reference. Each party agrees to indemnify and hold such other parties harmless against claims of third parties arising out of or relating to, claims or demands relating to infringement or alleged infringement of expression contained in that party s Contribution. Nothing in this BIM Terms of Reference is intended to limit, transfer, or otherwise affect any of the intellectual property rights that a party may have with respect to any Contribution, except for licences or permissions expressly granted by this BIM Terms of Reference or the Principal Agreement. (2) Subject to the provisions of Clause 5.1, each party grants to the other party or parties to the Principal Agreement for the sole purpose of the other party or parties carrying out their respective duties and obligations relating to the Project: 5.2.1. A limited, non-exclusive licence to produce, distribute, display, or otherwise use that partys Contribution for purposes of this Project only.
AR/11
Annex B
5.2.2. A limited, non-exclusive sub-licence to reproduce, distribute, display, or otherwise use, for the purposes of this Project only, the Contributions of those other parties to the Project who have granted that party an identical licence or sub-licence; 5.2.3. The right to grant an identical sublicence to any other party to the Project with which the licensee has a contract in which this BIM Terms of Reference is incorporated by reference; and 5.2.4. A limited, non-exclusive licence to reproduce, distribute, display, or otherwise use any Model containing such Contributions, or any other Model with which the Model containing such Contributions is federated or otherwise related.
The limited licence granted in this Clause shall include any archival purposes permitted in this BIM Terms of Reference or in the Principal Agreement. (3) If a party to a Principal Agreement is the holder of copyrights in the Contribution of another party to the Project or is the grantee of an exclusive licence with respect to such Contribution, then such holder or exclusive licensee hereby grants to the other party or parties to the Principal Agreement the right to grant to other parties to the Project with which that other party has or those parties have a contract in which this BIM Terms of Reference is incorporated, a limited licence in the terms set forth in Clause 5.2. (4) The Employer s entitlement to use any Final Design Model after completion of the Project shall governed by the Principal Agreement(s) between the Employer and the Designer(s). (5) Unless otherwise limited herein or by express licence-limiting terms in the Principal Agreement, the nonexclusive licence granted in this BIM Terms of Reference shall remain in effect as permitted by law. In addition, after final completion of the Project, the non-exclusive licence shall be limited to keeping an archival copy of Project-related Contributions. (6) In the absence of express language to the contrary in the Principal Agreement or in this BIM Terms of Reference, nothing in this BIM Terms of Reference, and no act by any party in the Project in furtherance of this BIM Terms of Reference, shall be deemed or construed to deprive or dispossess any party in the Project of copyrights or licence rights held by that party in its respective underlying Contribution to any Model. Other parties, persons or entities that provide Contributions to a Model shall not be deemed to be co-authors in the Contributions of other parties to the Project.
AR/12
APPENDIX N SAFETY PROVISION

1. Site Safety Measures The Contractor shall allow for the compliance with the Workplace Safety and Health Act (hereafter referred to as the Act) and the provisions of the Workplace Safety and Health Regulation (Construction). Regulations (hereafter referred to as the Regulations) and any amendments or reenactment thereto. Precedent to the commencement of the Works, the Contractor shall first obtain a Certificate of Registration, under Part III of the Act. The Contactor is required to carry out 3rd party site safety audit in a six (6) monthly basis and follow up with the rectification to any findings. Two (2) copies of audit report and accompanying action plan is to be submitted within 2 weeks of the audit. It shall be the duty of the Contractor to comply with all such requirements of the Regulations, as affect him or any person or persons employed by him, and as related to any work, act or operation performed or about to be perform by him. The Contractor shall not permit any person to do anything not in accordance with the generally accepted principles of safe and sound practice. The Contractor shall ensure save environment on the Site at all times. All safety provisions shall be properly maintained and shall not be removed without the written approval of the Superintending Office (SO). The Contractor shall ensure that necessary and sufficient precautions are taken by his workmen when safety provisions are used. The Contractor shall not allow any of the safety provisions, to be used unless he has satisfied himself that the provision is safe. The Contractor shall submit a safety programme to the SO for approval prior to the commencement of the Works. Such programme shall include safety rules and regulations, small group activities, company safety policy, safety cycle activities, safety slogans, safety campaign, slide shows and other such activities that the SO may direct. The safety programmes must be displayed at the outside of the site office. The Contractor shall display safety posters at the site office, site canteen, exit/entry points of buildings, passenger cum material hoist area and staircase area. The Contractor shall submit design and calculation as required, certified by his Professional Engineer (herein referred to as PE), for approval within one month from the commencement of Works. The approval of the S.O. shall not relieve the Contractor and his PE of the need to ensure the adequacy and sufficiency of the safety provisions. The Contractor is deemed to have allowed in the Contract Sum for all costs and expenses for the safety provisions. The Contractor shall ensure that the requirements of the Regulations and the following requirements are strictly complied with at all times : (a) Metal Scaffold The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain to MOMs approval the metal scaffold. Where available on site, the Contractor shall allow free use of scaffold by all contractors, sub-contractors, specialists, artisans and other tradesmen employed by the Employer. The metal scaffold shall be of a type approved by the Chief Inspector. It shall comply with the requirements of the Singapore Standard Code of Practice for Scaffolding, CP 14 and any amendment or reenactment thereto.
SD2174 MOE Anglo Chinese School\035_Appendix_N_Safety_Provision
AS/1

1. Site Safety Measures (cont d) (a) Metal Scaffold (cont d) The metal scaffold and any components therein shall be designed according to the CP14 and Workplace Safety and Health Regulations by a Professional Engineer employed by the Contractor (hereinafter referred to as PE for the purposes of this sub-clause. The Professional Engineer s drawings and calculation shall be submitted to the SO before the erection of the scaffold. The scaffold shall be erected ahead of the structural work from the second storey and supported by cantilevered platforms erected according to the Drawings of the PE. The Contractor and his PE shall ensure that the building structure can resist the load imposed by the scaffold. The scaffold shall be designed to carry working platforms. Signboards showing the maximum loading allowed on the scaffold shall be displayed on the scaffold. The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain working platforms and toe boards in accordance with Regulation. The working platform shall be at least 635mm wide and secured to the scaffolds. Approved galvanized metal working platform shall be provided at every alternate nd lift, starting from the 2 lift of the scaffold. This also applies to the immediate level below the top most level and the roof level of the building. Where the height between the platform at the roof level and the platform directly below is 2 lifts or less, the latter platform may not be necessary subjected to the approval of the S.O. No omission from the Contract Sum shall be made in the event that such a platform is not necessary. The material used for the metal working platform shall be at least 1 mm thick galvanized steel. Working platforms shall be adequately secured to scaffold frames at the required levels. The connections between working platform and scaffold frame, and between the working platforms shall be subject to the approval of the approval of the SO. For any portion of the working platform where the use of metal is not suitable, the Contractor may use timber platform subject to the approval of the SO. The platform shall be complete with 200 mm high toe board and metal guardrail at least 1.1 m above the platform.
AS/2

1. Site Safety Measures (cont d) The platform shall be at least 635 mm in width and the edge of the platform shall not be more than 40 mm away from the inner face of the standards of the scaffolding frame. The platform shall be used for : (i) (ii) erecting and dismantling of formwork of structural elements; transferring of formwork and other materials from one working level to another, and external finishing works.
(iii)
The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain an overlying Screening Net to cover the entire external face of the scaffold. The installation of the net shall follow the erection of the scaffold closely. A 200 mm high toe board shall be provided at the base of the net. After installation, there shall be no opening between separate sets of the net and any torn net shall be repaired immediately. The net shall comply with the following requirements : (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) Maximum mesh size (square) Twine No. Knot type Minimum 12 ply : : : 15 mm minimum 350 D single or English knot
The safety net shall comply with SS292 or other approved standards. The scaffold shall be effectively tied to the building structure by means of tie-backs. All tiebacks shall be painted with bright colour for easy identification. The scaffold and any components therein shall be erected, or substantially extended to or dismantled, by scaffold erectors, under the immediate supervision of a scaffold supervisor, according to the Regulations. The scaffold and its components shall only be dismantled and removed after the SO has given his permission. (a) Personal Protective Equipment The Contractor shall provide and maintain suitable personal protective equipment to all workmen employed on the Site. The Contractor shall ensure that such personal protective equipment comply with the requirements of the Regulations. The Contractor shall also ensure that all equipment are properly used by his workmen during the course of their work. The Contractor shall record the issuance of all equipment to his workmen in the prescribed forms and such forms shall be kept in the site office and made available for inspection at all times. Two mirrors of sizes 600 mm x 1500 mm are to be installed for workers to check their personal protective equipment during Tool Box Meeting. (b) Working Platforms The Contractor shall construct temporary working platforms, complete with toe boards and middle and top rails, to the design and drawings of his professional engineer. The working platforms shall be at least 635 mm wide. The Contractor shall prominently mark the planks or boards on the edges (with bright coloured paints or other means) to distinguish them from those that are not suitable for use as work platforms. Unmarked boards and planks placed on scaffolds will be considered as unsafe working platforms.
AS/3

1. Site Safety Measures (cont d) (c) Working Platforms for Lift Shafts and Voids The Contractor shall provide working platforms, according to the design of his professional engineer, for the erection of lift shafts and void walls. The lift shaft platforms shall effectively cover the lift voids. (d) Overhead Shelters The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain overhead shelters at every point of entry/exit to buildings of two or more storey in height. The overhead shelter shall be constructed immediately below the second storey. The overhead shelters shall project at least 3.0 m from the building edge and shall be at least 1.5 m wide. The overhead shelters shall be made of curved metal roofing with radius of at least 1.5 m or pitched metal roofing with a slope greater than one in two, with timber boarding below supported by steel pipes resting on rigid base. The access to , along and egress from the entry/exit points shall be kept free from obstructions and accumulation of oil, greases, water and other substances causing slipping and tripping. (e) Peripheral Overhead Shelters The Contractor shall provide peripheral overhead shelters for buildings of more than 15.0 m in height. It shall be erected in place when the construction reaches the fourth storey slab. The overhead shelter shall be at least 2.0 m wide, and inclined so that the outer edge is at least 150 mm higher than the inner edge. The overhead shelter shall be sufficiently strong to support a weight of at least 75 kg load. (f) Barricade to Lift Openings, Voids and the Open Sides of Buildings The Contractor shall barricade all lift openings, internal voids and the open buildings where a workman is liable to fall a distance of more than 3.0 m. The barricade shall be at least 1.1 m high and shall have sufficient strength and rigidity to withstand a load of 50 kg. (g) Mechanical Suspended Scaffold Where mechanical suspended scaffold systems are to be used, the Contractor shall first obtain a Certificate of Registration under the Workplace Safety and Health Act from MOL and a written approval from the SO prior to the use. The mechanical suspended scaffold system shall comply with the requirements of the Singapore Standard Code of Practice for Suspended Cradles CP20. Where the use of access scaffolding is not stipulated, suspended scaffolds may be used for finishing work. All operators of suspended scaffolds may be used for finishing work. All operators of suspended scaffold shall have undergone a training course approved by the SO. Life lines shall be provided for the suspended scaffold users to anchor their safety belts.
AS/4

1. Site Safety Measures (cont d) (h) Authorized Operators for Machinery and Vehicles The Contractors must ensure that all operators of machinery/vehicles used the construction work sites (eg. Mobile/tower cranes, excavators, etc.) have received sufficient training and are competent to operate the machine. The training records of such workers must be kept available for inspection by the SO, not later than one month after the start of the works. The Contractor shall inform the SO within one week of any changes made. The Contractor shall have a system that could positively and easily identify the workers who have been designated to operate or work near the specified machinery. For instance, only workers that have been trained to operate an excavator will be permitted to operate it. Such workers should be identified with a marking on their helmets stating that they are the designated excavator operators. When machinery is not in use, it must be secured against use by unauthorized persons. Keys used to activate machinery, especially vehicular machinery must be removed when the machine is not in use and kept only by authorized persons. (i) Safety Guards The Contractor shall provide safety guards to all moving machine parts that are likely to injure a workman. (j) Site Safety Officers/Supervisors The Contractor shall appoint a part-time/full time Site Safety Officer/Supervisor in accordance to WHS regulations, who shall be suitably qualified and competent to take charge of all matters related to safety in accordance to the ACT. He shall spend his time fully on improving and enforcing Site Safety. (k) Tower Cranes and Other Tall Construction Equipment The Contractor shall comply with all height restrictions on the use of tower crane or other tall Construction Equipment, imposed by the Civil Aviation Authority of Singapore and Ministry of Defense. In addition, the height clearance of tower crane or other tall Construction Equipment shall be submitted to the SO for approval before they are brought to the Site. Force limiting device, speed limiters and moment limit switches shall be installed for all cranes. (l) Tower Cranes and Other Tall Construction Equipment (contd) The Contractor shall submit detailed layout drawings and safety requirement of the tower cranes to the MOL and the SO for approval at least one month prior to their installation. The slewing radii of the tower cranes shall not overlay, unless the tower cranes are equipped with slewing limit switches and their jibs are at different levels. The slewing limit switch shall be activated to stop the slewing action before the jibs slews into the overlap zone. The jib of a tower crane shall not be allowed to slew outside the contract boundary lines without the written approval of the SO. The free standing mast of a tower crane must be certified by the Contractors Professional Engineer prior to its use on the site.
AS/5

1. Site Safety Measures (cont d) The Contractor shall submit detailed drawings and calculations of the type of foundation support and the tie-back for the tower crane, duly endorsed by his Professional Engineer, together with technical information to the SO for approval at least one month prior to their construction. The Contractors Professional Engineer shall certify that the free standing height of the mast is structurally adequate and sound before the tie-back is installed. No tower crane shall be installed and supported on the constructed RC structure of a building. (m) Access for the Use of Mobile Crane and Piling Machine Where the Contractor uses mobile cranes and piling machines on the Site which is next to existing buildings or public roads or Mass Rapid Transit lines, the access for the mobile cranes and piling machines shall be of steel plates or reinforced concrete or bituminous pavement as approved by the SO. All such access shall be provided over adequate compacted hardcore base. The Contractor shall provide full access for the movement of the cranes and piling machines and for their lifting or pile driving operations. The access shall be able to distribute the load so as not to exceed the bearing capacity of the underlying materials. The Contractor shall engage at his own cost and expenses a Professional Engineering (hereinafter referred to as PE for the purposes of this sub-clause) to design the access. The drawings and calculations endorsed by the PE shall be submitted for approval by the SO before the construction of the access. The access shall be constructed according to the approved drawings and maintained in good condition at all times throughout the Time for Completion. (n) Mobile Crane The Contractor shall submit layout and details of the crane access to the SO for approval prior to the use of the crane on the access. The Contractor shall ensure and check that the crane access is properly constructed. The Contractor shall keep all records of inspections of the cranes access at the Site and produce them for examination when requested by the SO. The boom of the mobile crane with hoisted load shall not be allowed to swing outside the contract boundary without the written approval of the SO. The Contractor shall ensure the installation of barriers to warn the crane operator of depressions, excavated areas and other obstructions. Moment limiters shall be installed for all cranes. The Contractor shall station a supervisor on the Site to oversee and guide the crane operator during positioning, hoisting and slewing. The cranes shall be tested by an Approved Person before its use on the Site irrespective of any valid test certificate. The Contractor shall ensure daily checks are carried out by the crane operator and maintenance checks conducted once every three months. The crane must have overhaul checks before it is used on the Site. Test certificate, overhaul certificates, maintenance certificates, inspection records by crane operator, approved persons and the Contractor s site engineer shall be properly documented, kept on the Site and produced for inspection by the SO.
AS/6

1. Site Safety Measures (cont d) (o) Crane Operator and Lift Supervisor The Contractor shall comply with the Workplace Safety and Health (Crane Drivers and Operators) Regulations. He shall appoint at least one full time lifting supervisor to supervise all lifting operations of any crane for the Site. However, where more than one crane are used on the Site, the number of lifting supervisor employed by the Contractor shall be increased as required by the SO. No lifting activity shall be allowed without the supervision of the Lifting Supervisor. The lifting supervisor must be a competent person designated by the Contractor and possesses a certificate on Safety Instruction Course for Lifting Supervisor. He shall supervised all lifting activities and ensure that unsafe conditions are rectified. The crane operator and lifting supervisor shall carry out their duties strictly according to the abovementioned Regulations. The Contractor shall maintain a list of crane operators and lifting supervisors with the names, identification card or passport numbers, qualifications and years of experience on the Site at all times. The SO reserves the right to examine the list as and when required. (p) Warning Signs and Lights The Contractor shall display warning signs of sizes 900 mm x 600 mm at strategic points around the periphery of the Site where trespassing is likely to occur. Such signs shall have the words DANGER KEEP OUT in the four official languages painted in red on a white background in gloss finishing paint. Warning lights shall be placed at similar positions at night to serve as a warning. If work is carried out near public roads, all signage shall comply with the recommendations of the Temporary Road Signage Manual issued by LTA. (q) Temporary Chute for the Removal of Construction Debris The Contractor shall provide adequate number of temporary chute to dispose construction debris in accordance with the Regulations. A large bin at the tower end of each of the chute shall be provided and emptied regularly. The chute can be a proprietary system or fabricated on Site. The Contractor shall submit detailed drawings and calculations duly endorsed by the Professional Engineer to the SO at least one month prior to their installation. The temporary chute shall be removed only with the permission of the SO. (r) Housekeeping The Contractor shall maintain and ensure a safe working environment by keeping the site neat and tidy, and free from all hazards and debris. Materials shall be stacked up safety. All work areas and accesses thereto shall be kept free from hazards and debris. Such housekeeping shall be carried out in such a manner and at such times so as not to cause any inconvenience to either the adjoining owners, occupiers and the public. Debris shall be wet to minimize the risk of dust. Containers for debris and rubbish are to be provided at the designated places.
AS/7

1. Site Safety Measures (cont d) (s) Temporary Staircase The Contractor shall provide and maintain 0.8 m minimum wide temporary metal staircases from one working floor to another. The staircase shall be placed against the adjacent staircase walls or formwork of the staircase walls that are under construction. The outer sides of the staircases shall be provided with metal handrails 1.1 m above the outer staircase strings. The bottom of the staircase shall be covered fully with metal plate. (t) Gas Cylinders and Related Equipment The Contractor shall use gas cylinders fitted with a low pressure gauge and a high pressure gauge, reducing valve with pressure regular, and safety relief device. The gas cylinders shall not be kept in the same room where welding, cutting or heating is being carried out or placed within five metres of any source of heat. The gas cylinders must always be kept upright in a wheeled-trolley. The hose connecting a gas cylinder to an apparatus for cutting, welding, heating or other related works shall be of good construction and sound material, free from defect, properly maintained, and not entangled or kinked. A flashback arrestor or any other similar device which stops flashback that is acceptable to the Chief Inspector must be fitted at every outlet of a gas cylinder and every inlet of an apparatus. The gas cylinders and hoses shall be colour-coded to conform to the Singapore Standard 152: Identification of Contents of industrial Gas Containers or any amendments thereof. The Contractor shall engage a competent person to check the safety devices referred herein once in every 6 months. (u) Electrical Installations All electrical installations at the work sites must be done in accordance with safe and sound practice (CP44: Code of Practice for Temporary Electrical Installations for Construction and Building Sites). Electrical supply from each distribution board must be protected by an effective Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (ELCB). Approved types of electrical sockets and plugs must be used at all times. The Practice of sticking the bare wires into the socket outlets will not be permitted. All wiring must not lie on the floor or ground. They should be supported on proper insulators. (v) Others The Contractor shall provide and maintain guard or fence or barrier around excavations, lift pits or other similar potential places of danger to prevent accidents. The guards, fence and barrier shall be of sound material, good construction and possess adequate strength. The Contractor shall provide and maintain storey number indicators of size 400 mm x 400 mm at every staircase area and 900 mm x 900 mm at the metal scaffold enclosing passenger cum material host. The indicators shall be displayed at every storey.
AS/8

2. Regular Safety Inspection The Contractor s site safety office/supervisor shall conduct periodic inspections on the provision of safety measures. The Contractor shall rectify immediately any contravention of or non-compliance with the Workplace Safety and Health Act or Workplace Safety and Health Regulations or safety measures specified. 3. Stoppages of Work Depending on the nature of the accident or mishap, the SO or any other Government Authorities may order a total or partial stoppage of work to allow investigations and/or remedial measures to be effected. In the event of such stoppage, or any stoppages of work due to safety violations, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any claims for compensation or extension of time for completion.
AS/9

SSS - Volume 1 of 2 (Part 3 of 3)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SSS - Volume 1 of 2 (Part 3 of 3)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Proposed Upgrading of Existing St.

(018a) (018b) (018c) (018d) (018e) (018f) (018g) (018h)

6 Pages 9 Pages 5 Pages 49 Pages 12 Pages 32 Pages 30 Pages 18 Pages

ECAS-EJ CONSULTANTS PTE LTD

Specification: General (Oct 2011) Page 2 of 6

ECAS-EJ CONSULTANTS PTE LTD

Specification: General (Oct 2011) Page 3 of 6

ECAS-EJ CONSULTANTS PTE LTD

Specification: General (Oct 2011) Page 4 of 6

ECAS-EJ CONSULTANTS PTE LTD

Specification: General (Oct 2011) Page 5 of 6

ECAS-EJ CONSULTANTS PTE LTD

Specification: General (Oct 2011) Page 6 of 6

ECAS-EJ CONSULTANTS PTE LTD

Specification: Earthwork (Oct 2011)

ECAS-EJ CONSULTANTS PTE LTD

Specification: Earthwork (Oct 2011)

ECAS-EJ CONSULTANTS PTE LTD

FILLING AROUND FOUNDATIONS OR MAKING UP LEVELS

Specification: Earthwork (Oct 2011)

ECAS-EJ CONSULTANTS PTE LTD

Specification: Earthwork (Oct 2011)

ECAS-EJ CONSULTANTS PTE LTD

Type of Compaction Plant

Max. depth of compac ted layer (mm)

Min. No. of passes

Max. depth of compa cted layer (mm)

Min. No. of passes

Specification: Earthwork (Oct 2011)

ECAS-EJ CONSULTANTS PTE LTD

125 125 150

125 125 150

125 10* 125 8* Unsuitable

Unsuitable 125 12 150 12

150 10 Unsuitable Unsuitable

Pneumatic tyred roller

125 150 175 225 300 350 400 450

Unsuitable Unsuitable 125 12 125 10 125 10 150 8 150 8 175 6

150 10* Unsuitable Unsuitable Unsuitable Unsuitable Unsuitable Unsuitable Unsuitable

Type of Compaction Plant

Max. Min. depth No. of of compa passes cted layer (mm)

Max. depth of compa cted layer (mm)

Min. No. of passes

Vibratory plate compactor

Static pressure under base plant 8.6-10.3kN/m2 10.3-12.1kN/m2 12.1-13.8kN/m2 13.8-17.2kN/m2

Unsuitable Unsuitable Unsuitable 100 6

75 100 150 150

Specification: Earthwork (Oct 2011)

ECAS-EJ CONSULTANTS PTE LTD

Mass Kilogramme 2.1-2.6kN 2.61-5.2kN More than 75

100 125 200

100 125 150

150 200 225

Mass Kilogramme 100 More than 500

Type of Compaction Plant

Max. Min. depth No. of of compa passes cted layer (mm)

Max. depth of compa cted layer (mm)

Min. No. of passes

Unsuitable Unsuitable 100 12 125 8 150 4 175 4 200 4 225 4 250 4

75 75 125 150 150 175 200 225 250

150 150 150 200 225 250 275 300 300

16 12 6 10* 12* 10* 8* 8* 8*

Specification: Earthwork (Oct 2011)